CiXIV40 Provided by University Library of Tübingen Transcribed with Tesseract

To the best of our knowledge this work is free of known copyrights or related property rights (public domain).

 A Grammar of the Malayalim Language, as spoken in the principalities of Travancore and Cochin, and the districts of North and South Malabar Peet, Joseph e — ~o = o - —- ohs e B =T o i p— e & o e e ——— - B 0 Bt = & = R — = o s 2 R 15 = s it £ oz o & 7 i » ¥ 2 o ¥ S S5 L % gl " o 5 R .w 3 o 23 AR e - i 2o S S S5l X e 3 2F s e i 2 5 ik 3§ e Hilea o e = o S R Z 25 TR e i £ LA Lol s, S = s, i i SRR S 2 % o it i # @ Al e % e L =4 2 s e 24t e £ e ik o e 3 %2 i a2 i o “a = o > i e 43 £ S ot Ay - S G il Hirees i i 3 v o G . S LA 3 i e i o .. 2 e e A o £ Y S ik ghes i b H‘” ~ s s s quldhiio: b S =3 g g : s 39 & e = gk o 3 i bed i s Py W) i i b o 23 L) S PSR = S e e i £ S 7 Frae e s S i S N o N, 28 i iy & .3 PO T S % % S s ks 3 e o < & T . s oy e s ST SRS o B R R i = e 5 s & A s i = e o o B B - e 27 b S o e s i i X R s, S it {5 o 3 s i e e £ 5 5 % pe e oz, =~ o e W %, . iy o 3 w GE i o | o s i bl S 4 B e % Sl 3 B PRE RS s 4 G ot e ARSI 2 S s e s 5 e 3 L i i e ™ ey ot R S 25 s e £ iy ra st s i (il e ek i = AT @ . o . % e S AR = 3 g 28 sidaary iy s S A i s B et ;i EE ok e 5K B i b ey = R i = P =5 ax = L i < Lk e 5 o o a5 e & & i a: S F e 2 g b % 5 Py Jir s o 7 e g2 it 200 = s e i S L R o . - ot i S N12<511653708 021 i i I LT UB Tlbingen Co X4, R e RAEy 7. e o7 N, (ki e R e s e i it 3 1 PR % b ¥ pi Rt g —— — e . S ” - —— B —————————— = X ¥ 4! A GRAMMAR OF THE MALAYALIM LANGUAGE, AS SPOKEN IN THE PRINCIPALITIES OF TRAVANCORE AND COCHIN, AND THE DISTRICTS OF NORTH AND SOUTH MALABAR. DEDICATED BY PERMISSION TO HI1S HIGHNESS THE RAJAH OF TRAVANCORE. By tae Rev. JOSEPH PEET, OF THE CHURCH MISSIONARY SOCIETY MAVELICARA, NEAR QUILON., e — S COTTAYAM: PRINTED AT THE CHURcH MissioN PrEss — 1841. S ‘e s Y .7 TO HIS HIGHNESS THE RAJAH OF TRAVANCORE. Sir, In gratefully acknowledging the favour conferred by permitting this work to appear under the sanction of 80 honourable a name, allow me to assure you that the encouragement rendered by your Highness towards the advancement ofscience and general education, will secure you the approbation of the wise and good, and cause your memory to be cherished with esteem and affection by an enlightened posterity. That your Highness’ life may be long spared, to see and fully participate in the fruits of those efforts made by yourself and others to diffuse the blessings of civili- zation and true knowledge, is the earnest desire of Your HicuNESS’ Much obliged and MAVELICARA, Very humble Servant, Nov. 15th. 1841 THE AUTHOR. PREFACE. = The language, (the grammatical construction of which is the subject of the following pages,) is spoken in that part of Southern India which extends from Mount Dilly to Cape Comorin, and from the Western Ghauts to the Sea The greater part of this extent of territory, now desig- nated Malayala, would appear to have been originally under the government of Brahmins who came from the North. At present, it includes the independent states of Travancore and Cochin; and the Collectorates of Malabar and Canara. The language of this country is said, by some, to have been derived from Sanscrit ; by others, it is supposed to be a mere dialect of the Tamul. Such opinicns are entertained by those only, who have acquired a knowledge of Malayalim through the medi- um of Books written by learned Natives. It remains however to be shown that the vernacular language has always been considered beneath the notice of the learned ; it has never been cultivated or used by ,a them, but for ordinary purposes ; no Native Grammar has ever been written; nor would it be perhaps possible te find a native scholar acquainted with the principles of his own language. On these accounts it is that most Native Works are written in Sanscrit,* and the few Books that may be term- * This has been termed Grandonica Malabarica, but improper'y; for the only conunexion it has with the vernacular language is, that it is written in the Malayalim Character. % Vi PREFACE. ed Malayalim, abound with so many words, 1dioms, and illustrations borrowed from the Sanscrit and the Tamul, the latter having long been a cultivated language, that judging of Malayalim from such writings, it is not surprising that its origin should have been traced to a wrong source. It 1s indeed as indisputably true, as it is readily con- ceded, that the Malayalim Alphabet with the exception of ¥, o, and &, which are never used as initials, is derived from the Nagree; and that the language itself abounds with Tamul, but more particularly with Sansecrit terms ; but these facts cannot, in fairness, be urged as a proof —— of any radical connexion between these languages; they merely show that the improvements of a more advanced people have been borrowed, as in many similar cases of other nations. Whereas, by comparing the different structures of those languages, and by closely examining into the derivation of words, the Student will not fail to come to the conclusion, that the origin of the Malayalim is altogether distinct from either that of the Sanscrit or Tamul. The same cause has, in all probability, given rise to another mistaken notion respecting this language ; viz. that the Malayalim is considered most pure inthe coun- try of which Calicut may be denominated the centre. Now as the actual experience of intelligent Natives and Europeans, well acquainted with most parts of the Country and with the various dialects spoken i them, does not coincide with this opinion; it seems difficult to account for it, except upon the supposition that as a Sanscrit College, chiefly for teaching the Vadums, has long existed in the North; more Sanscrit works have PREFACE. Vil ) been written, and more Sanscrit spoken there, than in some other places, and that this has been mistaken for cultivated Malayalim. But not to mention that in the South, as at N@m#s0, Sanscrit places of learning exist, as well as in the North ; a very slight acquaintance with the causes of the growth and decay of language would, if theory did not inter- | vene, lead to a different and opposite conclusion. It 1s a well known fact that while North Malayala, or what now constitutes the Collectorates of Canara and Ma- labar, has long ceased to be governed by native rulers, f and for a much longer time has had constant intercourse 5' with foreigners of different European and Asiatic Nati- ons; South Malayala, or Travancore has escaped foreign controul, together with all the attendant vicissitudes such if changes never fail to produce, and in nothing more emi- nently than in a language. This is so obviously the case %’ in all parts of this coast, whether North or South; that | a Traveller either at Calicut or Quilon, which has long been occupied by Europeans and Native Regiments, will find a knowledge of Hindostanee, or Tamul to be quite as useful as that of the vernacular language. Withregard to the question as to where the languageis spoken in its greatest purity, if reliance may be placed upon the opinions of those who have resided for some years in the country, and have long studied the subject; it would appear that the best Malayalim is spoken in the interior, all along the country adjoining the Ghauts both North and South: but it is also found that almost every place has a set of words and phrases peculiar to itself, nearly the whole of which are equally corrupt: in many instances Malayalim words appear to have under- Vil PREFACE. gone radical alterations by the elision or insertion of letters, caused probably, in the first instance by incor- rect pr(}nunciation: in other cases words are restricted to local significations, often the reverse of the sense in which they are generally received. In the Northern and Southern Extremities of Malayala, the dialects differ so materially as to make it difficult for the inhabitants of one part to converse intelligibly with those of the other. The labours of European Missionaries during the last twenty years, have doubtless tended to improve this language; but with the exception of a work entitled Out- lines of a Grammar of the Malayalim Language, printed while these Sheets were being prepared for the press; the only attempt at publishing a Malayalim Grammar was made, as long since as the year 1799, from notes presented to the compiler by a Romish Bishop. That work, which has long been out of print, was from the nature of the circumstances under which it was published, necessarily defective, for without detracting from the merits either of the author or compiler; the notes, judging from the printed Copy, merely contained a sketch of Grammar. The first essay, apparently, of a tyro in the language: and from the statements of the compiler in the preface; it would appear, that owing to sickness, the work had to pass through several hands, some of those employed in it being totally unacquainted {as the work itself proves) with the Malayalim language. With reference to the work now submitted, as it is the first full grammar ever published, it may be expected that some account should here be given of the principles upon which it is written, and of the sources from whence information has been derived. PREFACE. X i This reasonable expectation the Author now proceeds '« to satisfy by stating, that before he commenced to write this work he laid down for his guidance the following i law, that as language is the medium of intelligibie com- i} munication, so there must be certain rules or general prin- )\ ciples by which the different forms of speech are regu- i lated in order to their being enabled to convey the same ideas to different individuals; and that the province of grammar is not to give laws, or, as it is sometimes term- b ed, to fix a language, but to develope and teach the # Rules that are already fixed by the previously existing d usuages of the language of which it professes to treat. )y In preparing this work, besides the help derived from ] Native Books, the only assistance received has been N from Native teachers and this merely extended to the elementary parts of the language, to corrections in S Orthography, and to information as to whether the N Malayalim examples were idiomatic and in general use.* 8 When the Author had acquired sufficient knowledge (7 of the language to form a Grammar for his own private use, he was solicited to prepare it for publication: when this was determined upon, no pains were spared to ren- ¥ Here it may not be deemed irrelevant to warn the yonng student that he will in this respect have to labour under great disadvantages. If he put bimself under the instruction of a mere common M alayalim teacher $ he will only acquire a style and language that will cause him to be de- spised. As to what, relatively speaking, may be termed good Malayalim Moonshees; they can in general give a tolerably fair insight into the principles of the Sanscrit language; but if the Student press them for ex- planations and reasons respecting the Malayalim he must take great care he is not taught to graft Malayalim and Tamul words on Sanscrit rules A friend of mine, af- and idioms, and so spend his time to no purpose. ter studying for a long time to his own and his Moonshee’s satisfaction, when he began to put his learning into practice found that he had just acquired enough to get laughed at, but not to be understood: he had laboured hard to store up a heterogeneous compound of Sanscrit and Malayalim that was intelligible to none but himself and his Moonshee. PREFACE. X der it both useful and acceptable. While travelling in different parts of the country in the prosecution of his more important duties as a Missionary, he has for several years carefully studied the language; comparing the provincialisms, and idiomatic phrases as spoken by differ- ent classes, and in different parts: noting or rejecting mere local or foreign expressions and, in short, endea- vouring as much as possible to render the work a com- plete grammar of the vernacular language. The different sheets when written out for the press underwent a strict examination by some of the Author’s respected friends, to whom his thanks are in a special manner due, as their criticisms enabled him to correct many imperfections that had otherwise escaped notice. The plan and style of this work have been regulated by the object that more particularly induced the writer to consent to its being published ; this was two fold, First, to assist strangers desirous of acquiring a know- ledge of the Malayalim language. Secondly and chiefly,* to assist and encourage Native gentlemen acquainted with English to cultivate the study of their own beautiful language, with the ultimate view of promoting general education, in the vernacular tongue, through the means of Native agency. To the learned European, who may have occasion to study Malayalim, this work, independent of the im- perfections that attach to it as a mere grammar, may appear open to objection with respectto its arrangement and style. In re?ly it is to be observed that the object of the Au- N & ey e SRR T, x bt fOlthlSlagt?DOth_eithlS Grammar would certainly never have appeared : the time it has taken, would have been devoted to writing Malayalim Books for the direct benefit of the people. PREFACE. X1 n thor has been to produce a grammar in which the genius I of the language is especially attended to; toaccomplish al which, he has in many instances ventured to arrange his e work upon an original plan: at the same time he freely Jln acknowledges, that had this Grammar been written for Europeans only a different plan and style would have d been adopted. Il But knowing that most of the Natives, who may use this work, have acquired their knowledge of the princi- 88 ples of language, from English Grammars, and that they § cannot be expected to be so patient of research as the al European, whose mind has been more perfectly trained : et the Author has, so far as the nature of the two languages will admit, followed the general arrangement of the d more commonly received English Grammars; and to er make the rules appear as obvious as possible; as well as to save the trouble of frequent reference to other pages, f he has in many instances given a double set of examples, one in the Etymology, and the other (but much more /e copious) in the Syntax. This however, though tending [y to mar the perfection of the work will itis hoped, appear f a beauty rather than a defect, in the eyes of him whose 2 object is to learn and not to cavil. In the Chapter on Etymology the compound words 1 have been analized, and the principles pointed out by I which the various combinations are formed. The Syntax abounds with examples illustrative of the ¥ idiom of the language; and in the Chapter on the Parti- 1t cles especial care has been taken to exhibit the various senses in which words belonging to that important part of speech are used. This it is trusted will prove alike {4 I acceptable to every class of readers: pains having been PREFACE, X11 taken to notice them with especial reference to their corresponding terms in English phraseology Every first attempt to illustrate the principles of a foreign language must be obviously attended with pecu- liar difficulties: to expect that a work of this description, written under the circumstances already mentioned, will In be altogether free from maccuracies would be vain. all essential respects the Author trusts it will not be found defective; of such an attempt it is unnecessary to say more, and he hopes it will be found, that truth does not require him to say less. The Author desires to record his sincere thanks to Col. Cullen, British Resident at Travancore and Cochin, for the kind interest he has taken in this work, and for the promptness with which he lent his aid in procuring pecuniary assistance to carry it through the press. All profits will be devoted to the advancement of education at the Church Missionary Station Mavelicara, near Quilon. To the Eternal, Wise, and Beneficent God, the only living and Almighty Jehovah, who endowed his creature man w th the faculties of speech and powers of reason that they might be used to his Glory; be praise and honour, for ever and ever. Amen. el CONTENTS. \u' ORTHOGRAPY. Page. 1, INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. ill The Malayalim Letters. i Pronuneiation of Letters. b be Initial Vowels. Medial and Final Vowels. b l Table of combination of Letters. 10 th Double Consonants. 11 Compound Consonants. 12 fo Final Consonants. 13 Permutations of the Letters. 1, 14 of the Vowels. 1} of the Consonants. 12 20 ETYMOLOGY. Of the Parts of Speech. 21 of The Particles. b ' The Nouns. 32 Of Gender. ) Iy Of Number. 33 16 Cases of Nouns. 36 I Declension of Nouns. 37 Formation of Nouus. 43 d Of Pronouns. 48 Personal Pronouns. 0. Interrogative Pronouns. 51 Demonstrative Pronouns. 52 Possessive Pronouns. 53. Relative Pronouns. b, Indeterminate Pronouns. 57 Of the Verbs. 60. Derivation of Verbs. 1b. Formation of the Tenses. 61 Present Tense. 63 CONTENTS X1V Page. Past Tense. 6.4. Formation of the Past Tense. b Divisions of the Past Tense. 68 Past Progressive Tense. b Perfect Tenge. 1) ( Present Perfect Tense. Pluperfect Tense. Future Tense. b 72 Imperative Mood. Formation of the Imperative Mood b Infinitive Mood. 74 Indefinite Mood. 76 b Participles. Verbal Nouns. Causal Verbs. 81. Formation of Causal Verbs. b Passive Verbs. 83. 85. Verbs Personal. 86 Defective Verbs. Affirmative Verbs. b 89 Negative Verbs. Verbs of Intensity . 93 Adjectives. 9 96 Formation of Adjectives. 98 Formation of the Comparative Degree 99 Formation of the Superlative Degree. Of the Numerals. b Of the Adverbs 103 | SYN TAX General Remarks 107 b Nouns in Apposition. 108 Nominative Case. Genitive Case. 110 Dative Case. 112. Accusative Case. 115 First Ablative Case 117 CONTENTS XV g Page. i Second Ablative Case. 117 ih Third Ablative Case. 118. 0 Fourth Ablative Case. 120 1) Vocative Case. 121] The Particles. 122 10 Of the Pronouns. 161. 1 Personal Pronouns. b th 165. Interrogative Pronouns. 2 Demonstrative Pronouns. 167. b Possessive Pronouns. 168. Relative Pronouns. 169 Indeterminate Pronouns. 170. 1) Of the Verbs. 175. Present Tense. 176. ;i Past Tenses. 178. Future Tense. 179. i Of two Negatives. 180. Imperative Mood. 181 Indefinite Mood. 183 Infinitive Mood. 184 f) Verbs of Intensity. 195 Of Adjectives. 197 Of the Comparative Degree 198 199 Of the Superlative Degree. Of Adverbs. 200 APPENDIX. Of Accent. 201 ;z: 10 Of Emphasis. Of Versification. b Of Punctuation. b Figures of Speech. 202 Division of Time. 205. 206 Of the Yugas. Of Solar Time. b Of Lunar Time. 210 214, Specimens of Letters ERRATA. The Student is requested to make the following corrections. Line. Pagf 3 For oo, read 6- ] 22 preceeding read preceding. 10 Add, when prefixed to any consonant @ must be pro- nounced /¢, 22 17 For repentence, read repentance. 23 these read that day. 29 16 : ®ROICd @ aleMm read Liab @RAIeM. 32 10 UGB reqd SULON, 34 8 preceeded read preceded. 13 ——take 9% read drop @ and add =@, 5 Note ends read end. 23 Note 35 are altered read is altered. 24 Note ———Whereas the Fourth, &c., read Whereas, as the Fourth, &ec. 36 3 Note follow read follows. 39 After the second example read some few nouns ending in o are declined like @®.@b. 46 27 For by read be. 30 HTGOBD reqd HAUDS, 33 = 2 & read L& 47 not coming read not loving. 49 13 feoYe il read SN, Read, hast thou not so commanded. 51 24 For () ToRKaIN @RIt read, ag)QICD ag)uidu. 54 24 femate read female. 28 2 5040 yead 295240, 60 6)4 Add after root ; there are one or two exceptions to this rule. 73 For that matter read this matter. 25 78 Past Imperfect read Past Progressive. 80 9 ——Past Imperfect read Past Progressive. 85 34 QlISagG 0, read AISHIYFTIM. 87 13 A_fter © 2@ =By, gdd LMI. 1]07' 6)-i3(06Mo, reqd a296)M6Mo. 98 19 After nominative, read or accusative. 155 28 For 1s read his. A [0~ GRAMMAR OF THE MALAYALIM LANGUAGE he ,,,,, e e e ng ORTHOGRAPHY. 1. Malayalim orthography treats of the nature and powers of letters: also of the various changes which they undergo in composition. 10 2. The Malayalim, like its sister dialects, is written from left to right. 3. TFor the convenience of the Student, who will require native assistance, the common method of arranging the Malayalim letters, is here adhered to, in preference to others that may be more strictly correct. oY OaT 4. With the l;.;vhif tion of three characters, the whole Malayalim v o) Sanscrit ; it is, in fact, the Sanscrit Alphabet is taken from th Alphabet, written in the Malayalim character but retaining the same order, power, and ne @i oy ly the same so 137 Wi 3 ri as o D the Déva-ndgari as used by the Brahmins of the present time. R A GRAMMAR OF THE THE ALPHABET. o) The Malayalim letters are 53 in number: of these 16 are vowels, distinguished thus, Short. @0 d, e D) u, e ri, |60 li, ag) e 63 0, GDo am. Long. @7 4, B, 90 i, B ru, |60 lu, a“@aiy 639 o, \ 3 ah. 6. The number of consonants are 37; of these 34 follow the order of the Sanscrit: thus: 5 GUTITURALS & ka, e Rha, U ga, o0l gha G3 nga. 5 Pararals 2 cha, 2@ chha, g Ja, @w jha, 6 nya. A YD) na. 5 CEREBRALS 5 ta, o t/z‘a., cw da, ow dha, Ep] > " na. 5 DENTALS (9] ta, tha, da, w dha, €] QA ma. 5 LaBiais ol pa, a0 pha, 62\ ba, bha, © ra (=L la, ol wa 4 SeMI-vOWELS & ya, 4 SIBILANTS o sha, @RV sa, aOh,asp. N ksha. o sa, %7, The three remaining characters derived from an ancient Alphabet are ® la, O ra, and ¢ ra. 8. The above are the forms of the letters when they occur as initials ; when used as medials or finals, some of them assume a dif- srent shape as will be hereafter explained. OF PRONUNCIATION. 9 Nothing more under this head is intended than to give a general idea of the sound of the Malayalim letters; as in writing, it is quite impossible in most cases, to do more than this; many of the sounds can only be learned by paying strict attention to their pronun- ciation as uttered by an efficient teacher. @0 has the short sound of final a in Soplia. @ has the sound of final a in papa. is similar to ¢ in folio. oo sometimes written 6900 is like ¢ in pique. D) has the sound of « in full. 5" ecece is like oo in fool. something like 7u 1n rue. 2 same sound but lengthened. (a0 something like our word Zoo. 23(0)) a similar sound but lengthened. MALAYALIM LA.NGUAG | O o like e and ey in end & they. 6ag) as ar In aisle. 4 like our short and long o in odd and ode. 630 ©cccse like ou in out. [} @0 like am or rather wm. h @0 g like ah: the % aspirated. he (& has the sound of ¢ in cane. sse s somethirg like ¢k in clord. - ) like g in good. {U) Gutturals. as gh aspirated. R RY like ng =} in ring. sound like ¢k in church. cesses as the above but more forcibly. (N like J 1in join. Palatals as jha: an aspirate of the above. ef like nya: y being a consonant. : like our #; except that in pronouncing it, as well as a8 with all the letters of this class, the tongue must f be carried toward the back part of the roof of the mouth. same as the last but aspirated. something like d. )\ 18 same aspirated. Cerebrals. ® like 1 4 In both these cases the tip of the tongue ecceve g0 must be raised higher and extended further like 5 back than when pronouncing the other let- ters of this class. L6 like n. r(ZD seecse e something like ¢ in tin. Great care is required in acquir- ing the sound of this character, which together with all letters of this class, is to be pronounced with the tongue placed between the teeth. 1 ua Dentals same as the above, but aspirated. as d in dance. se0 tee the same aspirated. seo v like 7. B (&) A GRAMMAR OF THE ( o) like an English p as pa, ... the same aspirated. Y2\ . as b in bud. < 3 ;é .. as bh strongly aspirated. like m 1n made. Q) seecco like y in yarn, © ccoseom . as 7 soft. Very great attention is necessary to acquire the correct pronunciation of this character. ccsgese like 7 in lane. Semi-Vowels as w in mwife. Many persons learning Malayalim give the Tamil sound of v to this letter which is incorrect. f Cla....2. hke sh. In pronouncing this character the tongue must be depressed so that the tip of it fall below the front teeth in the lower jaw. b o™ L..... like sk in shoe. @Ol Iilke s 1n wsg: Sthilants. A is a compound of & and ¢\ and pronounced by the Malabar Brahmins ksha, but in common, like cka strongly aspirated. Q0 ... something like % in koop, but pronounced more forcibly. O i like » in ToRGR: 10. There is another letter, of the same form as the dental ™ derived from the Tamil sz7, which, though not introduced by the native teachers into their list of letters, nor even mnoticed by them, is of very extensive use in the language : and as the pronunciation of it is quite different to that of the dental (", great care must be taken to distinguish it from that character. When the dental (" is pronounced the tongue, as before observed, must be placed between the tecth: whereas, when this letter o is pro- nounced, the tongue must be raised so that the tip of it touch the up- per part of the front teeth in the upper jaw ; care being taken not to raise the tongue too high, or the sound will be confounded with It that of the letter 60 : thus @ Elephant, @perm an Oath. will be easy to distinguish the dental from the other o by remember- ing the following short rule. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 5 The dental O never occurs as a medial or final : the other (™M is never used as an initial ; thus oericruue Constraint. 11. With respect to the sound of the letters, in general, it is to be observed that in some cases they vary a little from the pronounciation given above; thus: Ist. re The short vowel @@, contained in the consonants’ when fol- lowed by the letters @, @b, Oc, and .2 is pronounced something like e in label : but, in general, such is the case only when such letters close a word, or when such words are prefixed to others to form a Y6 compound word : thus, h a21® many, pronounced palér, not pildr. 1¢ 2e.1d W roasted paddy, pronounced mdlér not mdalir. v 02106a.193) flour of the above, pronounced m a [érpody. 25N @d sand,—mdnél not mdndl. QMDD SHOM sand hill,—mdnélkunna. moon,—iinkel not tinkal. 18 )6 829y monday,—tinkelaricha. 10 & RQId potter,—kus dwen. 2nd. In very numerous instances when the first, or middle svl Oyl lable of a word closes with one of the nasal letters, or with @b ; and, in every case, when syllables, in any situation, are closed with o; the short vowel @w, belonging to the preceeding consonant, - 1s Pronoun - e ced like » in Zull; thus, Yy e 1UC d nulkunnu. @R to grant, pronour ) WMo wealth, b danum. i 00l God, ? ;! deymwum. @000 ahunkarum pride, 7 A 3rd. &», when beginning a word, is to be pronounced as direct: ed in the table; when it occurs as a medial, very soft, something 1 The short vowel @ is inherent in every consonant except the finals; it being an invariable rule that every open consonant not followed by another vowel must be pronounced as 1f @0 were written after it: thus ¥ 2, Ba. 2 These are c:flled finals, for the nature and use of which, see para: 17 R I—— — 6 A GRAMMAR OF THE like gk; when doubled, very strong like kk. Great attention should be paid to this rule, as in many cases, the difference between Neuter, C! Active, and Causal Verbs, cannot be distinguished if this character be not correctly pronounced; thus @& with the single &, signifies fo be: with the double 6 it means fo make. 4th. @, in the beginning of words, is to be pronounced as in the table: in the middle of words something like ¢4: when doubled, like all double letters, very forcibly. When @ is prefixed to the conso- nant @, it is pronounced like /; thus @@l Altmawd, not At- manwd. -~ 5th. O, when doubled, takes the sound of #; as @O ard, River, @0 e e attinday. — f 6th. ®©2. Besides the pronunciation given to this character in the table, it is to be observed that when nasal letters occur in the middle of a word, this character, or rather the o, is often substituted for them. In such cases it must be pronounced like the letter which it represents.’ 7th. Consonants often combine, so as to form a syllable of them- E selves ; in such cases all the consonants, except the one placed last in combination, drop their inherent vowel sounds, but retain and unite the consonantal sounds of the several letters of which the syllable is compos- ed; and are to be pronounced according to the order in which the lstters o, 3 By reference to the arrangement of the letters, of the Alphabet; it { will be seen that each of the first five classes has its own peculiar nasal letter. It is also to be observed that when a syllable in a word closes with a nasal letter and is followed by a consonant, the nasal letter ought to be changed to the nasal of the order to which the fol- r; lowing consonant belongs: but the authority of custom, both in teaching and writing Malayalim, requires that, in most cases, the ° should be substituted for such nasal letters; although, as observed above, the sound of the nasal represented is retained: thus, 8c® is pronounced Bunggy not Bumgy, because the sound of the nasal letter belonging to the order of gutturals is ng. For the further illustration of this subject I shall add the following examples of words written indifferently with the nasals of their own order, or with o; thus, BWH Mo, Q.J@ZDJJQ')JO’ Ql6 BJ@O, 6 2I0MIAM, e, BQodh(o, Q.JQ,_QJDCQJo, QJosdWley, 6).nIc@MIAM, @RoQlLlc. g:,( MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 7 uld stand ¢ that is, the sound of that letter placed first in the order of the er, combination is to be uttered first; thus, ter &> prefixed to @ is written and pronounced & Kia. i\ and S; thus, aQ. Shta. ®, crV and Q2 % Rssa. he ke OF THE VOWELS, INITIAL, MEDIAL, AND FINAIT. 50 ft OF INITIALS. 12. The vowels, written in a former section, with the exception of U 60, 67, and @703, are here denominated Initials, being used, in the form represented there, in the beginning of words only: thus; 1n Short vowels. Long vowels, he SO0, letter. @”@a_\or\;;) o, faintness. o ¢h 6O No, will, desire. 00U, God. OO0 0o, answer. 6 0 20O eR, dumb. 6v N0, debt, 23, seldom used as an initial. QOIS oil. 6vag)oIG)o, rickes. Gq,)7 n 63Sdho, camel. 630239Q]o, liberality, excellence he @V NMO, woman. OF MEDIAL AND FINAL VOWELS. 13. Vowels, not initial, when joined to consonants, assume a dif- 1t ferent form, but retain their own sound, and are pronounced after the ar consonants to which they are attached: thus; d Medial al Initial. I or Final. i AN — ? The short vowel @9 being inherent in every od consonant, except the finals, never appears but as 1§ an initial. When it is required as a medial or l final, it is always understood to be included in [4 the consonant that requires it, as a_ o, papa. )N o b It This mark, placed after the consonant, thus &0, is called 212l Dirghum, as &0el Leg, a5 Song. A GRAMMAR OF THE Medial Tnitial or I'inal. 69, i X This mark, drawn over the consonant, thus &) is et called Q1@@) Walli; as adley Bow; a5 Dog. oo, 2, This mark, named and used like the last, is made by adding a circle to the top part of the foregoing mark; thus ), 5 21§ Receipt, aT15l% Shop. << 9y e Affixed thus to &, and @, only; as &3, @ Ty e Subscribed thusto U0, 26, 8, O, 8, 2, & QD. ) Joined to the letters 6™, N, and their double letters, as 6vv, (e, etc. V)Y Subscribed to all the rest; thus 61, 63,%Q), P, etc. 2, m~_17 Affixed thus to & and @, only. c————y el Subscribed thus to (3, @@, €3, B (B, (U3, and (@Q. ——— —_— @’ Joined to the letters 6, (M, and their double letters: as 6, (). e bl Subscribed to all the others, as &4, g, Q4 ete. —— oot o)? Subscribed thus By 24, 9, etc. &> )? Subscribed thus &, o, @, ete. 610, e Placed after the consonant, as £.60, Cc6, etc. oY, -, Placed as the last, thus &6, 060, etc. Here, properly, ends this class of simple letters; 1 though, for the reason before assigned, the whole 16 characters have been ranged under the head of @’D%cfi%&c, or vowels. The four following (3] characters are compounds formed from the pre- ceeding letters; as, g &) 75 This substitute for ag), called Pulli, is prefixed to consonants, and pronounced short or long, as usage has fixed the sound of the word of which it ¥ | makes a part; thus 6@ bed, 2 1®o loss.t 2 seha — AL N th 4 fn an ancient M I8, \;iayalim Alphabet, n<;\v nearly obselete, which ap- pears to have been derived from an old Tamil Alphabet, of peculiar be character, and used for writing title deeds and grants of land, there are of W two characters to distinguish the short and long «0; and it would tend to make this Janguage more definite, and be of great assistance to learn- MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. Medial Initial, or Final. llq ag) is an improper dipthong, taking the sound g of e and ey in end and they ; though commonly il pronounced . It is compounded of @@ and ing 60; thus ®eLaw) from @LO and 60 @) ; ~ lop @10 660 S0 from @060 and ag)$EYD): e ng), 919 These marks, called double pulli, when united to L other letters are prefixed to the consonants; as 10 68 a1 ® @D Bey, ®6\mAalo Ointment. 6)ag) is a compound of @ andag); as ®&6(@) ete. J; from @@ and ag)Ql. 63, G, The language, with respect to this letter, is also Lfa)l defective in having but one character to express the short and long o. Perhaps the following ihle marks would be found as convenient as any to mark the distinction ; for the initial and medial fc short 0 6 & ©—0, as in the table: for the long initial 639, which is used by some few writers, for the long medial and final @—29: thus short e initial and medial, &3Ho Camel: 6OHIMI Biranch. Long initial and medial, 639 eIdy Drain: @9 c Wrath. ole 63 is a compound of @ and §; as a1 ead hIo ; from o i@ and [ORMECUIGER ing &, B, This medial is placed right and left of the con- e sonant ; thus 6&M, as O®MUBEI. craft, ORIQIMo youth. 639 is a compound of @ and & ; thus &M sed BMo, from M) and B2Meo. J, & hit § ers; if something to answer the same purpose could be introduced. into the present Alphabet. To adopt the old Malayalim character would require a change in the consonant to which the medial character must ap be annexed; but as this would not be desirable, perhaps the introduction Jjar of the following character €, used as the medial of long <0 in Tamil e would be the least objectionable; thus eaow, @ai®o, For this initial, end I propose this character @: thus a3 Oil; «g@em) Malice, Backbiting. alll (A 10 A GRAMMAR OF THE Medial Initial. or Final Qs This final character, called @BCYRMV_19M o, m@; Anuswarum is added to consonants, and in this state invariably closes the syllable as a final @; thus 63 0lo Deywum ; d3030 Kumbum. @0 ©2 B O 0 This final, called ()__fi(‘(\)@o wisérgum, is placed after consonants; thus 286.lo Grief : it under- goes mo alteration, always closes a syllable, and is the substitute for @O when used as a final. % Kot ————— o g § : 1 ! — O °0 wWO© 0V (14 (1% (19 [4 ¢ OICIC) O Fl\-\\l\- FC co | vy 8 °% WHO CHO HOO HQ [14 [44 PIsSn Jou | pasn Jou I it <R & & (5 M ol b s °® ACIC) c®© m [ERE) [E1E & @ pasn jou | pasn jou @ & 3@ o § oCeP VS © T AQ%%GG WP © OTEE |00 TowP K e Vo D QAVN O% WOV cOvVO H SReICIC) Co© QLU QOCD o 1430 cO0v YH QU] O?C (VIQU I oW © HQUSITTC) QeRI(] QO QoW LW oW COWO a0 (AN Oflmc TP © (VPO P e© AR RAC) QO O VP S.en /) (/8)C) (> o (o= A% gy cenNE eneu en© Qoen uoen 10 &N cen S0 BIES) Wroe croe ».8S rovE oo Q@oro QO v Lo ro cro vy °rd WiTg© el g © TT© Qo7 QOTY e e o ny °Q (ALOIC QO OCTE) QO QOO (W CL0)) © §) cQ < § LN o WO (N IC) [fen]CICC] O Qo™ (J TN W® uw o vx 80 =17 (el A2C) ACTC) ¢/C) Qoo (kg @ @ 0 7' g We O (BT I CIC) 20 QoY (Y CLY) e U9 (& & nya °rCo Wt | CTO® (HOCICIC) TV @oTU9 QO 9 cruse 800 STome) g Uos vq wW00e covE (UREICIC) gu© @oUo Qog© go oo g o v WrE CT v vyd TP moE Qar© Qo v e (e oo D 8 W) SACE) O cLO we W QoW JCIO®) (o (O8] oo DN (el coME Q@ICIC) [@@IC) QOM LOM (R o™ deg YT < °g (RIAC (ATIC) LIACIC) <© Qoo (L] @ 1§ T o S (VIC) CO109 U100 U1 @O B QO U] ) o1 co 0yl s W °Ww W@ QO (UACIS) e QoW LW W S C1)® (W (@ 2L o9 U o [qowlt] (GO L{CIC) UAS(© QO UULS QOUAD (AS U] 8 v LR @C@ (G DN WML CoMrLO M,o;)v@@ ML Q@O 6ML LI ML ?@@fl@@@@??@@@@@@@@?@? (oo Lo ()R} OBV wiMmu e LG (@aPICIC 13 090 PD PP R P RRR D DY o 6k @RS QO JCIaae) ~ = Hro Lo coro RO WO CO® [OICIS) 0JC} (O)CTe) q Q90 © L cO /) u\& S WS ©Q (SO SOV SO Qo3 (IS & & S N A @9 o9 W99 CQ99 Q9 ©© Q00 QO 2OQ9 &) oy S i 9 (S (@9 (I AN oMY LONQ© cN\Q) (O M OE M9 QeMY) LOTNY) ~ V> 0 - e (e Leaw cONQ) i °&3 W& & ©Q &30 &9 QO&3 O3 c&3 SIO1q (&2 (&8 o T CQT© Q@TO© 7T© QT QLOOIT (T e or G _” (o 2 nYY) W' CIr'o g () Q@QOI'c QO o II'e e (e I (SVIC OV OGO ) L9V QOO WCIOV) &9 29 NI0) [go Ere oo (A5 1] (GalClC) g0 © P P e DIAT QOB ICITS 2 &) i Bo [Bo Cigo 2y S wN© CIN© (OpICIC) (@l QoW (JClop) (%2 N (1@p) 29 O_I.G Wree cree NCICIC) INCIE) @or QIrte g U cre iy 5. oun (NS e gealiel(e] €O Qo QO PP T EPATDP D m fl?@?@gg@g}@é@?mo@??g@?@?????@@?@f?@@@?@?@b%@ | ol 54 (@ CH Ut tse S aa33tbegnsc Y luan S vy Yoy E&Qw\ J oy \ oy | wy_| &l npy | npy ~ ~ nsy 0.0y | 1 2 20297 7908800330303 297wedead 998 9¥ auo & Dy _ S ~= .§m§.§§o S0 apmps w wr pasn s ‘spaoy urg puv WL 2y ¢ W21 2u0 0 FuQIYTI NIV Y R s MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 11 OF THE CONSONANTS, DOUBLE, COMPOUND, AND FINAL. OF THE DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 14 Most of the congonants are capable of reduplication ; thus &, is doubled by adding this mark - to the right side of the single & ; as a6 L} 6L, subscribes another 611 : sometimes a & is prefixed instead of the 614; but this, it is to be observed as well as all reduplications of this kind, is according to the rules of the Sanscrit: thus ... r Bort. ), takes another ¢ ; as % (LQ_\, a U0 is prefixed to this letter; as ... 63, takes another 63; as, @83 Lo Q, are reduplicated by this _ placed underneath ; as (LJ’ Sometimes the a_| is doubled, thus In writing the 21 is generally doubled; thus @, 20, takes a 0, sometimes a 2@ ; as, &, takes another &3 ; as, ow, prefixes a &3 ; thus ... 6w, annexes a second 6v ; as, takes another $ underneath ; as, @§§§5§ takes a S thus; ® @ takes another QLU thus ° :'SD\:)\S? the same ; as, 9, is doubled thus; 6™, ® subscribes another 6™, thus takes another @ ; as, ° (2)0’ prefixes @ thus, takes another 2 ; as, eca ° prefixes a 2 thus, m, affixes another () ; as, aso JE¥ B3RBEE (2.3 12 A GRAMMAR OF THE aly subscribes another a3 ; as, eoe 6erLl, the same ; as, ° eoe ess sometimes thus, e 3 B, is doubled thus, oo (9,0, 2, takes another @ ; as, subscribed ; as By is ‘reduplicated by this malk subscribes another (o ; as, occasionally subscribes another <34 ; as, o, takes another O™ underneath ; as, O takes another O; but, as before observed, it 1s lways in such a state of combination, to be con- ° Q0. sidered and pronounced as ¢, not r OF THE COMPOUND CONSONANTS 15. Some consonants combine with others of a different name; of and others these, a few change their form in the state of combination retain their original shape The consonants that change their form when united with other con- sonants ; are 1st. ©® & ®. The letter @ is changed into (_, and ® into ('} In the former case the mark is affixed to the right side of a consonant drawn underneath it from right to left, and pronounced after it; as (& Rra The other mark is placed over a consonant and pronounced before it thus & rka. 2nd. e} This letter, in combination, assumes the form before men- tioned, viz > and is pronounced after the letter with which it unites; f thus & and 23, & kla al 3rd. al. This character, united with other consonants, assumes this fi form _1, is postfixed to consonants, and pronounced after them ; as &5 and Ql, & kwa 4th. . In combination assumes this form _,), and is pronounced last; as & and W, & kya 5th. 6. This nasal unites with the first letter of its own order ; thus 6w and 2o, 6@ Ncha 9 MALAYALIM LANGUAGE, 18 6th. @, o, and Ot unite with a1; thus vl Mpa or Npa. 7th. 3 unites with the first letter of its own order; thus, 3 and & ; 8> Nka: O and & unite in the same manner. 8th. ¥ and 2! unite thus, £\ Rcha. 9th. 6 and S thus, 6ne Nt’/za. 10th. ™ and 2 make 03 Nda. 11th. ™ and @, oo Nta. 3 The remaining consonants, in combination, retain their original form ; or in the very few cases where alterations take place, they are so trifling, as to prevent the possibility of mistaking the different characters; thus, oV and LO combine thus, anan (2 QVe) 6™ and CLL, 28 and 6, 2o 16th. of Many of the consonants are tripled and compounded in various ways but this, after the explanations already given, will occasion the stu- ;hers dent no difficulty : the following examples will best illustrate this subject. @omom Brahma. 00l RBo@Emod His Excellency, the Teacher. BONZUge! Dust of Ashes. (') LI Q)0 Liberty. nanty 9@26\2@&)(\(&) Congueror of death ; one of the names of Shewa. s bt ¢ ity OF THE FINAL CONSONANTS. melt- 17. Some few of the consonants become, in certain cases, finals, 7. e. jifess they close a word, and can have no vowel affixed to them, or pronounced after them: when this occurs they undergo a little alteration in their form : as, g {his y ud Consonants that close a word. 6™, ), o, £y, 0O, &, Q‘ Finals of the above. od, ob, d, ab, S 085 aisd aced 18. A table of consonants united with the letters @, @, a1, ., and . ; fhus f See the remarks on characters @20, and ®°¢, para 13. { 14 A GRAMMAR OF THE Kra etc. it a & (6 (V) @8] (B3 2® (B (W (DS QW N ED © (L 6 WO (e EL BB R0 ) QWD (@ @ @ (& il Rka etc. Cf Salthab drnlae & ewen S S vl e @ LD B W ki i hall a0 el @ oW el al 0o ah oV A0 B 6. St Kla Sl LW T B ERBRER « (9%} i HOHIRIIL oy & s VR G ABY %fig Kwa Sl 6Ll N apl) Gl 2Ll 201 81 Ouad 6 S1 04 Ll Ao he 6 @ LAY A1 LW MU all afl 6Nl /l al VI ©1 el he QY Codt AR 0NV a0 ] 61 $ O i Kya J ik = 2 ED 28) 83 @) 0B &) Q) % g’) i}:j SRS D Y83 YD RS S QORI R =S) ) & 9 9P ON THE PERMUTATIONS OF THE LETTERS. e 19. There are, at present, very few native works in this language Y0 that can, either as it respects orthography or manner of writing, lay claim to the character of even tolerably good Malayalim. The native scholars, in general, affect a knowledge of the Sanscrit, and aim to show it in their works: for this purpose the poetic style is usually adopted ; and to make an up the number of their syllables, grammar, idiom, and sense are sacrificed ; (]11 words and phrases are horrowed from the Sanscrit and Tamil languages; letters are added or omitted ; words are transposed and made to run into cach other, so that a great deal of what they write is mere high sounding eg jargon ; and it requires much practice to understand that part of it which Wo, ferg has a meaning. Wy Ofs But besides affectation of style, knavery has a large share in this mys- tifying art; the object being to keep the people in ignorance, and con- Pty foy B B . MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 15 sequently in dependance on the Brahmins, who for the most part are the ) authors, translators, and expounders of their writings. G 20. But, though such a practice is worse than unnecessary, and can- not be too much deprecated, yet the nature of this language does, to a certain extent, require that changes should take place in the letters; and - without exhausting the patience of the Student in noticing niceties that may be more easily learned by practice as they occurin the course of his studies ; the following rules are submitted to assist him to ascertain how such changes are effected. 25 <o Do 20 PERMUTATION OF VOWELS. 21 In general it may be remarked that since initial vowels can only W be used at the commencement of words, when any number of single words, | & beginning or closing with vowels, coalesce and form a compound word ; these vowels require to be changed into their medial characters, or drop- as ped altogether: sometimes, however, other letters are inserted; D) IVRLNO® QYD from 2)9Wo @oaPe®m W and 98P. The rules for the permutations of the vowels are, 6{(% First. Of words ending in short 2. When a word ending with the open vowel sound of @ is followed by another word that begins with @ short ; the first letter of the word to be affixed is dropped, and in this state the words coalesce ; the last letter of the first word retaining ite vowel sound ; as g clain 60016 HOEGMN@® I from 60016 B ZY) and GO ®I BNV, olatsy OHImMlafo from &HImm), and @a|o. fheir Secondly. When a word ending in an open consonant is followed by make any vowel except @0 short, the vowel sound of the final consonant is ificed; dropped,® and the initial vowel of the following word assumes its medial 1ages) | illt‘) 6 In native writings the above rule holds good in every case, but this is decidedly wrong, as such a practice, in some instances, confounds pding words, renders their meaning ambiguous, changes the powers of the let- WhiCh ters, and causes them to be pronounced inaccurately : thus a native would write ©@adleod, for ©®aci.al, @od; but according to the former mode of spelling in this, as well as in similar instances, not only would the $i\E pronounciation be inaccurate, but the word itself may readily be con- I cot- e tounded with the past tenses of verbs which, in their poetic works, 16 A GRAMMAR OF THE form and coalesces with the consonant from which the vowel is removed ; for @ @9 (YYD, from @0 and GVOBHOM. @M. the 6)9.2,9M, b QECEW 99 &S 2 oS)al, b 8 2 MR E6 22 MQH6a-{20s, @@g}fl?bo. evemiSlm S), Eb @0 6o ) 2 o@<Slm S I 2 @(C@’m ?? £%d. goAD LS, oy 2 QO™ Ex og: £QODaY, 2 @6V YD k2] 2. @660 O, 60 DB, 22 6;2(6) ” & G YYo. | 626.2,]ai), 29 6o, 9 ag) all 0r e o)DM, 2 ag)@® 7 n@(m b §0n¢ MOOLIBHAD)) o, 2% M 6\’1@&)@@0. L) @0 m ? @6 ®ITDL, 65:&'5»?/3_\_;. 22 2» M LI ). NO20EN L), & Thirdly. ‘When words, ending with Iong @&, are followed by @, D the @, is sometimes changed into QJ; if it be @D, into Q95 as N oma@awalles §one, from emee39, and @oAIl6S §6ME. chs ©0 S al. &SNS 2, 7 HSAD, k2 01 @pociad alle. @m103\eh aflem, D0, 2 Y, 2? &0 SYPYRI00, 2?2 Fourthly. When the last vowel of the first word is 69, and the to ] first word of the second @0 or @&, the last rule applies: as, ag)f BV, from n@‘f@, and @D, § au@qu,?ai, 2 63(1_\§, 2 CGQ)S_%A. 1§y OIS 1V, 7 6188, » GV ORI ABOD. ) (VI IV D, 29 0™, 2 e2920M), GV Go. 62200 MINIS., 2 Sometimes words that end in 60 and begin with @&, are altered thus; the 69 of the first word is changed into . and the @) into its medial : as, the from @YU, and ©QHIGe. Jed ©DU)IBI e, 23 &0 @), 29 GV W) e fir\t c@b@owmo, thy frequently have a feminine termination, the form of which is the same with the one above: thus ®EMILEa0IBOallHIQo QY BAMIWGH:HMIS ®.019mad Rawenen’s sister spoke again to Regukulenyyeken. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 17 oved ; Fifthly. If the last vowel of the word prefixed, and the first of the word to be added, end in 60, the 60 of the first word remains, and for the second 60, WV with a medial €0 placed over it is inserted ; as, P 1NEl6E M, from ag@ad and o @somalnd. N QIR B8 Yo, 99 ey y 00BN, " If the first word ends in Q); the first 60 of the second word is ; omitted altogether; as, 6190 10)E6 o, from a9 and 60D O, @gmmfl@o@am@, 3 (@) 200N » 60 Bl . In many words of Sanscrit origin where the connecting letters are 69 or oo, both are rejected, and a medial long oo placed over the last con- sonant of the first word; thus, &SaNerob, from &) and 6oEROb. OWIA LoD, 29 OIS ” 0@ 0RO, @, Sixthly. In words where the last vowel of the preceding word ends in 69, and the first letter of the following word begins with 6, the © is Y changed into its medial and placed under a @ ; and the words dre then connected ; as, 6 LoBn1Yep D, from Uad@Y), W and §BBAIND. Sometimes the 69 of the first word is dropped and a subsecribed ] the to the consonant to which the medial © of the second word is added; .thus, @@ @D, from @0 and HO@NAe. Seventhly. If the second word begins with 80, its medial with o is used as above; thus, 0 QOB QYave, from Q) and 6 D@ 2 QL) ” dlgys, @_“0 S thus; Eighthly. Where the last letter of the word prefixed ends in 6, and the first letter of the second word begins with 69, the first vowel is drop- [ a8y ped, and the medial of the 69 is placed over the last consonant of the first word to which the remaining letters of the second word are added ; thus,‘ &Pl )g, from G qame and 6oS. »(‘QOE OCIS TR Yo ? m&mfl% : ) 600l Y Y2. D 18 A GRAMMAR OF THE Ninthly. Where the coalescing letters are both ©, the second is thu changed into its medial and placed under a @, and in this state it is af- fixed to the first word; as, o_fla&no.go, from o_\')a\fi%, ol and So. Ql a3 o, » alg, 99 (_620. nin Tenthly. &% when beginning a word that is affixed to words ending dro in a vowel is, for the most part, changed into its medial, and written thus; and [oRIM0N @3@%@, from 093@% 9 oo, Q) 7 Q(t\'?oa o ofi%&f’o, ) is inserted in the last example, for the sake of euphony. are Eleventhly. In cases where words, beginning with the letter ag), are affixed to others ending in a vowel, the ag) is changed into its medial and placed before the last consonant of the word prefixed, from which mt its own vowel has been previously removed ; as, and oWecoeaioq, from QQQH@ AP YI0Q. & 6ENBE, 3% g 9 g, 9 afieer: Sa, 99 alleg ofza-- ag)YNedHIS TS ” n@m{) e ag) DB IHENBOMIT, Twelfthly. 63 annexed to another word ending in @9 or ), 1s changed into its medial and coalesces thus; Q600 BHEHYD, from 200 and 6@ @Y. @smmoamm«%@n‘an&})wb, ., QSOOI B ,, AOedX|Ob. If the last consonant, of the word to be prefixed, be one of the final letters, it is changed into its corresponding initial with which the medial 6> coalesces, as in the former case; thus, from . £9@}@300 and 6OEHQo. G} G368 96 B QJo, 99 307, 68300 y GOGE &S RO @368ITBAI 2,185, 63 is much in use, as the sign of interrogation ; in such cases it never stands alone, but is changed into its medial and either coalesces with the last consonant of a word, or with o) or ®/, which are then annexed to — a word thus, nd 63 i QER\learloligely ¢ from 6.2 QO Y26Y Y3 99 kb S olQe6nld? 6o Qe, 0l BOACD HEMORI § @b meom, W ., Z MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 19 nd 1§ Thirteenthly. 63" in combination is changed into its medial and used 18 afe thus; N Y OSH DR LD, and &M A L)), from Ore@NQ8H 3 0/6:QAINUESH AUV, |, BYRB:ODIES ,, BVAIIUT), Fourteenthly. Words ending with o, when prefixed to words begin- nding ning with @9, change the o into @, and the @2 of the second word is dropped thus, thus; from and H99ja2d, HIYo (@’Og’\l 99 CMQNR N bb ] ocapesazy, If @265 150 be affixed to words ending with o, the o and @ are dropped‘z;nd a is changed into mJ; as, ), are from and (i 6n19B:36m. O, aliddho ma&o'\», newe which If the first letter of the annexed word begin with @@ it is changed into its medial ; thus, 0 agdenor0s, from LE3° and ‘RNINER 10Q a_i(@)MIOIRI6NZ, 99 a1 kNI » COEE, 5?: If the first letter of the annexed word be 69 ; thus, N B9 N3, from &Y and O @dfinflsa?i%, kb OdhISo k2] w5 :Q), 18 If the first letter of the second word be § ; thus, onNIoNaNg8s, from COMA0o and y{m’\% 028 200@IRQED, 29 ALC O o 29 088 o If the first letter of the second word be ag) ; thus, final medldl 6MIMVE D AFo oW ay, from 6mIM., ag)d83o and LML JN-NB 29 m@o, ag) Do SODOAT AL, » 608 a0y SR8 @b, » Q..JOQQJO 3 0@88?(55 S’\ If the first letter of the second word begin with 6)ag), 6 or &9; thus, % MISON DUIGI o, from E®ISo and 6 agyUeIGia. He‘er A IOSTD BODR ) FYD), 29 10600 Do 2 63 @. ih the @D LICME 2R G2, ., @AM, BNBIGYs 96z, In many words. chiefly of Sanscrit origin, when the word to be prefixed ends in o, that character is dropped altogether ; thus, from 008132198 300, aD2ls, Qalo and BVE B0, 30 2XVo BWOa |50, 29 b BatSOrYe. D2 20 A GRAMMAR OF THE - PERMUTATIONS OF CONSONANTS. 22. The consonants chiefly affected by combination with other letters are the finals, which are changed into their initials when united to other !et_ters ; as, $0N SV, from C@@m’o 7 and Q_o. m @6 a{la{smoils, 29 ME™TD g:\"g:P”b 9 [SORNINS ol ateld » the R \Mo, 2 ‘(_‘3)__0. 2?2 2 Qo chga@%oe,;o, SN a0 2,19@b mm%o, 29 @000 b 20 @MDY, 2% @OQIM0o b O 23. In certain cases Sanscrit words, either whole or abbreviated, are pri put in the place of their corresponding Malayalim terms ; thus (U is of- Ad ten used for ™), as CUADLHEM 6 or CAVR16M o, for NRILIEMo: A LE5) being the Sanscrit, and (NgJ the Malayalim, word for good. Sometimes the last letter of coo@b is dropped and subscribed to the first letter as ONY: in this state it is prefixed to words; as, from orUEH CNQeN YRS, and IR, onyadleede, 29 ” ? allee™o. of thy o210 @0, 2” 9 99 210)(®)o. ad bad, evil, is a Sanscrit word but commonly used for 2 oo, which is the Malayalim for bad. qu i When 3® coalesces with nouns, the first consonant of the noun is 561 frequgntly doubled ; as, BRI, from 2 and A0, to BoRY)I>, 22 22 27 QYa. In some instances the word to be affixed remains unchanged ; as, (¢ G )R, from ad and N YRL) The last letters of Umb and 3d are often changed into letters corres- ponding in sound to the first letter of the word to be annexed; as, from (’1’\3('6{) and &BMo. m%m;}, kX 2 2 amg'Bo. MU0, 39 9 b nlo. — MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 21 from and XY0aTe, B3d NVID®G ) c. 2l kh wvdlalo, %@&‘\07 G840, 3 2 ” dhILlo. etters 9 2 bb @CQJ(UWO. 3@y Va0, other 24. Other changes frequently take place in the consonants; but as some of them are too arbitrary to be reduced to rules, and others arise in forming the different parts of speech, they will be best understood if S pointed out and explained when the difi'grent»_occasions that give rise to them may occur. ETYMOLOGY. 25. All the words, in the Malayalim language, are divided into six d, at principal parts: viz. Particles, Nouns, Pronouns, Verbs, Adjectives, and is of W Adverbs. The Preposition, or rather Postposition, Conjunction, and In- terjection are included in the particle. There is no Article.” to the RS PARTICLES. 26. As the particles are much used in the formation of the other parts of speech, it will be necessary to commence this part of the Grammar with the study of them. 27. In attempting to classify the Particles a difficulty arises in conse- whick quence of the same assemblage of letters forming, in different connexions, different parts of speech ; but the following arrangement will show the un i8 senses in which they are most commonly used. 28. The following particles are derived from the Sancrit, and prefixed to nouns, and verbs derived from Sanscrit Nouns. Ist a—). A preposition signifying fortk, for, off ; cess, etc.: as, 1t also denotes, ex= / (@820, The highest degree of joy ; from (ay and 6230 Joy. oress 7 Unless the numeral @m one be excepted, which, in connexion with other words, is changed to @®. [In this latter case it occasionally answers to our indefinite article; as ®® ®@% moalles g, ¢ persorn is there. When our definite article occurs, the natives sometimes use the demonstrative pronouns ®v, o®e, or paraphrastical expressions. suited to the idiom of the language; as will be hereafter pointed out. 22 A GRAMMAR OF THE 9nd. aJ®. Sometimes in conposition signifies completeness, but it 068 properly means, other, another, etc.; as, a0 6ENIBr0, Another or the other world ; from o1@ and 6L1I&ho world. bad IO GG, Stranger ; from al® and 62 sl Countryman. 3rd. ON\o. This particle, in composition, signifies completeness. 0’\)«;0..@6\"‘00 or 0\'%%0 complete, Sulness ; from (NUo and ¢ ¢ 6Mo Sfulness. 4th. @), Beyond, in point of time, place, and degree. In compo- sition it often implies, very much, exceedingly, etc.; as, @O NOLIBON, The greatest pain; from om) and ©QIAM Pain. thr 5th. o.@, About, around, also exceedingly ete.; as, a 1@ ®9ee, Excessive sorrow: from o @ and mdato Sorrow. 10] 6th. ©o0ve, After, in point of place, time, or degree. In composition it often signifies, according to, in imitation of, behind, etc.; as, @oemIale, Repentence; from @Yo and ®m9ao, Grief. OO, Walking after ; from @00 and NAMe, Walk. 7th. @@, Before, in time and place or opposite to; as, @0 E126L2I0 S, Face to face; from @02) and @6Lls, Face. i\ 8th. ), in connexion, has different and opposite meanings. as, 93¢, Destruction, il0N9Cs:. Same meaning but more intense. (@ rto, Shapelessness; from il and (@alo, Shape. 9th. orld or (v, in composition, gives a contrary meaning to te) words ; as, S (Y'nféxcg:, Misfortune ; from oNd and BIN)o, Blessing, Luck. Distrust, MRILDWo, Destitution; 2 2 @OV, Trust. | § Essence, (Y‘?%O(‘Oo, Worthlessness ; 0r5)® or (VONU,, VLI, l Importance. ™M) 30, Fearlessness ; 39 bb eI Oy Fem'. In the lastv example the @ is doubled for the sake of sound. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 23 hut 1t In a few cases D renders words more intensive, and in such instan- ces the first letter of the word affixed is, generally, doubled ; as, o o6 Y Wo, Constraint: from II® and 60 (rue, Bond, Tie. 10th. ®@0al or @0, implies prwacy, and is often employed in a bad sense; as, @V @I Mo, Disgrace ; from @0a) and @) o, Honor. @ ldlovo), Infamy ; 99 (C)sJoN| 2% SHovo), Fame. d o 11th. @7 in connexion signifies without, or privation ; as, mpo- BOVOD) o, Falsehood ; from @ and VDo, Truth. @il 1900 e, Unbelicf; 2 2?2 99 QlleaonVo, Faith. 29 29 130 @20, Injustice ; 927 0)IWe, Justice. 12th. Qfimfl, Again, against, for, back again. In composition it has three meanings. First. as a particle of distribution: in this case it is affixed to the O nominative case of nouns, and sometimes to other words ; as, sition E:W(QJ(Y\Jo@(GQ, Day by day. @D 2o(a®), Person by person. Second. Prefixed to nouns it conveys the sense of reciprocity ; as, Vilk @(G(fl 192, Defendant ; from 1)3) Plai ntiff. (T @0, Reply ; 2% HT™Mo Answer. Third. It governs the accusative case of nouns, in the sense of about, or concernming ; as, b BRI ag)HO™ (@@ @8@.}7%. He grieved about me. ense: 29. The following particles, for the most part, serve to connect sen- tences; as, ng to 1st agy ™ ® That. An illative conjunction used to shew that the subject referred to is contained in the preceding sentence ; as, Luck. DI QI o ag) M EOALD a0V They said that ke would come. This particle is sometimes prefixed to pronouns; as, y agCM@Aebo e s, After that. Inee: o) M 662, By which, whereupon. 8 For the further use of this and ail other words of this class, sce the Syntax of Particles. 24 A GRAMMAR OF THE Id. ag)OMIBO, After that, in consequence of that. This word is §tal compounded of ag)o that, and GO0 after. 3rd. n@(\momb or ag)"M98Ye, But, nevertheless, ete. This word is compounded of a0 that and @B if. When it stands at the head of sentences, its use is, sometimes, to call attention to the subject that follows. WOl In many instances it is merely expletive. £ This particle must be carefully distinguished from the ablative singular §ee of the personal pronoun ; the characters being alike in both : as, foll ag)OMIcd But, ag)Mo@d by me. to ¢ Ath. agecmoMomd, This particle is compounded of ngyv®y What, of g and ag)0o@t butz. When this word connects sentences, it signifies Jor. When it follows a neuter relative pronoun, it means thus, or as follows: as @DAIOD 106TD® ag)OOOMIRD, He spake as follows. Compounded of ag® 5th. a@%@&oammflmb, Because. of what, 6:6&263 by, and ag)omMaad but. Wa 6th. VWD OBINE, ag)( M@ e &I6ne, On account of whick, by Wi Wwh that. These particles are emphatic and generally signify for the very You cause ; in consequence of this or that particular thing. They are compound- ed of ®®, which is the past participle of the verb to be, oy that and GO &06M3 because, by whick, &c. fen Therefore, in consequence of 7th, ©V&OEHIENZ, GVHIT, Bln. which. These words are compounded of @®a», the verbal noun of &Y all¢ €O to be, 63263 by and @)D if. The Q) being inserted for i the sake of euphony. 1§Q 8th. aleom, After, moreover, besides, ete. This particle is very 101 often used merely to excite attention: sometimes in a variety of ways to dee which there is nothing analogous in the English language. 30. The particles used to designate the several cases of the nouns will be treated of under the head of Nouns. All the particles that remain to 1y be noticed are affixed to or placed after the words to which they belong. U 3~ 31. The following particles are connected with words in various ways ; ik thus, — MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 25 ord i 1st. ©o is a connecting particle and means and, even, also. It never stands alone, but is affixed to the word to which it belongs ; as, word from @00_Ivh mO_JCYao, He, and QQD b2l C\”’;‘?)Q_J}O She, 5 @@O.J?g_o? Qoa to call When combined with negative sentences it corresponds to the English words neither, neither nor. 2nd. @6 0™ is the accusative singular of the reflective pronoun self, igular see para: 60 on the subject of personal pronouns; but used as a particle it follows nouns and pronouns in all cases and numbers ; and 1s also affixed to other particles: in such connexions it signifies very, in truth, and words Wha, of a similar import ; as, s for. 6MICH @Dja_jHI0e MO a eV, 0s: 83 I spake just so; or T spake in that very manner. 3rd. &, Besides being the sign of interrogation, (see the permutation o) of vowels on this letter,) is often used to render words emphatic, or in the way of an appeal to the person addressed. It is always affixed to the word with which it is connected ; or a @1 or O is added to the word with vc]z, l)y X which it coalesces; as, 617, 6©Q9, thus GORIONI is it not s0? i. e. ound- you know it is so. ) that 4th. ag)®217. A particle, of very common use, placed at the end of sentences to denote an undisputed matter of fact; as, EOMBA) P 16¢ Qf ©a W) 16819, It rained yesterday. 1i. e. it is a fact with which we are f 6D all acquainted. q for 5th. 3o, Until, as muck as, as great as, as far as. This particle is affixed to the nominative and d @y a+t ive cases of nouns, to pronouns, and , very to the future tense of the indicative mood of verbs. It is sometimes declined ; as, @p@nlom, 6o cnHs. 6th. QI Do, But, alone, only, solely, ete. This particle is affixed S Wiu to nouns in all cases, and sometimes to other particles. It is sometimes i 10 used as a noun, and then means the whole, the entire thin ong: 32. The following particles, vith a few exceptions hereafter to be waysi named, are affixed to verbs or participles; as, E 20 A GRAMMAR OF 'I‘HR Ist ag)% @b, If, suppose that, in case that. This particle is affixed to any tense of a verb, or to other particles; thus, mi @RI IO ag)ss)ed, If ke come. ag) ORI WD, GYWIRD, @W@d, often supply the place of ag) golad; as, @V(ayLI0IVITh, If it be so. SO, requires the past participle, as @oai0d alomord, If ke come. 7 2nd. ag)s5laje, But, although, nevertheless, even if. When repeated fot in the two members of a sentence, it signifies eitker in the first, and or pa: in the second. It is a disjunctive particle, and usually placed after the past tense of a verb ; sometimes after any tense; as, and @olh BE)E)MIVI) 6] agslage @M. alglal. Though he became poor, he did not lose his honor. 20leid €063 60 &M 6dIm 0o Q(fl%o&@@a aQsHlaje BO® &HS HOS 62IY T, Moi Some will cut off the top branches ; but that must not be often done. 3rd. ag)(‘rfi’%o, After that, nevertheless, although. Often merely expletive. It is affixed to the past tense of verbs, and sometimes stands 3 alone as a disjunctive particle. five 4th. ©®eye, Although. This particle is always affixed to the past ]l participle ; as, Tan; ®2Ih ©D(e_ 18I0 A IOETDIAYe HTIND EOD 621, Although he may say so I will do . Iy When this particle is repeated in the sentence the meaning is wkether, or, if ; as, @9 @2a1h AIOMIBle B1alINIBYe MBS BOMAA]. aly, It is nothing to me whether he come or go. 5th. @6 0. This particle is always affixed to the past participle, ali Mae and in that connexion signifies wken, after; as, o @200h QIOMIeD BIPYe alOTT. Ll When he came he related the business. — of 1 MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 2 4 é fiixed 6th. age". This parti(.:le invariably requires a past participle and in this connexion signifies would have ; as, QIDYY 8 Would have come ; from i~ and agy®mM f g N o001 oM |, 97 spoken ; ,, CrOLONIB) 2] k)] EHIE @YY DY) 29 22 watched 59 IO 39 kbl Col I LOZOM ,, b trusted ; by QRN S, bk If ke I QM 27 99 gone ; 99 a1 99 39 7th. (ad»900, According to. A particle of very common use affixed :jeated to the present or past participle. For the further use of this particle, see nd or para 34 : section 2nd, 8th. ©sem, 4s soon as, immediately. Used like the last parficle. nse of 9th. 6®2Qo. This particle when affixed to nouns, generally of time and place denotes distribution ; as, Al O@®IQo, Every day ; from Alorve da_y. N OB IQo, City by city ; b MUDo city. s When affixed to the future tense of verbs, this particle signifies ke more ; as, Diés 6DIND BVFNOM ©S$6OIQe BVLS) BRI S E06TT. nerelf T'he more I beat it the more it cried. stands 33. The following particles require nouns or pronouns in the nomina- tive case; some few of them require other cases also; as, o past Ist. Qmad, msa3), From, beginning with. qm@d is from the Tamil and signifies Beginning ; ®s@s3) is the past participle of the verb D 268300 fo begin ; but used as a particle it corresponds to Q@ @b and is used indifferently with it. [wf.’lt’f ) Sometimes the particle m receives the past participle of the verh @YWL ; thus @ L2Q). @SS takes the present participle of the auxiliary verb ¢ 618, which is @8, in the same sense ; as, @S e831QY8s. @03 is a Sanserit word, but now. generally adopted into the Mala~ yalim language. It has the same meaning (] as and is used for Q@219 or ‘[ciplex DS 353 6. - When g 1970, or @573y 88 is affixed to the nominative case of nouns, the noun undergoes no change : when 2] is used the nomi- EZ 28 A GRAMMAR OF THE native case is abbreviated : and a noun or pronoun having reference to L\ the first noun is added to the particle; as, 6 ® &n QeI ) MNe30o The Teak and the rest of the Trees. QB9 B 100, The Trees and the rest. H) tive These phrases are idiomatic and intended to denote a whole class of (011 anything : that which is considered the chief of the class is expressed, e and @ 199, ®SE3QYSD, or @Y ), with a noun or promoun are affixed to designate the whole class in all its varieties; as, MU )eDo Q@ ALIQY gmmbo, The Lion and the rest of the Beasts. 1101 Implying that the Lion is the chief among Beasts and that all other 10N Beasts are included. Q@f Q‘_Yf\_@t)(ifl 6BV, Indra and the rest in?ze gods. These phrases nearly correspond to the English expressions, th ¢« All Beasts from the Lion downwards.” « All gods from Indra downwards.” 2nd. 160, Ql6ess, Up to, asfar as. This particle is frequently used in the same sentence with @@ @b ; in which, as well in other cases, Qo is added to it; as, thy @Y (VAWo QAT 6O, 0r 0B VAW, AIOOYo. (as From that time to this. 3rd. o935, From. This particle requires the nominative case of th aouns. and is sometimes affixed to adverbs; as, I6( @M OIS, From that time. GO, these. o @000 mfiw@@angampm}gaa}c@gumomQm)'\mfldrcg. From that day they bccamefirm-friends, or united in love. 4th. @ogoe®m, 69 LJ06m), QPl6VB,, besides, but, in the sense of except. @0£196® and 6€02198®, are the verbal participles of the negative or verbs @&} and el 96 P, comes from the verb &Pl to avoid. 9 That the Student may be the better prebared to understand native writings, 1 have copied, without amending, severai examples from their books. as in the present case, which is a quotation froma work ’# called e m@wo Puncha- Lantrum, MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 29 16 10 Used bas particles these words require the nominative case ; as, oo AR, 0h @O gAleS COGA rges, There is no one here but this man. 5th. HSIOD or H,SIOM &H6N8, Without. £ SI6@ is the nega- 28§ of tive participle of the verb &, $0vvo fo join. When used as a particle it essed, corresponds to the English word without, considered as a conjunction or N are preposition, and requires the nominative or accusative case, £H6ME 1s a mere expletive. easts. 6th. . &a 196083, Like, equal to. This particle governs nouns in the When in the other nominative, accusative, and occasionally in other cases. © NAN nominative, gy must be inserted between the noun and 6a_19 = ag)(M 1is also required in most cases, but the accusative. When agy™ is used there is a slight difference in the meaning, but this is seldom observed ; as, . He acted like him. @O agi(™ 61alIeel 600l el O YoMlasy 60O 61a196L) V@Y. This is like him. ently ¢. e. in person, condition, or circumstances. 8568, 7th. ©@@WJg. For, for the purpose of, etc. This particle comes from the verb @W&:rre. It requires nouns in the nominative and dative cases ; and is added to the infinitive of verbs. 8th. dlome, MAE®2IVg, eaCBmalINg Though, for ¢ of the sake of, on account of. With a very few exceptions these particles require the nominative case. 9th. @aaled. This particle, which is often repeated, corresponds to our words, one another, each other, together ; ete. It is used with the nominative case ; as, e O @old modlad @ eklcb C\\)o(Y\)i)@gzl. They spake together. 34. The following particles require the genitive case of nouns, and five pronouns; as, oid 1st. e . This particle, which comes from the verb 6 o) [ed] a 8, €6 Y2, governs the genitive case . {176 @Y HIGIAV'ODO e, After that affair. ro1 ()l‘l.\ )Xo, 13 sometimes prefixed to nouns and pronouns, or stands 30 A GRAMMAR OF THE alone as an adjective, with the noun understood, and_ then signifies the rest, the remainder ; as, | fron A @ VoL ©raAlles N, (ReNE: oo Bald ag) ;0L To i) HEVT). Ten persons are standing there : all the rest went away. 3 2nd. (B0, According to. 'This particle is used with nouns in inst the genitive, and sometimes in the nominative case: as first, with the genitive case abbreviated. M GO 6;\3_0%’\(6@(*’0 (@) 900, According to his will. fase Second, with a nominative. 2906 (- B:200. According to custom. ) 3rd. ©VSODHe, GVSHeMD, EVSHEOEIB0, To, unto, near. All these nler particles, whieh come from the verb @0g®6, (0 {0 be near, require the 3 genitive case. 4th. o100 @b, a_1@s@, By, with, are used in the same way; as, 4 ) @I oo EVEIEDO al0d@ Gom OHIGONW LY. He sent it by this person. Aee ges 5th. alomoses, After, behind ; as, @O0 aDomoeal ealre. Go after him, 35 The following particles require the genitive or dative cases of (g nouns and pronouns; as, 1st @016, GVO\Hm, Near, by. z 2nd. nd MO, Against, towards, opposite to. This particle comes Ao from the word &cv.®, straight, true, sincere. 3rd 60S ) @b, Amongst. This is the ablative case of the word €S @0 space but used as a particle, it governs the genitive and dative cases of nouns Loy 4th. oL, dlew, Over, above, upon. 5th ] Qom), m6s, gmiiay, Before, in the presence of. Tron 6th. adlem), aDmi @, aNcdaab, 06 &, Behind. 7th. Sy, S ab, Beneath, under. I 1y 8th @926, Below, under, down. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 31 6§ the 9th. Mseanl, DORN), Between, midst. a 10th. cvlaa, cvdlaiwo, Near, by. These particles come 0) fhad o from the word crU@la_to, Nearness. 11th. o CQo, Around, about. Ins 1n 36. The following particles require the dative case, and in some instances other cases also; as, h the 1st. eYQLIEV £, For. This word comes from the defective verb 6n 6o, o be necessary. As a particle it invariably giverns the dative case; as, <) -.l", For me. eOMBe BN 2nd. SO, Fithin. This word comes from the noun & Ho. | these interior. Used as a particle it corresponds to our preposition within. re the 3rd Y2 - @B OQYI For, to. 4th a8 al& 0o, Inslead of, for. From the verb a )@V, to pour. S5th. @&, ® LI, SO, BOTOIE0, BTMEAIIOY, According to, suitable to, so as, and a variety of similar meanings as sug- gested by the context. @ @6 1s a word implying suitablity. 6@ is the past participle of the verb £60rv2 o be right, or equal. e of j Qoo is a noun, signifying Size, thickness. Qg0 with the demonstrative @) prefixed, which is vulgarly spelled and pronunced &%; as £MQ16Mo, is used as a particle signifying like, 0mes according fo, literally of that size. Q1Mo is frequently affixed to pronouns with the same meaning ; as, @S C@%@(Y’Dmgg%o, According to, in like manner. o5 of The above particles are affixed to nouns in the dative case, to verbal nouns, and to verbs in the infinitive mood, and future tense. 37. The following particles govern the accusative case of nouns and pronouns ; as, 1st a O, dbout, concerning. This word comes from the verb a_10Q oM to stick, lo join. Used as a particle it governs the accusative case. = | 2nd. HOla, Adbout, concerning, of. ) P A GRAMMAR OF THE 3rd. ©B06nz, With, by. Der 4th. 900, Than. A particle of comparison @f 38. Particles requiring the ablative case of nouns ending in g . Dei 1st. @S, Through. This is the past tense of the verb & 50ve, fo Used as a particle it has the above meaning; as, Ind Join. @RI EVOCTH o§_5§7 nsove. He walked through the river. of t &S] is generally confounded with £,6¢, but this is not correct: &S &ld requires the 2nd ablative with ; as, EMICD BTAIOONIS HOS 600, I went with him. 4 2nd. &alo ]| is the past participle of the verb &1 fo lay ; or 4 place down. TUsed as a particle, it signifies among, as though, being there. It joins with nouns in the ablative, and with adverbs. geng Sometimes it is used with the nominative, but in that case, ag)OM must be inserted between the noun and particle. gend 39. The following are the interjections in common use. Mo BN, 20O BaQo, Alas ! Expressing horror. GOOQI Ak ! alas! 23 grief, or astonishment. 4 Ah! 2 wonder. edb @0 a2, @ 8. Ak ! 2 surprise B6MEIE o, Behold. Used to excite attention. Besides the above more common forms ; the heathen frequently express i astonishment by repeating the names of their favorite Deities; thus o2) to th ol valal, Shewa-Shewa. Bl Golad E0MIdn QIO MedhSs GO (] I0e aftM a0 a0, Shewa-Shewa the kind of affliction that happened to me cannot be described. e —— 3l ETYMOLOGY OF NOUNS. 40 To Malayalim Nouns belong, Gender, Number, and Case 1 begf GENDER Ll 1 41 The genders are Masculine, Feminine, Common, and Neuter. 0 s MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 33 42. The names of men, and those denoting the male sex of Heathen Deities, are of the masculine gender; as, @(Tco%%)(\fb, Man ; 626004 @5(%, Deymwendren ; o @smnod, Wirunen. () 43. Names denoting the female sex of the human race and Heathen ‘(‘I?,, fo Deities, are of the feminine gender, as, ®3Q), Wife; 6o (@36, I ndw?ney. Tver 44. Names signifying both male and female of the same species are 2 0 5 of the common gender'’; as, 616 1m@d, Child; 68048, Fowl; 6Qi 210600, Work people. 45. All other nouns are of the neuter gender; as, a1, Cow y; o Mo, Tree; dbgd, Stone; oNOB, Goodness. be 1259 46. Nouns ending in b, are, for the most part, of the masculine gender; as, aileaooh, A learned man ; o_‘;@(Yb, 4 son. nom 47. Nouns ending in &, 69,and o®o, are generally of the feminine gender; as, B () B, Virgin; u»nal®), Bagawaty ; ), Woman. 48. Nouns ending in o, are always of the neuter gender; as, Qloj Mo, Word; @0a\o, Bread; a12¢ Vo, Camp. 49. The male and female of the same species are, sometimes, represent- ed by a different word ; as, )12, A he buffalo. o) @0, A she buffalo. £79, A bull. Q_J(@, A cow. ;xpl’€35 50. Sometimes the genders are distinguished by prefixing a particle g Vo to the noun significative of male or female; as, c@@aa@mm’o, Boy. e 106eMmmed, Girl. At @ LINV61EIP), Cock. 6 1SOHNIP), Hen. v i be ] 110 NUMBER. 51 There are two Numbers ; the Singular and Plural. - 10 When pronouns are used in reference to nouns of this kind, they must be of the gender to which the noun individually considered belongs; as, @Y 66l Alles MM ; al em, ericd, or @RI, I Ro e.m('x:yz, That child came here, afterwards, he or she, according to the sex, went 3 away. T F A GRAMMAR OF THE 34 52. The singular becomes plural thus, per 1st Nouns whose nominative singular ends in o, drop the o, and take ) GE‘G(\o,; as, SINGULAR. PLURAL. the @9@0, Village. (Wooe3ds, Villages. QI0Yo, Garment. O_‘a@@‘@fsbo, Garments. 609U @3V, Diseases. 60 9IWUNo, Disease. 9nd. Nouns ending with the vowel sound of @, preceeded by a, form their plural in three different ways; thus, & By changing . into 0600 ; as, GDORIQL, @VORIBE 0. By changing I into 850290 ; as, 098890, ©IERIEO0RID. By adding &.00, or 900, to QJ; as, (2490, ()9 B:00. Such of these nouns as are of the masculine gender, usually take ©69® — 12 for their plural; as, slie PruraL. 159 SINGULAR. ke O HNI®I, D NI H0029ID. €01 BOMIBH0ID. BEETIAL, na SOOI HeO20. tho HODI, Stu 1@ 9660290. ooy, T Wi In some instances either of the above forms may be used indifferently, hot] but in general the plural is fixed to one ; though no rule, without nume- the ill Tous exceptions, can be given on this subject. Seny 3rd. Nouns, ending with the vowel sound of @0 preceeded by any other consonant than i, form their plural by adding & 0o, or Qcfisk\o to the nominative case ; as, ©@OM, Elephant. DM B Vo, Elephants. Bows. o_flgd, Bow. o_?:%ce)bo, PSS 11 The nouns ending with the vowel sound of @2, that take &&% for ahl\( their plural, are those whose last vowel is, for the most part, preceeded phy by the letters ®, a1, &, and 2; but the introduction of & appears to be \Ifi]c owing to a loose manner of pronunciation; the principles of the language Whe requiring the plurals of such words to ends in &b le 13 For the same reason many similar mistakes have crept into the lan- guage; thus for @68, the natives write and pronounce P29 &1, for sg®e @00, ag@(aj&hie, &C. 39 MALAYALIM LANGUAGE, The exceptions to this rule are that some nouns, chiefly relating to dtake persons, form their plural by adding @2®d to the singular; as, @9@,1% =Igy220. 4th. Malayalim nouns, whose nominative singular ends in &%), form their plural by adding &0c to the nominative case ; as, @m19, Hoe. gm_\oca)%. Mat. L) o__\Ocfi)()o. &SI, Tiger. &SI H00. -} y L 5th. Nouns ending in 69, oo, or &, form their plural by adding & Vo or ®o0o to the nominative singular ; as, Work. @%mfl&;&;. @\0‘5 @), ), Woman. @fice,bo. &Ko, Animal. £33 B0, - 3@&9& 12 The singular of 8% is said, by some, to end in ®», and that in all such cases the plural must be formed as above; as, 8%, 8%asd. This is a mistake, which few Malayalim Moonshees, from the very scanty knowledge they possess of the principles of grammar, would be able to correct, and therefore noticed here, It is however an error of no trifling magnitude, as it tends to confound the principles of the Sanscrit, with those of the Malayalim language; and, as a consequence, to lead the Student astray in an important branch of his studies. &9, @J@d, and numerous other words are, as thus spelled, not Malayalim, but Sanscrit. When adopted into the Malayalim language the last ®o is dropped rently, R both in writing and pronunciation; and in that altered state they follow ume- the rules of all Malayalim words of the same class. This will be fully illustrated by the following comparisen of 8%, which is from the San- scrit with e928, which is not, SINGULAR. PLURAL. g any 3,)60 t0 i Nom. 89%I, Nom. 8 42%. Gen, 8RN S, Gen, BIVAIRE S SINGULAR. PLURAL. Nom. ollag. No]n. allegaod. Gen. allze Qos. Gen. allsgaimes. By these examples it will be seen that the above words are declined a0 for alike,both, in the singular and plural ; the reason is because the orthogra- phy of such Sanscrit words are altered when they are adopted into the Ceeded Malayalim language: Whereas, the Fourth rule will show, in cases o be where the nominative singular of Malayalim words ends with ®o that jguag? letter is retained through all declensions; as, SINGULAR. PLURAL. e lan Nom. g&so. Nom. gemosde. a #I, e Gen, RERINY6S. Gen, @615‘(39(9:%_6)5 2F 36 A GRAMMAR OF THE The exceptions, to this rule, are that in some few cases of nouns ending Vo in 60, the plural is formed by adding @>® to the nominative singular: as, time ormyd), Malabar Brahmin. g © o 2. in n.;('éfi‘;, Wife. a1 29D, Nouns ending in 6, sometimes form their plural by adding H60250 to the nominative singular ; as, DG, Teacher. DOGHHC2ID. <o ee Prince. (859020, Case 6th. Nouns ending in @b, and O, form their plural by adding &0, or Qo@;éc ; as, N 6 ™D, Leather. e B ey Oo. 1900, Sword. Q9@ 0o, or 1@ HOo. (e The exceptions are, that some nouns ending in @d, form their plural D: by dropping the @b, and adding @®30s ; as, A 6o mh, Child. 66 ai® 6530, Is n “th. Nouns ending in o form their plural by dropping 0, and ad- 3r ding ®, or 029 ; thus, 4 BoOOL, Messenger. god. Servant. B (Yb, B®;0200. &80, Thief, Liar. £.88 Czd. o I The exceptions to this rule are that, in a few cases, Qo@;éo is added 101 to the nominative singular; as, @I0vh, Deer. 2R E Oo. 6ot Louse. 61 (Do, oth It is to be observed with respect to neutér nouns that, in very nume- €Xa rous instances, the plural form is not used, except in poetry. The noun o being qualified by some other word in the sentence ; as, @ @200 o, T'en Deer came. of CASES OF NOUNS. 53. Mz.tla‘yalim nouns have eight cases, viz. the Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and four Ablatives'?, To these may be added the g; 13 Tt is usval among Native teachers of the Indian languages, to clas- sify the cases of nouns by numbers; which, with very few exceptions, are arranged as follow ; MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 37 ending Vocative, which however, is for the most part, like the accusative, some- ar a3, times like the nominative, and in a few instances, denoted by the ter- mination &0, oo, or 6)Q; as, (@2, Oh Son ! omh oA, Oh Lord, or Sir ! i 66260, Oh God! 54. The particles that, in combination with nouns, form the different cases, are as follows. 8o, SINGULAR. PLURAL. § £:00, Bode, @3dc, O, Nom ) 29, 0200, Secod. Y. Gen. AN O, EIOMMO or H6'S. 906'S. plural Dat. Y, 9N oo 10} Ace ‘lg\}a @CQ). og). Ist Ab. by. SO, ST @D, d ad- 63S 63S Shd . Tm't/e 3rd 29 mn g_g_rob. 6@ 4th ,, from 0@ ENIoM. 60 @b Ao, 55. Nouns whose nominatives end in o, drop that character ; and add @, to which the above signs, beginning with 6% ©0b0, are added for the different cases. To most other nouns the signs are added to the added nominative in its full shape. ° ° 56. The letter i, or 0/, is often inserted for the sake of euphony other slight changes also take place, which will be fully illustrated by the (me= examples in‘the following chapter. nous DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 57. There are five declensions of nouns, distinguished by the ending of the nominative case. 1st, 6)6) 2o, Case, corresponds to the Nominative, as, )6 BT, 2nd. ° .. Accusative ° e niff"ea 3Srd. . L] Ablative by, with, 66B8alTmIrh, 4th. 653D M. d the .. Dative to oth. Ablative from ©6 3 T @b lom. 6th. 63Ul ebo. ) Cl‘c‘us‘ .. Genitive of 7th. ] Ablative in_ 6801 T @b, 8th. .. Yocative 02 QAINA. 38 A GRAMMAR OF THE @ The first has its nominative case ending in R Second, ovb e Third, b, d; and nouns followed by the half sound '* of @0 0 —— Fourth has its nominative case ending in m? @,7 o@o. and nouns followed by the full sound of @ve P e Fifth has its nominative case ending in e FIRST DECLENSION. Paradigm of nouns ending in o. SINGULAR. N fil%oy a tree, [ o Ol A NIRRT RS T (R Ao (g\cfiffl eento, of a tree, osjoefiam'?mq? to a tree, ] Ac BN RO, —] SN O @D, u iree, I1st Ab g;oefimmflmmb,—rgoefiamom’o, by a tree, | 2dd ., BN OD] ONIS,—J HNODNIS, with a tree, ord in a tree, e aven @b, 4ih Jrom a tree. cg&&rmflm’owflnm PLURAL. trees. ‘i o £neale, of trees. osjoefl_\.@’s%@s, he (509&6@80008&, to trees. e % MNP, trees. Th liot 1st Ab g AN G389, by trees. wiih trees. of 2nd ., QJANE@368IS, thy 3rd n trees. lag 27 BN EE3 gD, 4th on 2?2 oenasaglaailom, Sfrom trees. I 14 Though the vowel sound, of ®w; is inherent in every consonant, but the finals; yet it is only half sounded jin the last consonant of many words. This deviation from the general rule arises from three causes; H.Ol first, in consequence of some letters having been mistaken for others lig as in the case of the Initial and Final consonants: secondly, by attempt- e ing to retain the sound of words, derived from the Sanscrit, Tamil, and fhy Teloogoo; as pronounced in those languages: and thirdly, from the loose manner in which the Malayalim is pronounced by the majority of C(.)\‘ the Natives. i By long usage however the sounds of the words have i 39 MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. SECOND DECLENSION,. Of nouns ending in k. o SINGULAR. Prurar. N I @O, a Son. Y@ 0290. oflo - J@ OO, Y @HORIB6)S, D @M, | (ORI He. Ac AJ(@ON, A J@®ODIOM. Ist Ab. |ay@mNIad, (@ ODIBI@D. 2nd ., A @OMIS, L@ ORIOMIS. 3rd ., @b, Y @®0RIG)@H. 4th ,, @@ N, (@298 @I, An example of nouns in this declension whose plurals end in ®. SINGULAR. PLURAEL. N HSE0I00D, a companion. @E_‘go&&ofb. G B850 60, %g«%')@@ S. D B SHBI0 YY), & B0 Lo Ac SHZHHI0 O, S SB0I 0. 1st Ab £, 5 H6IMIDD, S H6IDIDD. Znd |, 58690 6MIS, B, HIODIS. 3rd 27 B, G50 N\, ggcflmo@m’o. 4th 2 &S0 INTYN M. £S B0 BT, become fixed, and according to the different pronunciations of the last letter of the nominative case, oblique cases are obliged to be varied. This places a real obstacle in the way of the beginner; because he has not only to acquire the nice distinction between the Ahalf and Jfull sound of ®°; but to learn also what oblique case is required for each word: thus, with the words ©®#. ¢ gun ; and #9% a crow; the orthography of the last letter is the same in both; but custom has given kalfa vowel sound only to the last letter of the first word, and a full vowel sound to the last letter of the second : on this account the oblique cases must vary; as, Nom. OMMIE . Nom. &HIdb . Gen. 6B 16 b, Gen. BIHQYOS. - but Until a Dictionary be formed pointing out the genitive case of each pany 509, noun, this difficulty caunot be overcome without considerable labor; to lighten which, I recommend that the Student, with the help of his Moon- 1S 5 shee, write down the nominative and genitive cases of all the nouns in e all the language that terminate with the vowel sound of ®2: then let him copy them all over carefully for five, or six times, and he will find the 1 the difficulty greatly diminished. The most ready way to fix words in the ty of memory is to write them often upon paper, Jave 40 A GRAMMAR OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. the First, of nouns ending in @b. SINGULAR. PLuraAL. Q@) @b, a wall. | 2800, or Q)eld Oo. ameiiendo, 2@ 8y HR6S. g amafom, D) 0§ EOc BN Ac omlallem, 2@ 86 8. 1st Ab ameonamb,—o ) awd, 2®)aye @ Iad. 2nd ., a@el MNIS,—AM 61L1IS D@L 8695 3rd ., tZ@fif(JJD, Qw18 § @b, 4th 22 amel @ om. 2@ ey B dladolom, Second, of nouns ending in Oo. SINGULAR. PrLurAL. 6\@(\)0, & scorpion. 6\@%@)60, or 6\@»‘6’_209:50. emendo, QI g&%as. emelom, @(l)‘:@cfi)dmfi&. % DG M, O %cfia @@o 1st Ab. 8 @& NI, O®S g 3D 2nd ., OMGIOMIS, MG 56 9IS, 3rd ,, e @, OmS L @@b 4th ,, amE TN, \ OB HH G NOM. Third, of nouns ending with the half sound of @v. PLurAL. SINGULAR. N. N800, aflmonl, a father. LN @IBEORAI TS, L Do fenbo, adlmoailom, a1 1) 2 B860D) He. Ac. moaem, 3D IEHORIOD. 1st Ab @ oo oo, A l@®966 00 H@d. 2nd ,, ali@IlIe IS, a1 1 IBHORAI6ND S, ond: i, a_ oot @b, 0@ 2660290 @D, a0 ai Il labonlom, a3 2800220 THOom. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 41 Nouns of this declension, whose nominatives end in O, or S, double these letters in most of the oblique cases singular; as, GO, River. Gen Solele)ole el alls, House, Gen. afgentbo. 1o In the plural these nouns are declined like &@0o; thus, @PQABVe,—aN58.00. FOURTH DECLENSION,] Ist Of nouns ending with the long vowel @. SINGULAR. PLURrAL. N &S, a tyger. HSLIH0o. G BSOS, BHSIIB 361S. S Y. B SQIIQYy, S So o Ac SO, HSAIIB. 613, 1st Ab £.50 100 @b, PN -ToWLP:N: Ul ) 2nd ,, £ SAIIONIS, &S 6)89S. 24 50190 1@, £ 5198 @b. 1 4th ., &SR @ orilom, HSIIBE TDIOM 2nd. Of nouns ending with 69, or c@e. SINGULAR. PrLUrATL. N "L_X(YYQ, a 1000, a pig. A 1ICMIQ)6'S, A lOM)H @ 6S atorde, Q_JHYfid?nbocflm Ac A 1oM e, IO 56 6. Ist Ab a3 oD, a1 OYY) @00, 2nd ,, alOMIOQIS, a1 6 9S. 10N @d, ) Gl GY VW), &35((5‘0. 4th ., adonl e b o a1om) el abrilem, o, G 42 A GRAMMAR OF THE 1] 3rd. Of nouns ending with the full sound of @& Synt SINGULAR. 1nay PLTJR;&Is, a horse.| &@® 10 H0o, SO, HOOYS S, SO BS 6OS AN 60 D, SO HOo B6). 38 (E SO0, ther B0 6. 1st Ab & NI, 55T © &SI DD, R 2nd ,, SON0HWIS, 0 B66IS. 3m ,, B0 @, the } B @O Is 4th ,, SN0 N@ o, BN BSlNO. the ¢ on FIFTH DECLENSION. the 3 Of nouns ending in 9. SINGULAR. Pruoravr B N C0lTe olUD, a con. u@m% g ailento, al @086) %_6) S g ailom, o_\@cflfiéoo@b‘) 4 Ac alugadlem, 1o B0 1 aff 1st Ab a g aNmoa, @ 1(U/B &0 T 2nd ,, adgrailemos, LU H06@IS. 3rd ,, Sth alygail@, o_x@aamg".mb. Lettey u@aflmfim’)m. 1B B BITNOM. & Norte.—Some of the oblique cases are subject to a few variations ; thus, % (50933’_\.0, a tree. o O BN ORNDO, -0 SN BRI (YD, SN BN §181,—O N GO, of, or in a lree. o), Tleg ¢ D DN @B NN, — ] BN YT 6) 21 0, — (| N @YD 6> DI 5> to, or unto a tree. in a tree. 3rd Ab. | 0@ @h,—a @0, % b, %&S’um(fibfiflm,“%mmfl%@(flm, Jrom a tree. Ruy h@l]) 0 MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 4 J o The use of these forms will be seen as the Student reads through the Syntax, but until he has acquired some knowledge of the language, they may be passed e ON THE FORMATION OF THE NOUNS. 58. Besides the primitive nouns, as a3/, @ cow ; CCO®)e, truth, §c: there are others formed in various ways; as, Ruie 1. Personal nouns, in common use, are formed by the help of the particle &2, signifying an agent, affixed to neuter nouns; thus, Ist If the noun ends in o; the o is dropped, and the first letter of the adjunct is doubled ; as, ©®9350, a garden ; amogo&}momflb, a gardener. (= 2nd. If the noun terminates in ) or O, these letters .are doubled and the affix undergoes no change ; as, 2\aS, A burden. 2 10SHIO0D, A porter. HN0, Rope. SOOI, Rope maker. 3rd. If the noun ends in @b; the @d is sometimes changed into its corresponding initial, and the first letter of the affix is doubled ; as, 08500_1(6)0, Watch. HIIEL, 90 o, Watchman. 4th. If the noun terminates with the half sound of @9 ; the particle 1y affixed without any change ; as, adad, Grass. qgs&;ommb, Grasscutter. 5th. In most other cases, the noun remains unaltered; but the first letter of the affix is doubled; as, B @, Horse. S0 B0 O, Horse-keeper. Hoe. @19, @M HOIO D, Dugger. Labourer. 5 thus, Hal), Fare, Hure. oé;Q_flcfifi‘D(O(Yb. 6th. The feminine, of the above nouns, is formed by adding 90 @), sometimes 90), instead of #2@D. In other respects the same (5‘&% rules apply to both genders; as, AL 6o 1a18090), Workwoman. @05) 2§ 8000 @0, Female sweeper. Ruwe II. Some nouns, of the above description, are formed by the 0 free help of the last l‘etter of the personal pronoun @2al0h. In such cases G2 44 A GRAMMAR OF THE word the last letter, sometimes the last syllable, of the noun is dropped and (Y\) sils; affixed to the remainder of the word ; as, (1Y & 8% o, Falsehood, Theft 66 O /’ii(f Laar. [/ ®0U5,Rc, Uncleanness @ UB, AL, Unclean Unholy (man.) I, Folly 612588 b Faol Ru o Naleto Vileness o) aioh e rman.) few Sin; The feminine, of many of these words, is formed by adding 69, instead of 0, BB M,~d3P): eI M,—6 @I &) use th Others are formed by the help of a participle and feminine pronoun: as, BOYD, RO, ~BOYB RS 188100 In a few cases of words, derived from the Sanserit, the Sansecrit termi- Rur L0uns nation of the feminine is retained ; as, From oSla i@ lo, comes a1 A vile woman. ' 29 G @, 29 Fa, Bad woman t Ruie II1 9l A few nouns, ending with the vowel sound of @®, take (AL the termination b, without any abbreviation, or change of the letters ; as @t QI OO ony? Age QY ooOh Aged man. The R Ripeness. B34 Old man. (\ | Ruie IV. Many nouns ending in o, are made personal by @B)0ovh 1 SHH\ In these cases, the o is dropped, and to render the pronunciation smooth 6\’\ a ) is inserted between the noun and affix Nouns of this kind that end in 60 retain all their letters and take @ between the noun and affix ; a Ruy 6 UBMYJo, Valour. 6C3MG QI Valiant rman. ) by the Happy, ” Viateq BIWY)o, Blessedness, Luck. @,)(DJ'LJO(YD o HN) Str engz‘/z Lo B @I, Strong b3 86 6 )R ) Sense ; Prudence. 6.)c,3 2900 Sensible, 99 Q Femmlne nouns are made from masculines that end in 0._.9('&: by 09 dropping @0, and adding @) ; as 6 UMY 19D, —6) Lo MYY D)) BIN)0 0eh,—2 Jmmfl E Some Nouns ending in @900 usually malke the feminine with the participle the lfl‘t and pronoun; as, 6 JRA) 18 ilc In the same way may be made the gy feminine nouns from those ending in @190 ; as, @CJU;)Q@QO_JL\x Rure © 0] A few nouns ending in o, drop the o and take the Sanscrit MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. o 4 9 and o word crannb ; which literally means 6;)_(67096300’3' alod, He who is; or sils ; as, (YU,'E'B o, Heaven. m;ug'a,mmw% Heavenly one, or He who is in heaven. (man.) 28x)jo, Middle. @%W\mrr\) Mediator. Rure VI. Some words of this class omit o, and add ¢v, which, in a few cases, denote both Masculine and Feminine Gender; as a_i%a_lo nstead Sin; adai), Sinner, whether male or female, 0o, Wisdom ; 20 9Y), Wise person ; but in most instances of this kind, it is better to oun: a8, use the form made with the participle and pronoun for the feminine; as, E230INABS 0o, 4 wise woman. 1t termie Rure VII. Other words of the same class are formed from neuter . nouns, and the Sanscrit word Us9a1) 5 and some few by @ ¢); as, Q.0 Ao, Renown. a1 RUBIAL), Mighty man o), Justice. Just man. ol eral), OmO, % Carriage. OMDIG), Coachman. o, take QST War. Soldzier. a1SW0g), ters ; 45 g Beggary. ©0p 19, Beggar. The feminine of such words are variously formed; as, ! N2 or (fi)mfl@g@@m%, Just woman. The first form @M. is Sansecrit though,now adapted into the Malayalim Langua-ge. smoothy GQ_J_(OQQ:P@. Signifies Male or Female Beggar, ind that Rue VIII. A few nouns denoting character, or quality, are formed affis ; % by the aid of ®_o affixed to words; in which case they are either abbre- nat: i viated or not, according to the description of the words prefixed ; as, » God. Godhead. pil 666 almlo, Man. Manhood. bl Q%%@Jo, 0I8]IQLY, King, 0B M Jo, Regal Dominion. )) Vo] ‘v' 2% Soft. %@@Jo, Softness. piogy, Light. ByEl @)1, Lightness, wanting weight. . Some words of this class are formed from abstract nouns by omitting articiple the last letter of the noun and adding @ ; as from U5RNo, Holiness in be made the abstract, comes (3R @, the character or quality of Zoliness. \b" rom comes @e51Mo, @2 NN, Filthiness. 29 adlMe, 7 aOlonm, Vileness. 46 A GRAMMAR OF THE B\ Rute IX. Many abstract nouns are made by the help of oo added are (1 to adjectives ; in which case the adjective is abbreviated ; as, e, Great Greatness. Q.Jp_flgt\o, Many @Q__B@&:io, Numerousness. & SO, Hard Cfi’§&fl°, Hardness. 62101, Small QD_JQEG) Smallness. 4th Rute X. Privation, or conirariety, is denoted by prefixing the letter Q(YYO Fro @ to nouns ; or affixing the particle 6&S, signifying loss ; from the verb &3S0 to lose, spoil, §¢. In the same sense 69 £40W, softened down from €9 21794, a verbal noun from the imperfect negative verb 6044 ; not to have, or to be; and &HMNWo signifying waste, decay, are affixed to words; as, Ruz BB, R D), Unholiness ; from @0 and ¢3RO, Holiness. Pronoy (@204 16BS, Disabilaty ; i BYES A, @:po_afi, Ability. Pres 6)@(\3@&.)@@69%, Uncharitableness ; ,, €08199),, ®O\a0o, Love. » SN Qo,, AIMo, Honor. 29M MNQe, Disrepute ; Perg Rute XI. Many nouns are formed from Verbs and Participles the nature of which, will be more clearly understood, when the Student has made himself acquainted with the verbs ; but for the sake of easy reference the formation of such nouns will be here pointed out; thus, Pagt Neuter verbal nouns are formed from the present tense of verbs. Perge 1st. By dropping the last syllable ©0vo from verbs that end in OO ; as, 9 Present Tense. Verbal Noun. . e a0l ee v, To love. QO(\)mo.(flrfim, Love or Loving. QI EBM, To read. Q0 B, Reading. Negat a8 abmve 9nd. If there by no & in the present tense, the last consonant is s lag dropped, and a single & added; as, Present Tense. Verbal Noun. l\k‘gat BT b, A stabbing. &, To pierce, stab. a0, To scratch. Q0D B, A scratching. » In a few instances, nouns are made from the last class of verbs, by dropping §rvo, and adding 9 &3 as, ROSmmore: o o Present Tense. Verbal Noun. QA@0m, To come. Q0 d, A coming. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 47 ) added 3rd. If the present tense ends in QAo ; the latter @ and g, are dropped ; and a single & added to the remainder of the word ; as, Present Tense. Verbal Noun. 6-2.1Q)co, To do. ©21Q), 4 doing. oy, To shool arrows. o) Qd,, 4 shooling. 4th. Negative nouns, of the above description, are formed by dropping 16 lefter 6 0o of the present indicative, and adding ®® ), or @Ry, ; as, rom the From mwpnacfloe@m, comes @U})DQ@&QD%), A not coming. softened 27 &@m@, » BONIYY,, A not stabbi72g. ve verh 29 QB O, b Q109 A not coming, Cay, A 2 6.2.1Q)r, 9 6.2.19)9Q),, A not doing. Holiness. RuLe XII. Personal nouns are formed from the participles by adding the Sy pronouns @oaltd H, e,'(@fb()_}k)o She, @o@ It; and their plurals: thus, Present Participle. MSHOHM, } Love Walk: ng. Honot Personal Noun, Mas. and Fem. singular S MSHOMAD or Aldo. l He or She who walks. iples the 2 27 Neuter 27 MSHSCN®, It which walks. dent has 2 s> Mas. and Fem. plural. ms®#e.cmald, 7' hey who walk. reference 2 » Neuter 27 N S BOMQ, They which walk. Past Participle. mMsom, Walked. bs Personal Noun, Mas. and Fem. singular § nscnalnd, or alde. i end 10 He or She who walked. 9 2 Mas. and Fem. plural. msomaud, They who walked. Neuter. 22 2 2 onsomal, They which walked. ouing: Negatives, of this class of words are formed by adding the pronouns as above to the negative participle, from which ag) has been removed and 150]13,1“‘ i“' its last letter @ doubled ; as, Negative participle present. MS®696)®, Not walking. S ONSHEHIBAIYD or A0, b Personal Noun, Mas.and Fem. sin =} 0" g l He or she not walking. Neuter. mg 27 22 29 » NSBNID®, 1t not walking. erDsy ) 2 ki § NSBEIDAID, » Mas.and Fem. plu. l They not malkz'ng. 27 77 27 Neuter. MSHNODI L, ? U They not walking, 48 A GRAMMAR OF THE Not walked. Th Negative Past Participle. (NS£600v0), 27 Personal Noun. 0nS@eI@vnnlow. He who did not walk. ete, | Tejecte For the formation of other nouns, see para 76. m) ETYMOLOGY OF PRONOUNS. singul 59. Malayalim Pronouns are Personal, Interrogative, and Demonstra- ifan; tive. Those forms of speech which correspond to the English Possessive, use th Relative, and Indeterminate Pronouns, are made up in a variety of ways, which will be explained when those subjects come under consideration. nd, OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 60. The Personal Pronouns are evoy20d I, o3 Thou ; 90 Self ; Ovald He,; ®odo She; &om It; with their plurals. Ist. ewocvd I, Masculine and Feminine, is thus declined. SINGULAR. PLUurAL. Ae IO, I, 60@3 00, §ve It QQ)GU(YBO.) of . e, of us. P D3OS, oM do, to me, 6Y0) 683 0o 6, to us. 3l o0 Q2 (¢ ag)e M, me, SMHES36, us 4th 1st Ab. ag)OMIad, by me, 6THEE3 9 (0D, by us. with us. They 2nd ,, ag)eyYMIs, with me, D@3 6$IS, n us. by 3rd ,, n@m’flmb, in me, &2 § @b, 018 of y 4th ,, q@(\rfl @I o, from me. 603 & NN, fromus. Tog H}' ; The above form of the plural can only be used in speaking of ourselves as distinet from some of the party spoken to, or of; or as part of a whole company : thus, if three persons were together, and one of them say 6w fom m @300 61al0d:6g, Let us go: it would imply that two only were to go. When the party spoken to, or of, are associated with usin the perform- ance of any thing ; or if one or more individuals speak about some matter in which all persons of the same class, whether present or absent, are Tllli 1 concerned, the form of the plural is thus, Sfiflsa-it N ™MIo, we, st Ab. [ oo, by us, mMepe s, of us, 2nd ,, M RIS, with us, The Mg &e, {o us 3rd ., Nz @b, n us, Zl(l(h'(,SSiI Ac us, 4th ,, | negi@ o, from us. g |meeo, MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 49 There is another form of this pronoun written Me2de, MER2E6)S walk, etc., but this, though of very common use, is improper and ought to be rejected. ™Mo, with its oblique cases (nORYOS ete, is also used as a pronoun singular of distinction by the higher classes instead of ewmIOD, ete.; and monstra- if an inferior speak to a superior, about the property of the latter, he will OSsess1Ve) use the same form ; as, of ways, @om MERYOS Q1B SO, lit. That is our property Tafion. 2nd. o) Thou Mas. and Fem. declined. SINGULAR. PLURAL. M Sef; N o), Thou, e300, You, Menbo, of thee, (flm@@s, N Ho), to thee, N300 He), to you, Ac e, thee, ee36, you, Ist Ab. e, (‘Yfl(“mf)m{), by thee, M@ g9, by you, 2nd ,, MleeM9s, with thee, M6 gIs, with you, of s, 3rd ,, {0 Use oo ad, wn thee, Iasglad, in you, 4th ., s oSlomat edlom, Srom thee. Wfl@m@@bfi'flm,fromyou. by 108 There is a curious anomaly connected with the use of the singular ith u8 number of this pronoun ; viz. that while it is never used except to inferi- o Us ors of very low degree, it is the only form used in reference to the Deity. f TS To say to a respectable man, ) @ (0 B900 BalaNQe o0 ? :’ 3 \\'11016 Have Yyou not so commanded ? would be a gross insult: but this say 69 form must be used in addressing the Supreme Being : as, ere 10§ 002016 il @B B0 Heflallfleiews? A P,en"orfll‘ O God ! have you not so commanded 2 me il atter This mode of addressing the Deity is in accordance with the laws of the ety A1 Sanscrit Language ; from which it has, doubtlessly, been borrowed The plural form of the above pronoun is used for the singular when ) ‘f/l 11'5.7 addressing females in the middle ranks of life: sometimes it is used i U t0 men, ’ f’.om 18 H 80 A GRAMMAR OF THE The following forms are used for the vocative cases of the above 4th pronouns. To persons of inferior degree, for the masculine singular, ag)$9: femi- N nine ag)$), for both sexes (¥l As a greater mark of respect ag)®S? is sometimes used for the masculine gender among persons of this class. Among all, but the upper classes and Sircar Officers, oNesado is used Ac for the plural Masculine and Feminine. Ist Al @DEE36 (YN is a term of respect, corresponding to Sir, used, in general, ad , to Sircar Officers of all classes except Brahmins; these are called 0n\19 3d |, ) Swamy : but this and similar terms, being both servile and degrading, dth ,, ought not to be used by Europeans. It is safer, quite as agreeable to the idiom of the Language, as well as most respectful, to address persons of rank or influence in the third person, or by their title or office: as, 982901 QIOMITD 6980 ; or MISIIAL QAIVYIIA L. Will the Rajah be pleased to come : for will you, &c. &IGB0 D LI ? Wl the Tahsildar come 2 3rd. mo0d self, is a Reflective pronoun; the singular number of which is seldom used except for the masculine gender. It is thus declined ; SINGULAR. PLURAL. ®a0d, self, | mee300, | i meho, ®E386'S, ) B0, ® EE3 V0 H6), ®0ur Ac @O, D@36 B, Gy Ist Ab. @ OMId, @53 @ 9T, and oy 2nd ,, ®ENMIS, ®6836$9S, Sl o, ® @53 G, 4th ,, o) abo3lom. | me@3gl adodlom. @90 with its oblique cases, is used as the honourific of the second person singular. When speaking to, or of persons alittle above the lowest classes o) is used. @@3300 is used, as a more respectful term for the singular @90V, MALAYALIM LANGUAGE., o1 he above 4th @oalnd He; @oalde She; @om It ; declined. SINGULAR. 9: femi- Mas Fem. Neuter, N. gfS! is @AV, He, She.| B0, It, class, G CBYZ)C)_JG‘;CY{)O, of him, @ONIBHS, of ker, @b, of i, D @BQIOM, to kim, c. o 15 used @IV & fo ker &c. IR®NOM, toit, . Ac BOAIOHM™, NALISNDOT: N @@ oM, 1st Ab @I, @00169 (GJO, @0 @) (I, n general 2nd ,, BOAIHMIS, @001069S, @@ 1OMIS, ed (A1) 3rd ,, @D QI @D, (@@m@adb, @0 @b, ith ,, egrading, @M DI oM. | @vasg adadlom. @@ OIOM, ble to the PruraL, EISOLS of Mas. and Fem. Neuter. a5 N. @oald, They, | ®2a, Th €Y, Jo GOAI®6S, of them, | ®0OIYE'S, of them. @V, to them, &c. | @O, tothem, &c. Ac @06, @OAIO WY, Ist Ab. @D QI I@D, @I, 2nd ,, @VAIODIS, GOAINNIIS, 3rd I ()i’1 Whi(:h 2 @D DH, ool @d, 4th » @ IQ)@ o, @I em. Jined; INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 61 The interrogative pronouns are @0 Who ; agy, ag) which ; @0Ih, @Dde and ag)ld who, which man, &e.; ag)o) what. WO who, is used for both the singular and plural of the masculine and feminine gender, and regularly declined ; as, N D, Who, G CO®HS, of whom, @Y Do, to whom, Ac V6, whom, 1st Ab. @ © @D, ihe aoond by whom, 2nd ., @6 IS, with whom, Sfle ot 3rd ,, @G @h, in whom, 4th ., @Y @M. Sfrom whom. 2H Y A GRAMMAR OF THE ag)® and a@)Q), which ; ag)O.J(Yb, ag)10c and ag)o_.!("‘.), who, which man, &c. are declined like the Personal Pronoun @oainh, &e. agalot, agyaido, ag)o__\?o, and ag)QJ are seldom used. 03 ag)®, is prefixed to any nouns, and in that connexion means which, Langl what ; as, Ist @oaloh agym P a9 ? 6qUT Which way did he go? ag® acedy,)d eoalles aimom ¢ What men are coming here? ag)Oo) what, is declined like @&0@, but seldom used except in the Nom. Dat. and Ab. cases. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. don 62 The demonstrative pronouns are @oalmd, @Taldo, @M, But that man, &c. @O_J(Yb, 600100, 60 @®; this man, &c. Theyare declined like @oai0b, considered as a personal pronoun. I8 pref 2nd The letters @9 and o@o prefixed to any noun of whatever number, the I gender or case, are used as demonstratives: &% answering to that and those ; o@o to this and these : the letter ag) answering to which, is some- times used in the same way. e(0)) Q(Yao%)fi‘b, that man. (D)) a:ora%?o, these men. this woman. oo (), oo @q&xbo, these women. Tt is to be observed that in many native writings these letters when prefixed to nouns, are changed into @0 and 69, and the first letter of the noun is doubled ; thus for &V &L 10, 0r 0o HIE o, the people write 64 Necessy DB 0, 6D FIR 6. the re Though these forms may be tolerated in poetic works, they cught not to be otherwise adopted, as they are calculated to cause ambiguity, and 65 a false pronunciation : but when @& or o®@o is prefixed to the particle i'l(‘C()uH/[ (e BIDc, the short vowel must be used ; as, f'dl‘ a8 ) @R(aHIe 6.0 160QUEMo, f You must do so ; or, in that manner. @0l0h €0(ejI00 ©21QY. Pf“it; t o He did so ; or, in this manner. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 93 , which POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 63. There being no distinct pronouns of this class in the Malayalim - which, Language, they are supplied ; thus, Ist The Genitive cases of all the preceeding pronouns that may be required, are used with nouns, or the last letter of the neuter prenoun : as, ag®0ho afls, My house. 6WE3Y S OMIFe, Our garden. NERHS &IGo, My, or our affair. t 1n the rfi)m%@s ®, Your's. ag)evo®, Mine. @oAIODO®, His. Sometimes they stand alone as the possessive case ; thus, @D aJNdho @BVAISNEO @B, That book is his. @0, Jeclined But this form is not good Malayalim ; in such cases the following rule is preferable. 2nd. The possessive is supplied by placing the participle ©@® between pumbers the person possessing in the dative, and the thing possessed in any case ; as, at and OMIBE 8B &m0, My horse. 1§ some- AN H6: 8 o__iméa_flanrbo, Of your property. 018% 166,88 @Q\_!:)W(W), To the church money. l EOMIBERSS [ I BN, It s mine. 1010 19 Whe 1 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. etfer of 64. The relative pronoun being supplied in a way that renders it le wite necessary in translating, to reverse the order of English sentences, where the relative occurs, more than ordinary application is required in studying ug‘ht ot this part of the grammar. li ¥, afl([ 65. The relative pronoun is included in the participle; on which | Partide account it will be necessary to exhibit the formation of the participle so far as may be required for the elucidation of the relative. 66. Malayalim Participles'® are two in number: the present and the past ; these in some cases, refer to verbs only; in others, include the s e 15 See para 114 on this Subject, - o4 A GRAMMAR OF THE P relative pronoun ; for this reason it will be of assistance to divide them into two kinds under the appellation of relative, and verbal participles. 6 67. The present participle always ends in 0™ : the past, has various terminations according to the conjugation of the verb; as, PRESENT. Pasrt. QITOM, Coming. Q-lGeas Come. Participle. 22 61O, Going. [QLIRLINIR Gone. % 22 Speaking. 6219810, Spoken. 620530, 27 fl.—\@fi&( ‘Y )’ Learning. a0)a, Learned. 2?2 6.2.1Q)oM, Doing. 6210, Done. 68 ‘When any of the above forms has reference to a noun following in the sentence ; or when a noun or pronoun is affixed to it ; the participle often becomes a relative of any gender, number, or case ; and the relative refers, not as in English, to the word going before, but to that which follows it. The relative is understood to be included in the last letter of the participle, :; and in such a case as the sentence may require. 69. To impress this subject upon the memory, as well as to facilitate the reading of Native Works; I shall here insert a number of examples class of words of this kind written in two ways ; selecting nouns whose initial I; letters are vowels, and consequently most liable to mutation. Ist Examples of words affixed to the present participles. QD.JO%(Y\WQJW‘?--G\D_JO conaaot, He who is speaking. 6219 AMIde—6 219 N @9, The person who is speaking. ) amo%mflm%—amo%rm 6(__20.4&:, This femate who is speaking. A 10ES ) 2 —a IO BN oo The fly which is flying. DSEZOMEVAL—DSEFMN §AVQo. The feast that is com- 7ne7zci7zg. @AY DO BBMYFJO—BVAID BOHEON 95y The 3 eating room that he is opening. S0 efl——agm ag)P_fl. The rat that is running. The reconcili- am%@a(m&)mm)o—&m%m B ag)HA®) o ation that s effecting. The betrayer 4 Qlemi) @6 6 (MI00IGl—atemiles oM B00¢. who ts decewing. @oalah 6erVANEE 6 MDA LV—@RALND HONVAI BN B8O, The medicine that he is drinking. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 55 e them 2nd. Examples of words affixed to the past participle. ples. amogg’]m}mmb-&mog@@mnb. He who spoke. varous sm_.\o%’}woéo-_ag_wé@w @00, The person that spoke. o_JO(YYafl %———Q..JOM) omo%. The fly that flew. DSEP3),PVAle—DSEIIQ HBVQIo. The feast that was began. €. DAY FaJO—DOMN §DZa®. The eating room that was open. 6S16Q/AI—6 S ag)ail. The rat which ran. k £ I " I 921060 HAD)o—021Q)) OagBHAM)o The reconciliation that ned, was effected. 4 @D0I0d 60V 240 LWe—@DAD 6V 2] £ L. The medicine that he drank. llowing ticiple 70. Relative participles are formed from all sorts of verbs, and are o Tefers, often qualified by the helping verbs; as, Jows 1. 619 IGlecmalnd, He who hath gone. a0l 2, i@, He who had learned. rticiple, @O @D.JQ%’W%@Q #0945, The business which he hath done. \cilitate ZE Examples of relative participles formed from verbs of different gampl(?S classes. , nifal Ist From verbs Intransitive. Present Indicative. m&«yma, To know ; be acqnainted with. 2 Participle @foflCQ)(YY). @VAIOD @)Y oM ), The woman whom he knows. yeking: 2nd. From verbs Transitive. eaking Present Indicative. 31998] A Be Y. Ilg- 2 Participle. 6 (Yc\r)) QOB M. is com= ag)HOM BN OIS BB, Ore (fem. gen.) who loves me. 3rd. From Causal verbs. The Present Indicative. @035 8___'006&% To cause to beat. 2 Participle. @8] aleaom. THULE 1 ll‘ 2 @%ng%esz,(m(}_lflb. He who is causing to beat. 4th. From verbs Passive. elraye" Present Indicative. @0S)@n61a_|50ve. To be beaten. 22 Participle @0S]H66) agom. %(‘fn @fbgcfim&gj@m oy, The cow whick is beaten. i 56 A GRAMMAR OF THE 92 Negative relative participles are formed, from the negative verbal participle, by dropping the og) and doubling the last consonant; as, Present Negative verbal participle. 6000018696 . unde relative 2) 2 22 acrc\ygo_cfloaaom. almor 9 @Cfc\%affltfiflomll(wb- He who does not love. EXCE] od; & Past negative participles are formed from the past tenses of negative prong verbs; as, hmg awcgofimomo_xéo. She who did not love. of the a%@gg%om@m%. She who hath not loved. ol i declin 73. Sentences connected with this part of speech, that have a future signification, or one implying duty, obligation, etc., assume a variety of 8¢ forms ; as, ©al0dnl0d AMNGAISH IO CV22IMe digo. He who will, or, is willing to go will get a reward. 8¢ 6ot 60D AIND. He who shall, or, is to go. @oAIOD NS {9008 Q). The way in which he ought to walk. @OAID MSOBHEMOAM8E IS The way in which he must walk. affxin @VAIOD (NS OGEETEM QLI The way in which he should walk. N 74. Our word, what, when used relatively is formed by adding the neuter pronoun ®@o®, to the relative participle ; as, eQleNgomM@. E0MIBH HAIEZOMD® GO, Ae This is what I want. Ist 2 ©D @m%oflo @OMITH HFQYOM®, or, HEQYEM M ag_‘w(p ek 3 That man hath done what he could ; 1it: that which he can. 4t 75. Our word that, considered as a relative is formed in the same way. % The EOOMBAL MIM@e AIOMDm NVodhSQESH I N, Wil a“1 Poseq That which happened to you yesterday is grievous, d“gUa MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. by verhal OF THE INDETERMINATE PRONOUNS. S ) 76. It may admit of a question whether some of the words, arranged under this head, should not be classed among the adjectives; and others among the personal nouns; but as on the one hand, they form the only exceptions to the general rules by which Malayalim adjectives are govern- ed; and as under certain modifications they correspond to English adjective egafive pronouns; it appears to me that they may fairly come under the appella- tion given above. Iam the more confirmed in this opinion in consequence of the plan upon which this grammar is written: see the note . 77. &0, or BHHYo. All, the whole. These words are sometimes declined ; but this is not correct. future ety of 6350 is often used absolutely; as, @RALITD 6389, or BHHWQYe HBIGNFAIND. He brought all, or the whole. 63 H0nQJo is never prefixed to words: but follows nouns in any case; as, GOAID c@c BHIYiEE3E @D BB o UAIQSBAIMIETD. He is accustomed to, ox, has practice in all these matters. @VITD @Y B EHOS BHORYo @ &) 2. He saved all those cows. 78. ag)adde, 4l is neuter gender; but by removing the last letter and affixing @010, it becomes Masculine and Feminine; as, Mas. and Fem. Neuter. 9L B, 29)54%0, Al 20)2J0LIBOS QJo, ) 2490016 0DOYs, of all. ng the g to all. @ )29 B8, 0§)2000M2e, Ac all ag)2JILIO Yo, A0 MM Yo, Ist Ab ag)24210 980, x.by all. ag)2J2001N92 Yo, 2nd ,, nGEIIBOISo, ag)242001MMIS., with all. @l 3rd ,, @8I0 0lale, (’-@%_JPO(?"E-AQ, in all. 4th ,, 8911 ONOMe. | agia 0 iRb (oo, Srom all. 1° The author has thought 1t would be convenient to the Student to me Wfly arrange the different parts of speech, so far as the nature of the language will aliow, under the same divisions and nomenclatures, as those, sup- posed to be, most familiar to persons acquainted with the English Language. I 58 A GRAMMAR OF THE" A personal pronoun in the singular number Mas. gender, in the sense Tl of each one, every one, is sometimes used; as, 0g)2 {20180 BOAITAISMO PO HIGIE300 HMIOES Mo, 8 Each one must-look to his own affairs. to th The above forms are used absolutely in all their cases; thus, )gfi“)m@c QIOM, AU persons) came. @00 ag)2.0 2 < 6 26Ng 102, He brought all. 8 ag)8d20@¢ is affixed to nouns with which it agrees: and both the other noun and affix ought to be declined in the case required; as, @300 agaPl@e OO Ms. You must all come. OOBAITIHODO By MIE@E68I5 af)LI0IBNIFe HOS 6o 0@ 6 g, T May the mercy of God rest upon you all. il Q_? When this word is used as an adjective, the last letter of the neuter = nominative is dropped, and the remainder of the word is prefixed to nouns, an f and governed like all other adjectives; as, ag)2l? c;fiao_fi?“j@o, All men. aggd? &9@3@5’3@07 All things. = & é o} Many words of this class are formed by the numeral &om, Pronoy which in composition is 63@, and the personal pronouns @I b and @oald, as BOaIbd: but this form is seldom used, and that for the Mas. gender only. Instead of which they add @ b and @) to @ for thé masculine and feminine and use 630 for the neuter; as, Nob Fem. Neuter. Mas. 6 BBV, & DY, &0, One 80 Our words each, or one by one, are formed by doubling & @, which i written 636)@9@ ; and adding the above pronominal termination; as, The Mas. Fem. Neuter. o, ayg BO0IBODND, 660 .T@, 6000, Each, one by one. :flillal { 81 Our words whoever and whatever are formed by the help of @ { @ and the Sanscrit word €8, which becomes in Malayalim /9 QL6 NG OO, MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. € $ense This is again changed into the language in Common use; as, Mas. Fem. Neuter. N0 woamomm@fi)fi, QIO®IG TR, QISBICN, Whoever, whatever. 82. Our word another is formed by the help of &@@ b prefixed to the adjective 200 ; thus, Mas. Fem. Neuter. DAOOIBEND, AHCOIBDY, 200IYN, Another. 83. Other words of this class are formed from the adjective 200, oth the other; gy, any; and 620YY, such, prefixed to personal pronouns; as, Mas. Fem Neuter. @000, Q00AI0e, 200®, Other. agjatiod, alaiaide, Qlaim, Any one. , 498 €o0Man, 600 aldes, oM@, Such. The personal pronouns are added to the adjectives aley, many, and ailal, some; but these are seldom used as nouns except in the masculine o neufer and feminine plural, and 2 {ie in the neuter singular; as, F OIS, 0._\9__!()0, Many persons. .Q_fl 2Ll (-b-) Some people. o laim, Some part. hings 84. Negatives of this part of speech are formed by adding 6o to the | B07 pronouns and affixing 6044, to the pronoun, or to the following verb; as, j(Y‘L\ an& Mas. Fem. Neuter. [ fg;’ th B BONMRA2, 6 [T CQJQQ%, b’%(‘r’\’baflgfl, No one, nothing. mswfine eI B HeElay, I saw nothing. Nobody and nothing, are made also by the help of @®® and ag®. @’@@5@%@4 Notody, no person. ag) c@‘@:&j, Nothing. SV B ©D D 6\,,9__1%')('**3 LIASIVIOD® 6O Y12, No one was able to do that. ®, hich The whole of the above words, that have the personal affixes, are declin- 101 8 ed. and governed in all cases like the personal nouns. When the prono- minal terminations are dropped they are used as adjectives; thus, 10 by i Each book. BOVIONI a N dho, gOf 65‘@9’ a2 el #9930, Some affairs. i ) O Another cow, AOOQOIR oD, 13 60 A GRAMMAR OF THE : an ( VERBS. 10 ma 85 ed fro Malayalim Verbs are of four kinds: Intramsitive, Transitive, Causal, and Passive. 86. The construction of the Malayalim Verbis very simple, and except In in the imperative mood, and poetic writings, admits of no inflection to express number, or person; these are determined by the subject that the v governs the verb; as, case, (M0, OF MICTD 1 love. 4th M a0lHR M, o), or mId e N0l B6 (17, Thou lovest. ngm @I 608812, He loves. We love. Mo, VOEERV DlepblIR L YegcH M@0 You love. 6 2OIBR T, @D They love. OlegbloIellz > aar ) 87. The Malayalim verb, with the assistance of auxiliary verbs, is in 8 some tenses, capable of a greater degree of precision than the English verb and § will admit of. Th DERIVATION OF VERBS. Pres Pagt 88. Malayalim verbs are formed in various ways; as, 1st. From their own roots, which, abstracted from the changes they Futy undergo in forming the different tenses, merely indicate the general idea Son of the verb ; as, @®tS), Beat; ™S, Walk; 619, Go,; ai9, Come ; or of { a0, Speak ; &c. Clreyy The present tense of these verbs is made by adding ©0, Q0 Verh O, or BB, to the root. the al 2nd. A great many verbs are made from neuter nouns, derived from e s al the Sanscrit, and correspond in meaning to the word from which they are 1§t formed. These verbs are made by dropping the last letter of the conso- eXpla, nant, and adding 60#N0, or Gal§o for the present tense; as, @_.30\)0(/3)0665(\’?’&, To preach ; from ("o, A sermon, discourse. Q_fij@)&gfl%(‘fl@, Todeligkt; 9 bfl@c, Delight, desire. In some instances other slight changes take place in nouns when formed into verbs by the help of 0860 ; as, a@m%&‘.mm, To steal ; from 6)QIAM o, Robbery. 1 Y MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 61 3rd. Verbs are formed by the help of the verb FD_Q_JC%(Y‘@,” to do, to make; and in a few cases by other verbs, added to substantives, deriv- ed from Sanscrit. In this case the noun undergoes no change; as, Sitive, 62160 1QJ0, To labour ; from exalel, Work. exeept QAN N 62 IQON, To commit a robbery. flon to In the case of verbs formed with substantive nouns and 6.0_1QjOre, ot that the verb must in general, be construed as if the noun were the accusative case. 4th. Verbs are made by the help of verbal nouns with 6o and 6101 QY o, in the tense required ; as, @RI @06 @SB RY o 6\!)..!%, He beat him. OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 5, I§10 89. Time strictly speaking, can be of three kinds only ; Past, Present, ol verb and Future, These, in Malayalim, are expressed by the verb in its simple state ; as, Present evmocvd @0S18630v0, 1 strike. 690rh a0 o, I speak. Past 2 @osla,, I struck. 22 1060, I spake. Future 2 @0 S1@6) o, I will strike.,, CL.\()Q)JO, I will speak. 6§ th("‘{ o) ided Sometimes however in speaking of the performance of certain actions, Come s or of the state of things at particular times ; there are so many modifying circumstances as to render it necessary to qualify the simple tenses of the Q(YYO verb. This, in Malayalim, is, in a great measure, effected by the aid of the auxiliary verbs @0 dvo and 600 B6 (Y2, fo be, 868, to have, to be ; and the particles d»96M3, @20, and GVo. 3& from Ist the}’ are @00 and 6001860, declined, as far as necessary to explain their connection with other verbs. ) (0ns0° 5 8 InprcaTive Moop. Present tense @, @Q_m”loe&ma e Past 27 @B, @@m&. Future 22 @29@30, SIE: T 1 fl)l‘med 7 See para 127, Section 6, on ©-aigom. 62 A GRAMMAR OF THE of th ImperATIVE MoOOD. verhs First and Third person Singular and Plural. @065, 600)d06)S. Second ,, Singular EO D, @(53 6. 3?2 Eb] Plural @Y &:ilnd, g0l jlob. InFiniTIVE Moob. W lity: ) 32100, gim‘;&flonb, PARTICIPLES. Present. @0 &M, 600B6OM. @ '.Uh Pa > t EYR), 6;2@(’(7’). & Th Ind. Q@) ) ©673 is conjugated by the help of @V and @Y #60rve; thus, Present 653980, §6MEIN Bl BE Y. 9% Past 96reI0j), Qm@o;@fl@m@. Future §589d0, ngocsv’)(& B c. 3rd. @Iz, The use of this particle, in modifying the tenses of Verbs, will be explained hereafter. 4th. o $(®) ~18 1 s a particle signif};ing habit, readiness, or fitness. Th This particle, to be used with the principal verb, must be prefixed to ) 52, or BYHN, In this state it is affixed to the Future tense, or Infinitive Mood. If to the Future tense, the last letter of the Verb must Inc be cut off and the particle affixed; as, from &a 1230, ill go; VA reSpr)n O 10220907, or @ININ (@ HE Y. He is prepared lo go. walky If affixed to an Infinitive, the last letter of the Verb and the @9, of N (if the particle are dropped, and the remaining letters coalesce; as, from The Qa_10@:3Q190, to go; @D Bla 10 Q1932 He is on the point ofaye of going. @D 61a2:019Q6 e, He is in the habit of going. 5th. ©o is a particle signifying resolution, consent or ability. Itis annexed to the principal word thus: First, to Verbal Nouns to which &je a¢ has been added; as from c~0aOINRS i86, (YW, fo kelp, LAOIN]L6QYo CVo; this form is then used as a verb. Secondly &0 is affixed to the Future tense of verbs from which the last letter has been previously Fither removed; as, from CrOQOINQ &0, will help ; COVAOINT )69 e o 19 T 18 See a further use of this particle, Para ilO, S;;tiou 5 that it LR MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 63 of these forms may be used indifferently. When the subject of these 06) verbs is in the Nominative case they signify resolution and consent; as, 60 IY0 6)aldds0, I will go. m 6 YVA0I BN @Vo, I will assist, i | When the governing word is in the Dative case, the verb implies abi- lity; as, oM Be BatIBQs @V, I can go. 6D ik (TLRO N Beds, I can assist. There are other qualifying words which will be treated of hereafter. The different Moods and Tenses are formed as follows, (‘\r‘ Wil PRESENT TENSE. T 90. The present tense of all perfect verbs terminates in 2 ; as, TR, to melt. ey 03 B, to love. QIBC, to come. B0S | BEVYTD, to strike. tenses @)Y O, to know. @O Q) BE YYD, to make known. odes30nve, to move. OB 1R, to remove. The formation of this simple tense hasalready been described. See para88. xed 10 91 [ORC is often affixed to the present tense; as, 6\(‘(}%0.5] A6V YR, nse, O In certain cases where this word is added, the verb may be said to cor- oy must respond to the present progressive ; as, DIV MNSBEY RN, [ am 334{“(5 walking : but in most cases it is a mere expletive; the Natives making no difference, as to the meaning whether it be added or not. o, of The particle 67678 with €00’ 662, is added to the past tenses 5, from of a verb, or to participles, to represent the present progressive; as, 0 !-g,gz'.’zt @D NS 6967 D) BT, He is walking. 1 o) GEOAID NI IID) 534__,}6\oEbC)tSWé;(0~ ®CM. They are conversing. Jtis ich G4 There is another form made with the verbal noun and @ &2, as, @Y aliigh NVIWMo adP D @)Y, That writer is writing the letter. o the ?“’ifi ub 19 Travsitive verbs may, in general, be said to be known by the & in Fither the present indicative being doubled; but there are so many exceptions / that it will be easier to learn to distinguish “he active or neuter sense of a verb by practice, than by loading the memory with rules on the subject. 64 A GRAMMAR OF THE 92. Actions, that persons are frequently doing, are represented by X affixing the present tense of the verb QI@(, to come, to the past tense of the verb expressive of the Action; as, ©vaAlh Goailes NSONAIONT. He is frequenily walking there. 3rd long v SMID a@P@ I, or afPAITBTRENE. I am in the habit, or am frequently writing. Q 0 PAST TENSE. 93. Under this head will be described the formation and divisions of the past tense. FORMATION OF THE PAST TENSE. 94. The simple past tense is formed from the present; thus, 4th Ist Verbs whose present tense ends in #60¥0, preceded by €0, or 0Q; a ag), form the past by dropping £6(YY0 and adding Qz‘i ; as, PRESENT. PasT. to strike. @S| H6L O, @S, 2 1'0@8 0, .Q_fl(o')_réi, to laugh. to deceive, Qe i Be VYo, mm’?%}, @06 SHEN, ©06)S 2, to shut. Em aNeoss 0, o) 6021, to tremble. to nail. @ 610 BE (TR, ()] 650%;\‘, ulh Exceptions. to stammer. | 6y 03B, aes), 2 1)®6), to dry grain. M, o 2.1 H6 0, and g ond. If 860 be preceded by S, or O, the past is formed by drop- Ve h ping 86 and adding ON0; as, Preceg PRESENT. PasT. B SHAHOYR, SO, to lie down. ™M S BN, Mso, to mwalk. &S BV YO, HS e, to pass over. DOBRHT, DO, lo open. lelear to fly. a_ OB, QO E6, (Y, o200, to forget. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. nted by Exceptions. 5t fense PresenT. Pasr. of v 5 CBE D, 902, to ol s engthen. GOQHEOM, C@qu‘@, o saw. 3rd. Verbs whose present tense terminates in 6,00 preceeded by 2 long vowel, or by DB, for the most part, make the past in (‘6;:_@_ or 990; as, PrusenT. Past @) ARV, OROMO) ;;‘,, to finish. QIIER O, Q@YD) to found, cast. sions of 1088 (YT, IO, to dwell. €IS H6 O, OBISOD, fo give. 0g)SH0M, ng)$ 0D, to take. @SB (YT, @ogaVy, to approach. 4th. Verbs that have o or @b before HECo make the past in g or 0 0Q; as, Present. Pasr. 0800 BE M, to hear. 0LS, 600 HROND, {o MArry. eng, O], (Y10, eM 0Q, tofast. O_f?ea}&(m, lloq, to sell, Exception. olo, to stand. e, O, 5th. When the present ends in e o, @3, and their causals; or i SO, O, BHOM, OO, 6MNR, OQOM, alond, oD (Y7o, or g9 (v¥e; the past is formed by omitting the 8 O of the present, ) and adding 6. by dl‘OP Verbs whose present ends in SO, e, QCmo, and v, when 0>} preceeded by a long vowel, follow the Peie)) me rule; as, PrEsENT. PasT Sl Negr A B, to dissolve & ®BHE., &6, to cause lo melt. BN, & ) to crow, as a cock. Y HO VR, ) ? to make. cfgé‘ @H6, N, Fo to /zan,gz ReEezone, 3, to sink. x “Fu0) 29 03 “Buo| ;M%&U “ysu1f’0} C ‘LYW “J0a}s 0} Eep ‘U O ‘U0 © AN = *201.4 302 0} ‘S 00 102 0 ‘U ‘uu| W “hng 0y ‘8909 ‘o GBCE© *2UNSDIUE 0) ‘U0 B ‘LA CRP DU “829 07 ‘U0 GO ‘U0 UG Fu hasuny 29 03 ‘aenro ‘U BN TV Tig “Uapanq » 4409 0 ‘oo T ‘e of “wnd 722/ 03 ‘COCLO UL "puas 03 ‘Formoe ‘QUUGP DU ot Q& e 29 07 ‘o ‘suonpdooxry "221)q 0} QB o ‘@ ‘dunp 20229 9200 0 CLLDWLE ©6C “YF0IYsuUn 03 ‘60 ‘LLOQGLE *42000 0] 4s® ‘s ® o 4y 03 07 (OO ‘U IH “Surs 0} B, ‘S crY ‘@S ‘dwnl 0 (SCrT ‘LSO X ounp 03 (S U0 G0 yomyd “yowrd o3 M(EEIS ‘Luou|o uLYs 0} © @ ‘nds 0} ‘m?:g'@’ ‘LL 3@ “Yons 0 e (poro ‘ULDOrv JUn0d 03 ‘o9 GBS v *29.421d 03 ¢ P ‘U0 WP ‘uLng (0)] (e ‘L@@ ‘u0y9 0} “WrG S IINC] QGO "Yf0)1.498 07 (I8, LS &~ “9adxa 07 ‘Eo® ‘0SB P *7027709 07 ‘5% *200u2.4 0] ISSEC (@) N:dov 200U ‘9Pada. 0} ‘lers2(0 ‘g Il WIE 104 apun dap “Yurs aywus 03 ‘oo ‘e ISV INASTHJ 119 AHL 40 VIV v 99 MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 67 6th. Verbs whose present tense ends in @0, preceeded by a short ld ] b s vowel, make the past in (¥¥3, or (2; those ending in Q) Y0, make 6OV and those in Q} o, % ; as, PRESENT. Pasr. a1, a_J&(Y'Yc, to pour. BT, @ YD, to be broken @YY, ®ON, to give. QIO oM, to come. 610 1B, ©)a_100YYe, fo accompany, to go, 0 Q)T Y, &0 EOVDY, to weep. a_10WQY M, 060y, lo speak. @) @, @7(676‘@@, to turn. 6)0_.‘%( Y 'D, to rain. Doy, Q@%m:r to shoot arromws. 2% Exception. I, O I D, to contend. 7th. Verbs whose present ends in $0rvo, preceeded by a short vowel, make their past in §; as, PrEseNT. PaAsT. ) D 150, 245, to burn, warm. €IS, to touch. O®Ig, mMSN, mg, to plant. 6B SO, to be extinguished. OB, (%&)638:\1?(\(%, @0 Slo be enclosed, caught. 8th. Verbs whose present ends in 0, make the past in 6, those in 2J0M, or %m, make YV ; as, PRrESENT. Pasr. QIO 1061, {o govern. MO, I, to become low. adlpor, afe, to fall. @O, GRABHOY, to remove. 6‘)_9__1.(% Yo, 612 (N9, to go. to kill. 080840, OB, 2K A GRAMMAR OF THE 68 was | Exceptions. g 1 PRrESENT. Pasr. to sink. thus, STHONo, @D)OVE to strike. 1t malome, 2®) mg@, fo speak. binat 210840, @.QJO%.@, noun 9th. Verbs which end in g, if the preceeding letter be short, make the past in 603 ; as, PAsT. PRESENT. to roll. Q@%m@, 6 G6M3, Par 6O O, 6062, to become dark. closes HOENS, to gnamw. L0 M, QIEENS, to wither. Q.l(o%m’o, There are a few Anomalies; as, Pasrt. e PRESENT. to see. the s £HIEDOM, HHeE, a..0Q, to bring forth. 6)a1QOM, DIVISIONS OF THE PAST TENSE, 95. That part of speech which corresponds to, what in English gram- mars is usually designated, the imperfect tense, may, in the Malayalim The language, be conveniently and correctly divided into two parts; which The for want of more definite terms I shall call the past and the past progres- stve tense. PAST TENSE. 96. The past tense, which in Malayalim represents an action, or event, as wholly past and finished, in the sense of the English phrases, I went, The you loved, &c., is expressed by the simple past tense; as, fhis I went. eHIOD BN, verh ; He came. @oa it alom, o esOo acvc\ygo_@ , You loved. @b O&:S, They heard. PAST PROGRESSIVE TENSE. 97. This tense® represents the past time in which some occurrence 2 See para 104 respecting this tense. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 69 was happening, or some action was in progress; as, while those were sleep- ing these were eating ; when he came they were walking, &c. It is formed thus, 1st By adding @2QJ1@ 02 to a verbal noun: in this state of com- bination the new word retains the meaning of the verb from which the short, noun was derived; as, from F(Y\)mq_('fl REYY, to love : eI BN HEQIRNBR, I was loving. @D 6 1HR IV O, They were going. Particles cannot be affixed to this form of the verb; and it invariably closes a sentence; as, @SN c&mgag:jobo @D A BINBA. He was coming when he saw it. 2nd. This tense is also formed by adding 60672 and 60 @V, to the simple past tense of a principal verb; as, @Uga(?%\lao&%f‘@@ oo, Was loving. @RIt ©Io alBLle AN (@@TITD atIED aflgaal) emM oAl |BB:I6NE 1B, He abode in the lem};Ze day and night serving Vishnoo. | gram'- _ayalim The future form 6&96ME101E6} 0 is often used for the past. whick The particle maaflr)bo is often affixed to these forms of the verb; as, 08 168= @VOIYD ONMMLIR) @o@:?fi\f‘@@@m&&j’)bo or (NUoCrVOIM) B1B 672 0) @8 61100 EVQAID e1a 9. They went while he was speaking. eventy [ ety There is another, and indeed a more common, method of expressing this tense; by affixing @06g{200 to the future tense of the principal verb; as, GO RN LMo @V QICT. She came while they were eating. @b BoAle @0S)eaemlIIbc WO QIO ? Who came while you were beating him 2 @oald ealsmMeg |56lesemide @®RAIh @pIen ©D prrencé eIl {la . He comforted them when they were afflicted. 70 A GRAMMAR OF THE PERFECT TENSE. 0l ¢ 98. That part of time which, in English, is termed the perfect tense al is, in the Malayalim language, more clearly defined by two distinct forms which I shall designate the perfect and the present perfect tense. PERFECT TENSE. 99 This tense represents an action as performed within the present time, that is to say, within an individual's life time, or within the present century, year, month, or day; but which is entirely over, and finished at the time of speaking about it. 100. The perfect tense is formed by adding &8 with €9 prefixed to the past participle, or past tense of the principal verbs; as, 6\08:5156\('\@. Have heard. 6MIYD @D ALEM HerElgome. 1 have seen lim. ) @D (@00 §2 Q566N ¢ 6 90Yh @O 60 1Qfg6ME. I have done it. Have you done so 2 When other words are affixed to these forms, ©@® is substituted for H6ME; as, @0h 689588 AITDRIMe VD)AWB®A- The news you have heard s not true. o PRESENT PERFECT TENSE. the 101 This tense denotes that something has occurred, or that an action Son no ) or short time past; and has been begun or a purpose formed for a lo continues in operation up to, or is still in progress at the time of speaking about 1it. D 102. The present perfect is formed by adding 60®166:M to the past participle of the principal word; as, Gfigafl&fl@&&cwb. Has loved, and still loves. a_19@YN D) B6, (VY. Has dwelt, ,, 22 dwells. oo MUdla{lafomlls @oalnd cflumie o @) LY. He has resolved to destroy me. 103. The present tense of the indicative mood, in English verbs, if it MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 71 conveys an idea of continuation of state, or action from the past to the fense present; or implies a previous knowledge of some future event, is generally and elegantly rendered into Malayalim by this tense; as, OIS 0881 INOEVHANLE 28R a6l OB 2L @D HRILIISAo (VIIOETTID]H6 . As the oil filleth the rape seed; so God filleth every part of the world : or, as repe seed is full of oil so every part of the world ESENt is full of God. esent o at oo QUMY B0OBIBOYo (MIIEE3VoBn GV, QLHAIWI HOM ag)omMm rvfl@sfle‘@{\_as CLIONOMIY adl®Ind @) 6Y0YD) | (0B (YYD, fixed Your heavenly Father knoweth that all these things are necessary Sor you. @DAIND @V (W) adlees o SlSwe . He is blessed. ©DIND MLAIND GV &M agi(™ agalISAds (e N1k e, G a51d0les0. It s every where reported that he is a good man. d for S VIS ENIDMD Do BITCIOOD B )] S 8Bo aliOy 0M @Wfi‘.m B B 90N Q) 1B H6, Y2, I think that witness will tell a falsehood about this affair. In this example the present 6@ ¥2 may be used; but the sense would then be, that such an opinion had just been formed: whereas in the other case, it implies that the opinion expressed had been formed for some time since. ction : and PLUPERFECT TENSE. JLIHg 104. This tense is formed by adding 695 and §6"8INV 1BV, or EOMOYY, to the past participle; as, e pflif eanlalgeneril@or. 3 Had loved. omyadla i@, S This last form is occasionally used for the past progressive tense, FUTURE TENSE h%“? 105 This tense is formed from the present by changing o, into o; as, Present. @W}ga@«.fi&(\mfi.. Future. @CY(\Y})Q_@ e, - QIO - QLGo, q 1{ 1 72 A GRAMMAR OF THE 106. The English future perfect is expressed by this tense ; as, @VAID AT @I QOM EMITD ©V® ag)P Do. per I shall have written, lit: I shall write, it before he comes. The future indicative is often used for the indefinite mood; as, o 6mICD BVD agPOMEMEROM BV Q — \ OV ag)P@® o afl ag)"™M alOBHQo H2IWQ. He told me to write it, and I said I would, lit: I will. €X] 107. To express purpose, or willingness to do anything future in the Jirst person singular and plural, the form made with the particle ©@o, (see para 89, section 5,) is used ; as, (MY, OF HWIND GO 6216, I will do it. HWEVo @VAIOS 60 IH QYo OVo. We will go thither. IMPERATIVE MOOD. an 108. Toavoid prolixfiy, I shall include under this head the same forms of expressions as are contained in the English imperative mood. This in Malayalim is the more convenient; as different parts of speech are expressed by the same words; the precise meaning being determined by fuli the mode of speaking, or the parties addressed. Jou FORMATION OF THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 109. The first and third persons, singular and plural, of all genders require the same form of the verb; which is made by removing &0, Vfrom the present indicative, and adding 63; as, QI@OY, IO 6S. Present. o 10Q)0M0,—6mI00 al0®6)S. let me speak. 9 621, —BILIVo 0196615, let her go. 2 OB MR,—@V® §C0)He6S. let it be so. 27 0NV IB)BE YD, — G300 (Mo ) let us converse. Jin N0 S06 g, m ) 621910, —BVAId @ODOM 6121QUOS, let them do it 110. The root of the verb is used for the second person singular, when speaking to persons of a low class; as 19, Come. 619, Go. a10, Speak. 01] MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 73 Among persons of a higher grade the verbal noun is used for the second person singular; as, QId)®, Come. a\0d, Speak. MLaOIW)Bs, Help. This last form is sometimes used for the first person plural; as, ™9 O 19bs, let us go. When ™Mo is used for et the form is MMIo Mo 61063, let me go. To persons in the higher ranks of Society, a great variety of other expressions, considered more respectful, are in general use; as, the Ist. a)C6mDIRy:, Be pleased to speak ; 6119028y, Go if you please. "@91 This form is compounded of the past participle with the particle @@ e3o. It is chiefly used in native writings, thus from the Ramayana. ag) HMICMHAETEMNO®OM @006 2 1) 98 Jo. Be pleased to say what is wanted. 2nd. 6010 QIEeg. Let rme or us) go; lit: let me or us go, and come. OIS Chiefly used by equals or by inferiors to superiors. This 3rd. ©&I %, or OBISB IV VWOV, It is well ; It were well. are This mode of expression is used by inferiors to superiors when respect- by fully requesting permission to do any thing, and is equivalent to let do if you please; as, 6D VD 2 1QY 9T EBIBHIWN@V. Allow me to do that. The same form is frequently used to desire, beseech, or advise ; as, ®ICH (NIOG ALICMITH B8 Jo or BdI8HI N B, ders I desire, or beseech you to come to-morrom. m, Ml@sde oM IOM &:Ala) allalelapod 680 @YY I recommend you to consider that matter. 4th. In addressing the Deity, there is a precative form made by drop- ping ©0 of the present indicative, and adding ageMeQ ;21 as from NV OIN | BV YR, fo assist ; comes NVANIN |6 HHEME @, pray help. il V@3S BV @Vgjo EONMN EVE@IVchn MO YN YA, hen Give us this day our daily bread. 21 For the origin of this form, see the defective verb @a16mo para 126, sec. 1. L l&f4 A GRAMMAR OF THE il 5th. There is another form of the precative, made by the help of @.’)(2 fol which may be said to have a future progressive meaning; as, OO LB RVRES (MIBe agBMERe NYBEne |50 \[2 02O or (VY@ INE 2L SRIOINEHE N D, thy May thy holy nam;e be blessed for ever., 6Y0)G NS Y 4 O gosalstem emto may allallEeMQYes © BN @DD NPT 60 ABRABICIOBEM O 78 fa y we be continually under the protection of thy good providence. th 6th. In requesting assistance from superiors the common form is O 1T Q09 Q/ 16186677 0 5 though (MU0 Q 1B EEM G is frequently used: as, Ds @EEIH M) 6. Y6 or G500 B @B QEERORIR LN or 6Ya_ CQJ) MO EMO. Sir, be pleased to do that for me, or us. ‘When the form made with ag)6™c is used by superiors to inferiors, it at is strictly imperative; as, (1) MNFB3E0e GRS 61a I8 dHMo. Go, or you must go thither. 113 The second person plural is formed from active, and in a few cases, from neuter verbs whose present tense ends in #60v2, by dropping £6:(Yv0, and adding ;__\.(YD In most neuter verbs and their efficients, togetber with verbs, whose present tense does not terminate in 630, by drofiping o ; and adding aflob. If the present tense end in Qyone, the qjorve is dropped; if with @ 0rve, QQOYYo 1s cut off and oLrvb added. If the termination be B6(Y¥o, B0 is dropped and g- v added; as, Present. 6 N0 60V, fo love, @U}%qflgflf]fl{). 7 2 60 BETY, to sit, 600 E 1o, 2 @B, N. to dissolve, O, » to melt, @I QTIOD. HTHEYTO, A 29 ag) 6Y YO (Y'Y 9 to count, a 6Y V0 agepaiod. aoaob. 92 a_0OXYO, to say, 6.2 o, 29 6.0 QI e, to do, 99 a_10B6 (D, to dwell, o_\og‘j'](Yb; Exception. 7 I (YYD, to see, £H06MB)0v. INDEFIN ITE MOOD. 112. There is no regular form to correspond to the English potential MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 75 mood: its place being supplied in a way that will be exhibited by the 00, following examples; as, 29 1st. Abidity, or power, is expressed by the help of @™o added to any verbal noun, or coalescing with a verb, as before explained: it requires the dative case of a noun; as, 6 5 Y eOMdn NVa0IN N B0Qo @We. I can /z‘dpa M a@s3deds la_98:90. You can go. ence This tense is also formed by the help of the verb « $/Q)~, which is the future tense of the verb & vz, to be able ; but used in this sense it requires the principal verb to be in the infinitive and the noun in the a5, A Dative, as in the former case; thus, Jo olaalr:L) CY\J(LODQ)fl%:iO(Yb BRQo. I can help. 2nd. Possibility, is denoted by the adverb a1&0&™ perhaps, placed %fi at the head of a sentence, or by @@ @) 60, added to the verbal noun, or to the past or future tense of the principal verb; as, ner BN agy P ®BHVINN 0B, Perhaps he is writing. few @Y ABON GoANES §6NEIN IO]B6o. Perhaps that medicine is there ; or that medicine may be there. ping ents, oy 63&_3'\‘%}@9@ 0860, It may rain. 0, by ard. Duty, or obligation is expressed thus, rfi?. ) VA0 IV 6 e R @ I B (VYe, 2 ded N0V 1818 ZOM @) )83 N, a quflomflgj (Y33 ™I B3 (Y Y0, Should or ought to kelp. CVA0IN )6 B6:6NBM® I (BN, V0N 1o {908 @O (BN, 4th Would have is expressed by the help of the particle ag)®M; affixed to past participles; as, @IOD (N LINIV @D agsl@d G mMEs o Q0o 8.2 |eN. If you had been good he would have helped you. MID 0@ BVOIETT 0g8HITD @OIOMIS &BOS ) [ deestl Qe M. If I had known this I would have gone with him. S e RS = Seethe V(V]efectivre ;réfbs on this subject, mifli % 76 A GRAMMAR OF THE The same meaning is also expressed by adding @Y1 to the future tense of a principal verb; thus, i M ©p191288 1NV BN agedlad @oaltd @D § CY5 1IN OBTNTD NN @B B3I BT, If you had becin diligent he would have put you into that office. 5th. agsss@bd, added to any tense of the indicative mood, corresponds the din to the English subjunctive mood with #f ; as, 6D CVAOIN BB agsesl@d, If I kelp. 18] @OAINh (U090 “@86:}(6107 If he helped. @D ONVA0IN | EE 6865 @D, If he will help. INFINITIVE MOOD. 113. The rules, for the formation of this mood, are the same as those given for the formation of the second person plural of the imperative; except that instead of adding 3:\70‘5 or ailom; 8____\9(% or Q20 must be written; as, PRESENT. INFINITIVE. lik; 60N adlBE 1o, @a\%ofl&__\arvbo gO\' 60 Gleey o, 60®@) &__\onb. per O TRV, O@ IO, O @ HEYYD, o B0, ag)5R e, Ag)ER QLI OYY. cef aIOQYD, a0 920 el; .01V, amggoorb Q1086 a_.xt)g‘z\onb par Pl Exceptions. BV, 967290 OB, @ 02, The following forms of the infinitive, signifying purpose, are in com- mon use, Va0IN a3V g, \I In order to, or fo} the VA0 IW ] B EBETEYY @ (M, CNVa0IVNBEHNZ M@EIMIN S, 5 purpose of assisting. PARTICIPLES. 114. Besides what has already been written on this subject, (see para 66 and 67.) it is to be observed that the relative and verbal participles are formed alike. % = MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 7 { ) {h 115. The present is formed by removing the final 6 from the present indicative; as, § Present Indicative, (Va0 B0, Present Participle, 0r)a0IQ)e60M. 116. The past is made by removing the final § from the past tense of onds the indicative, when the verbs end in ©. If the verb end in 6D by ad- ding Q ; except when 69 is preceded by @, in which case the participle is made by removing the final 6 ; as, Past TENSE. Past PARTICIPLE. VNI ] o, mn,c,ocqfl%. 6.0 192]1, @mm%fimj. those [T GIYAR a0, tive; 117 Participles present cannot be used as verbal participles. must Past participles may be used either as verbal or relative. 118. Verbal participles cannot be used as adjectives, or substantives, like the English participles: They invariably require the addition of a governing noun or pronoun, and final verb in order to distinguish number, person, and tense; as, 6MIND QAN 675, I came and saw : 1it. T having come, saw. 119. Participles are here called relative, because when placed in a certain position in the sentence they convey the power of the English relative pronouns, who, which, that ; besides retaining the meaning of the participle. They can precede no verbs, but are followed by nouns, or pronouns with which they agree as adjectives; thus, ONVoMVIB BN & a @ @D. The child who is speaking. 2100 alYD. The cow which died ; or the dead cow. VERBAL NOUNS? com- 120. Verbal nouns are of two kinds, abstract and personal. T flrlt’ 1st. VERBAL ABSTRACT NOUN. 10 VAN INV ) Po. A /zelping. @D 0210 1Bo BBOOBn BOAINd oo G@DEOMIS ONUoMUIR) L. : Pflm He spake to this person in the audience of all. ciples 2 See para 58, Rules 11 and 12, on the formation of these nouns. A GRAMMAR OF THE 2nd. PERSONAL NOUNS. Va0 BB MO, 4 man helping. 00NN QIde, A woman helping. NVAOIV BN @, That 7v/';ic]z 18 ]zelping. participles Wt eeomald, They who are helping. MU0 )esoMmal, They which are /zelpz'-:'zg, He who helped. a0V 2o, Wa0IN .2 jaide, She who helped. ML ) @, It that helped. particiy les crVa090N 2 jald, They who kelped. N Formed with past Formed with present Va0 o, They which helped. There is no regular form to express future time, by words of the above description; this is supplied in a variety of ways; as, 009 g| Ob 60 Glencmalcd, He who is to help. I (YUQOD@flgjorvb o @ssomalot, He who intends to help. Nouns made with the above forms cannot follow a genitive; because, though used as substantives, they retain the power of the verb from which they are derived. Paradigm of a Verb Active, whose present ends in HOD. InpIcaTivE Moob. Present tense. emID &e. CrVAOIVN BB, I &c. assist. i Past Tense. 72 29 22 assisted. . ma_mw')%i, Past Imperfect. 0NV A0V ) BRI T@ONY, ? 39 y Was assisting. 7§ 000 261678l 0N, ¢ Perfect Tense. 9 oY Y2 =2 3 2 have assisted. %9 C\"\— QDJCQ,”Q | % MALAYALIM LANGI}AGE. 79 Present Perfect. ~ emIOD, &e. MVAOIWV) 2 13166 O, I &c. have assisted. Pluperfect Tense. ovaosNallgenellimone, ) 32 7 crvaos @ e, ¢ > had assisted. Future Tense. 2 { V00N BB, ? will assist 7 Va0 @0, 577 7 ImpeErRATIVE Moob. First and third person 2 UANI ) B S Let me assist. singular and plural. S Second person singular. VA0S B, Assist thou. ? oL plural. VA0 9IN) \o):jr?(YJD, Assist you. Precative 1lst Form. ahove Va0IVEBa O, ) o) 2nd 2 V09I 16Be6™M ., S Assist me, or us, Form of command VOIS OB06 N6, Assist, must assist, 571) and obligation. $ InpEriNiTE Moob. U’A“\P which FEOMIHH (NVAOINT 1 HnIo, { I can assist. 2 Va0 a0 BA G, $ » VNI 16) dit BN @ 9 (Y Ve, Y Should or ought 2 mammfl(ojoma@@“mocegm@, S lo assist. A 2 MLADIN | BENENE N @IV B, Should or 2% mmaw‘)gjom@@mw i@, ought to have 2 ? VAOIN 16 PRENE RN (v, assisted. Indefinite time - 2 MNVEOINVS 1826 mM, ? ? Would have assisted. NV 0I EHE2 Q@ , L6YD)D b CrVA0INT BN agssdlad, If T assist. INFiNITIVE MooDp. To assist. il '/," L0/ e arvh, PaArTiCIPLES. Present. QS YoLINIIF:IoYa'a 0N A ssisting ofl Past. CVRNIW )2, Assisted, 80 A GRAMMAR OF THE VERBAL NOUNS. Abstract neuter noun. VNIV B8, An assisting. Personal nouns present. LA0IR) BB OI, &e. He &c. assisting. He &c.whoassisted 2? 2 past. V02 ajnlnD, 2 Paradigm of a Verb Intransitive, whose present ends in $ON. INDICATIVE Moop. Present tense. 620, &e. 6350, I &c. run. Past tense. 6:3S), 2 2 ran. b2 29 Past imperfect. B SBHRIV BN, mas running. k2] 99 b b 635)6)B06r5l @ (Y, § have run. Perfect tense. @é‘.gw 9 99 de Present perfect. &SN HN, ) 29 have run. 2SigMmeQ@om, ) 22 had run. Pluperfect tense. 5/7 Q &s! W@, b 29 will run. Future tense, 65.‘507——63590, IMpPERATIVE Moob. First and third person z 656g, Let me, §c. run. ns¢ singular and plural. b am Second person singular. 63S,—635d, Run thou. aj) 2 ” plural. BSailon, Run you. L) Precative 1st Form. 865ssMeR, Pray run. 95 2 2nd kb B6S6Mo, 2?2 Run. @ Form of command 636)S6Y Mo, Run, must run ) § and obligation. fimg InpDEFINITE MooOD. () Can run. 5%, —B SO B Qo (Y Nl RESMEOM @I, ) Mg Should or ought to run. 6 5QINIED MIH O, § &S 656NN I (BT, C@'SJ Should or ought to have run J 850108pmIV BN, 4y | BeSenE NG, S their: Indefinite time asleam, Would have run. Whe, B S0 @ N, 0w | If run. \'f)s@é Lasom agesia, &m MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 81 InrFiniTIVE MoOOD. B5Q100, To run. fiing. ParTicipLES. isted Present. 30, Running. Past. Run. &SI, VErBaL Nouns. Abstract neuter noun. S b, A runming. Personal nouns present. 635%0..!.'7\‘7, He nho runs. 2 22 past. & S\QUalnb, He who ran. 0, CAUSAL VERBS. 121 English compound verbs; as, fo mate to do ; to cause to assist; &c. are in the Malayalim language expressed by one word; as, to cause to assist. V0IW g lBs v, FORMATION OF CAUSAL VERBS. 122. Causal verbs are formed; thus, Ist Verbs whose present indicative ends in (Y¥o are made Causal by inserting g:p before the 66} ; as, O\ a0 B8, to love. e rRaCla |88, fo make to love. a2 NG @0, to laugh. Q_Jq@\ q‘fifi)_:( ¥ ’E') to cause to laugh. to hear. to cause to hear. 6) B>V BE (Y TR, Odn0c o {60, to clothe another, OSHRM, to clothe oneself. Qg()o___flcfi&m, @S 880, to beat. to cause to beat. msflgj%%smrc, Exceptions. QlabI-A e R to be defeated. ©®g (1B YR, to defeat. 0GB, to sit. el e to cause to sit. 0, O, to stand. oo orre, to cause to stand. to walk. NSH R, (Y S H6 (YYD, to conduct.** &S B6L (1T, to pass. HSTB YD, to cause to pass. to lie down. to cause tolie down. & SHE, (TR, & SO il S L Sy il 24 Transitive verbs, in the above examples, are considered as the causals of their corresponding Intransitives because many verbs have but two forms: where there are three, the rules for the formation of the causalis, will show how they are made, so that no mistake can occur; thus in the example MsABW; {9 conduct ; the third rule teaches that verbs ending in @@on, drog 2o and take @#um for the causal; as WSEWIL:0, {0 cquse to conduct. M 32 . A GRAMMAR OF THE 2nd. Verbs whose present indicative ends in 93070, or G830YY2, change them into £ ; as, il BT 0¥V, to be. @B, lo make. PR, to flow. 614 HEOTD, to cause to flow. to sink. to make sink. QEZYY0, BB, to descend. 60 0@30M, 6D C HELOM, to bn’ng down. 3rd. If the present indicative ends in Qorve, QO?, @O, sdnfi’o or (rvovo; the §ON is dropped and 0B added; as, 1Oy orn, to say. aICQRI BV, to cause to speak. 62 Q, to do. 602.1Q) B6.0Y0. to cause to do. & OrpONe, to burn. B OOV B6- (Y, Lo make to burn. 61,0840, to kull. 6 £ :)gflce( O, to cause to kill, @O0, to sew ©OM)B6, 0, to make to sew. € Exceptions. OO, to eat. RNOQOMD, fo feed. omonQyone, to be wet. OO Qa2 to make wet. O QO to befull. (\V/ %(YYO, to_fill. @0 QY to be grozmd Z @0BD HE YYD, to grind. HHIQY TR, to boul. to make boil. cfifi)%m, 4th. If the termination (@ of the present indicative be preceded by ©, the O is doubled. If by @ the letter is changed into (') and placed over &% or @o>; as, 29Q0Y, to move. 290Q M, {o remove. to ascend. HOOQON, BHEOOQN, to raise up. 181 6 2. @O, to be joined. 6).0_ 16y (Y2, to put togetker. a0t 6.2 @M, to leak. 6.2 19661 (Y Y0, to make to leak. thy to be awake. to awaken. 9EM @O, 9o @i, o HMION, {o pour, 8.0 (YYD, to make to pour. Exceptions. @ @YY, to give. ORI B6: (Y0, to cause to give. 61a_1QO, tobring forth. &0 186y (Yv0, to cause to bring forth to come. to cause to come. Q@ O, QI @DV, 5th. If the termination ©(rvo be preceded by S, that letter is doubled, or 90 &6:(0 added to it. If by @, the @ is changed into . If by o, MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 83 nge 6" is changed into g, or A #o. If by e, these letters are changed into S, and the preceding vowel made long; as, to wither. Q50N Q25 1, {o cause to mit/zér. to cause to assemble, &K, to assemble. $H G, @95, to sing. a_19S]HR 0, to make to sing. CoMVES AR (o toleap, jump. 2 12S)H6\ VY0, {0 cause to leapo to be dark. to darken. @i@%ma, O 5, @S Yo, to roll. DB, to make roll. &95:'%, Sto shew, to make I (YYD, B6 ] B, 1 see to eat rice. SO OY? 9050, to cause to eat rise. Exceptions. All verbs, made with a noun and the particle 6a_150rv2, make their causals by inserting @, between $ and (Yvo; as, BWea 1S, to fear. B WO GODONY, o cause to fear. uih, M [Dlaac be preceded by & ; @, is placed beneath it; as, to be low. @I O, ®IL_OY, to bring down, to humble. adigom, tofall. O_?\i%(m, to make fall. There are a few Anomalies; as, m@;&‘!ma, to be distant. GOBHCQOM, to remove. ded &')27_3%, to boil. 9.2 [1BR0M, to cause to boil. and PASSIVE VERBS. 123. The passive verb, which is not in common use in this language, is formed by taking away the final 9o from the indicative present of active and neuter verbs, and adding 6. $0vo for the present, &g for the past, and “ 9. for the future; as, AcTIVE. PassivE. Present. Va0 B0, WQO.’)G)P&&@&@W, am assisted, Past. mmoc‘ofl_ozl, was assisted, Va0V B0 S, Future. 00090 E6) 0. (‘fi)@?@’)c&&@&fi, will be assisted, pih NEUTER. Passive. Present. #2600, am seen., &,QSY_Y)@(I):—J‘%( Y 'a, Past. dh6VYg, BHIEMNO S, was seen. )19d; Future. &26™o, will be seen. ™) FhIirn @g:j é\@, 2M 84 A GRAMMAR OF THE All passive verbs are formed alike, and conjugated like the active voice All verbs whose present tense does not end in £6(vvo make their passive like I ON0; but this form is similar to that of neuter verbs made with a noun and &g |$0o; as, @it Vs St o ovve, He grieves ; @0 QIO m%awcm He is beaten. As this is hkelv to confuse beginners, I here subjoin a list of the above kind of passive verbs that are in most common use @LJE oSOV, To be beaten @oewgh o h ARALH 29 ., beaten, as a drum 050800 SOV Yo 27 2?2 bought a{$0rvo 2 27 burned SMNDO) %( Y'YO 2 ? Glown, as a horn Q-0 DE s (M 29 brought up boiled A PE@36a 150N 2 Q_DG@G@gj 2 bought, obtained SpWea s 2 2 cast anay cut GQJ%ED(%:‘ oo 2 29 22 counted ag e 6a v, 2 covered Q= Va4 gV )) 22 cut 62 O Oa|S 22 27 copied. o) A Bla| = O, 6o Qea SO 2 2 done, made D6 Ve Bra_|< O 27 defiled 2? 2 dramn. as water. 6100 60| SO 6 BB o SO, 2 22 eng? aved. (6} Wfi@Hv 2 22 eaten Q- 10oE a5 29 27 fan ned Q06 |50, 29 gathered, as sand, paddy, dirt, &c Q_étfdn O.:\” 2 29 gilt, rubbed over with anything ®Q6 a0 k) » glven o o 9 5 groped B £ 62O b s Joined @00 QWoa. $OM bbl ,, known Qs* (fjv 2 ,» knocked QU061 {$M, b ,, kissed Q&J%_M@gj;m 29 s lighted MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 85 olce, b 29 lengthened. Algha g, b left, let go. thelr Qiis _-“E)):i%( Y3, 29 kb pulled, drawn. uter gU0ag 5™, 2 29 put 3 @S@&jémfé, 2 29 planted. IS 1§ M5®&_j§m, QL Oa iSO, 2% 22 praised. d of el 06250, 22 kY] poured. 6162, 60860086 a5, 99 received. foRIOIEE-TogTN 2 v 7 raised, 6B IQ N SO, 2 reaped. 2BW1seg 50, 25 sealed. et ” 2 spoken. slain. 6L 160 | S, 3 2 (Gfl(OQQ);gflg(YYo ? 2 sought. @@Sag:lg”m7 § Qii(‘@)@q}.—j§mc,? 2 scratched. 2 a5 e 22 shot, with an arrow. n.@(%bfigflf;‘;( YYo, 29 2 spit. Dg-iPgfs0. 29 29 spread. @ DO 6| $O, Q. Npasee |50e, 2 swallowed. 2 I® 625, 2 22 scattered, DY g |5, 2 99 thrust. out. wowmb‘sm, 29 29 told, said. aflmey g0, 27 7 torn. 6 HZOa 5, 22 99 tied. GW@OSO'EQ_-_“@NYO, 27 touched. ag) Sl Qeg | =, 2 2% thrown. turned. b ® /0o 50, by torn. rent. 10§ BHloMals0oM, 29 trodden. 210 flgealsom, 2 99 woven. 6\(*)(%6‘)8:!§(m, 29 written. ag PS5O, 2 2 2 29 withered. Q_.\QS@()__._Is'm, OF VERBS PERSONAL. 124. In poetical writings there are, sometimes, found a first and third 86 A GRAMMAR OF THE - person singular, and a third person plural, distinguished by the pronomi- g nal termination being affixed to the tenses, generally, of the Indicative thy Mood; thus, Present Tense. 6ICYD VO INT 1B HOMN YD, I assist. @DAI0h He assists. NVa0IR) BE MY, &0 VNI 1HEOMIVo, She assists. @0 id NLAO QY BEOMID, They assist. thy Past Tense. fot ORIl I assisted. VA0S 612 O, pl 1l (Gfb_arY{) He assisted. QAT YL NN Toi 8 lise VANV 21900, She assisted, @od MU0 )2 ]d, They assisted. Future Tense. 6mI0Yd I will assist. cVanr@Neg o, @D They mwill assist. Va0 )a{dd, N DEFECTIVE VERBS, Whe 125 Defective verbs are divided into two classes; the Affirmative and Negative. OF AFFIRMATIVE DEFECTIVE VERBS. den 1st. ®016MM.. This word conveys the idea of necessity : it is also used in an imperative sense and may be rendered must or ought. In the form- er case it requires the governing noun, or pronoun to be in the dative case; in the latter, it takes a nominative. YIS Mo. In its full shape is used in the present tense; as, Via 6{_3_(*3‘.@6) eQlI6eo, I want ; lit. It is necessary for me. 6 Q15vNe, in this shape, is also used, to connect words; thus, The conjunctive participle ©o, changed into Qo is affixed to verbal nouns, and 6 lsNa placed after the last verbal noun in the sentence, MALAYALIM LANGUAGE, 87 OInj- gives to all those words the force of verbs in the same tense as 61016 ; ive thus, oM IV NEQYo adPDBHQo HQAIEMo I must read and write. Mo HRBAIOE@D EYLIQ0RIT]BHRQYo OOV BOQ: BT VB BH6 QYo I M., We must honor, serve, and obey God. el e. Abbreviated to ag)s™o coalesces with all kinds of verbs; thus, 0 is removed from the present indicative and ng)6™c is affixed to the remaining letters of the verb. In this case the meaning of the principal verb and the tense of the auxiliary are united. This form is used indifferently with the last; as, ®IO 6o VilEe AlgeDd WM. 6.0 1Q156me629, eOMen NVa0INNB BN Mo, or CMVA0IVNBORYe BIAIo. You have certainly conferred much benefit upon me, you must, or be pleased to assist me hereafter. 3169300 ag)HMIS BHOS 6lalIV6Me. You must go with me. 2nd. ©ueME). This word is used in the same sense as 6 iMoo when prefixed to the verbs 60@1863(Y2, or sometimes QI VYo ; as, y and Present tense. 6 Q1621 1B B6 (Y Y,—& A6 E) QLI (YYD, Past kb 6) (L1675 ) I(T3 (YY3,—6) L I6VE) (Y., Future ” 6 16ME Q0! B630,—HAINE Ao, The only use of 60 GlBB¥VY2 and IV, in this connection, is to denote time. used o ®C® OVl OIeNEN BB e, I want it. (255 That is necessary for me. When ¢ither of the above forms unite with other verbs they are abbre- viated and used like ag)6™Mo; as, eI 68927180 S 19O BENEQICD, I was obliged to go to Cochin. 0B @Iy aiieno ) 9QINVM @O0 - G i) erbal OB (M1OL] 6 QIBo. All shall, ox must stand before the judgment seat of Christ. 88 A GRAMMAR OF THE There is another form of this verb made thus, 662673, When this is used correctly, an ng) must be inserted in one of the preceding words in the sentence; the meaning then is that the thing spoken of, is all that is required; as, oM Be @VEDmI alEMOd SN eNG. I only want JSwe fanams : or five fanams are enouglz. e IeNE), or ©Ql67e, has also a relative participle made thus, eaIeNEom, 6N B EH0m, ealenElai@or, &e. The first of these forms is in most common use, and when fhe neuter pronoun is affixed to it, the natives usually write it ©QI6NFQI®, or 662 1@ ; but these forms are low and incorrect; better thus, @ LId HAINEI® 621y wh He did what was necessary. ger 3rd. 6H6o. This word implying equality, or agreement, comes from the verb 628600, to be equal. or right. The past and future tenses only are in use : the future is commonly used for the present; as, GLIOh (IHOMIS BH6e. He s equal to you. lat (@@@_ @@_o 63 B 0. That and this are equal. ser @O0 6.2 QYH®ITD). He did what was right. @o® 63H6%o. That will suit. 4th. &), A verb implying absolute necessity. It has no variation and is seldom used alone. It follows a principal verb or participle in which, or in some previous word in the sentence, an og) must be inserted; A NALCERM T 2B 0 550 &Flay. A ring is absolutely necessary to a marriage. 5th. @), A verb implying power, or ability sufficient only for the performance of the thing spoken of. It is sometimes used alone, but most frequently coalesces with a principal verb. ag) must be inserted in one of the preceding words, as in the former instance: thus, EOMHe §OO®m GV I can only do this. 6HICD e EOAI@® MOIY. I can only give you this. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 89 thig OF NEGATIVE DEFECTIVE VERBS. ords Ist. &i6r=9, Is the negative of &»Q16Me. It is thus declined. all Present tense. Y QLINED. Past 9 6)QLINEIETVD Verbal participle. OQIMERIOD. Relative 29 OQIEIDYD. Verbal noun GNO_JWEO%. Personal ,, 6 INEI B, &c 61629 is used in its full shape like its affirmative 6 16Mo; thus, uter 60V 1Be OIS, I do not want. y O 61019 Qo NIYVIB HOQYo EIAIENE), Neither go, nor speak. 2nd. 6 16Mz9. Shortened to ng)6"89 is joined to other verbs; and when under either form it is used imperatively it conveys the sense of a gentle prohibition; as, A CVANIV B BB, Do not assist, o Nassdo BN, Do not come. only 6ME@=00 60965 ? 6QI6ME), Let us go? do not go. 3rd. ¢og!, and @ogl. The former is the negative of ©6ng: the latter of &Y &:. (See para 89 on 9612 and @YEH:M.) v as- serts, and 6944 denies the existence of a thing: @@eE;0M affirms, and @02] denies its attributes or qualities; thus, @I @eailes §66mes? s ke there? 60al, No. Hon £0¥ 10 B0j0 G890}, 6 9673 i SIOTSIWINS) & SHERN. ¢ I 1 am starving for want of money. tedl OWID LLMAIIND BVRJIPY, O1BI6NE 200, ageom I3 E6Y . Because I am not rich men will despise me. Is it so2 No. m@&m(ao @ OV LII ¢ @ogl. r the 6084 and @¥0L] are thus declined. hut Present tense. @&,—m% d 10 Past bkl 69 2106100y, —@0L 16105y, Verbal participle. 60876 ®,—E0LJIO®. Present relative participle. 60284000, —@0L1®a). Past 7 99 @%QM,—@G%‘)M, Abstract verbal noun. 6219y, —@DL 9Qy,. Personal 22 92 608490010, — @02 OOND, ¢ N 90 A GRAMMAR OF THE th 604 joined to affirmative verbs renders them negative: it is used with al all parts of the verb, except the Imperative and Infinitive Moods, and the Participles. The negative is made with 808 by omitting the last vowel of the principal verb and adding 60&]. If the past tense end in 69, a Q) 1s inserted; as, AFFIRMATIVES. NEGATIVES. o) Present tense. A0 | Be 0T, VOO o@ftoesswfl% ba) 27 AEEZOND, sz riled. (orvacI)) 2, Vaor0Naflaly. Q&3 o\ PNaOe) Qi)flélo‘,. MU0 ) in ;:Lzfl oach Q0 L =Y-XE 2683 iS) &S [a) ye Qesiigene, 2 oNUa0I) 9?1 @ 06 rvansR ) 2 dles0m, { rx’vflg& R @3l 1d1es o, Qe Gl b6y ey Past tenses. - ) CV0IN] 215659 rmo.oomj*%“:%mgo @Yo, oM lgJ. g § aadlgensI0i1m R @3goNeI 1B, 5 aSlToLINNIEW] (- Yoo'eY Va0 2 N@mone, ¢ §\+ L Aesif i@, e AR 1828) -58 18 The negative future is formed by adding @/} to the verbal noun; as, Verbal noun 0rvva02Q/)@s. Negative futare m)&u‘iochfifi\mj)g%n 9 b2 Q(‘s@%(&'a D 2 QeezHilal. @£, joined to the future tense ef verbs, is used by inferiors in the gense of a Negative precative: in this case, the two last letters of the verb and the first of the affix are removed; an ag) is prefixed to & and beth § are annexed to the principal verb; as, f @o® 6.21968). Do not do that. @Q_}f)&-agd. Pray do not go. i} €1 4th. @@ @. This word conveys the foree of a strong prohibition; as ? Ix Must not. It is usually affixed to the future tense of a principal verb pa a( it MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 91 mith thus, the two last letters of the verb and the first of the affix are removed, the and the remaining letters joined; as, wel Future Affirmative. Future Negative. /}1 [SLMICIe A E: ST [OLIG) 2 N @, Must not injure. 6al) 0. o lIH @, Must not go. Sometimes @@ @ is added, without alteration, to verbal nouns like Q6 Mo ; thus, T 2 816G BT, Must not z7g] ure, 6)a19dh QY DT . Must not go. From @o@ @, is made the negative participle @@ maavo, ; which, in construction, is used indefinitely;* the time being marked by the final verb; as, @IS H2IQYB®ICT® 62101, He is doing what he ought not to do. ol @RI )2 IQYB@ICO® 61210 ) He did what he ought not to do. @I 6).2_1QY T @) I GY0 @) 61210155z, He hath done what ke ought not to have done. @D 6.2 IQYB®ICND .21 . -— = He will do what he ought not to do. There is a past form made thus 62 1)@ @I6oD, but it is very seldom ased. a5 5th. aladlw), 62z, Cannot. €24] seldom undergoes any change. The former has Present tense. QlaOl Q. Past 2 1ROl 6vovy, he Verbal participle. QO VIOD. b Present relative participle. Q100 IVITYD. th Past 29 ” Q1000 I6V0VD). % Such indeed is the case with all negative relative participles ending in o ; but as there are negative forms of the past participle made to end in @, and as the negative ending in o™, often corresponds, in b point of time. to the affirmative ending in ™, called the present relative participle; I have thought it would be less perplexing to heginners to 1b adopt that name all through the grammar, for this form of the negative relative participle, N ) st 92 A GRAMMAR OF THE Both words follow the infinitive mood of verbs, and require the govern~ ing noun to be in the Dative case; as, Q( [ €00 (Y\JG_OOCQ)C)%;_P(Y\) AlaOlQ. I cannot assist. OB ©1al2Ih e2el. I cannot go. In common conversation the principal verb is often omitted; as, Ma@3dods QladIo. You cannot. They cannot. @O IEn DL 6th. &@oe;cw’)gd. The negative future of the verb &H$lQom; (®ee para 112, section lst.) This form is used in the same way, and with the same meaning as the last; thus, oM@ I &Fls w0 al. I cannot come. 7th. & S). To be unable. 'This word comes from the verb £ S0, to join. It is sometimes used alone, as in the case of QlaOI®!: but, in general; it follows the simple past tense of a principal verb, and if not used imperatively, requires a Dative of the person. It is often used for one of the last forms, but its proper signification is to convey a sense of moral inability, or to show the great moral impro- priety of doing any particular action; as, for ML Q)(‘v‘oo%_\j(YY‘) @) RIS BTYO @m%@so, al A good man cannot do that evil. Wl B0 agOho @2ajOM @0 S)2,i#: SO, nf I cannot strike my Father. ® Mg EQ B IMOW aloda)e |4 S0. You cannot break that command. Of the use of the letter ®® in the formation of negative verbs. of] 126. @ when used in the formation of negative verbs, takes the following forms. €n foll As the sign of the Past tense. V6T, 27 2? 2 ODOD. the » s Yerbal participle. 27 27 29 Present relative participle. &0 OV, ” 25 kbl Past kR 2 @Y0)6Y0Y0). 2?2 22 22 Verbal Noun. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 93 VeIl Affirmative verbs, in most of the tenses, become negative by removing &0 from the present indicative and adding @6 @ with the verb 69 ©l®663Yvo in the tense required; thus, Present. VA IV N EHIO D 6 OlHE (Y. Past. VNIV BB O\ OO, { VO E56 VD). Future. CNVa0IW8060@® OB HHo. m; VOIS 90IO® BB S. VNIV H096®m 690 Ho. the Imperative. NVa0I0) @996 ® §ORlg{1b. Na0IV N 8606® O 1OBHEMED. MLANIW Ee®m 6006 EnS Mo, Infinitive. m, 0Va0IB026m 6B ajo0rd. mn Verbal participle. VNIV ) B0 D). 10t Present relative participle. cr0a09 ) 800D, Past 2 5y ONVQOIN ) H6)260VD. 1 ‘iS Verbal Noun. Va0IN B09 QY. Pl'O' There is sometimes a slight difference of meaning between the negatives formed with 698] and &6 @((flfiG o, when used in the indicative and indefinite moods, which can only be distinguished by practice. But whether negative verbs be formed by 60 8] or (L)l @(O\oe&m, the infinitive®® and imperative moods must be formed by @6 @ @(6}0&&%0 VERBS OF INTENSITY. 127. There are a few verbs, in common use, that are placed after others for the purpose of adding beauty to an expression, and to strength- the en the sentences with which they are connected. Verbs of this description follow past participles, or the past tense of the principal verb, and mark the tense of the verb required; as, 1st. 63,986 (VYo present, HBHIENG past, OB o fature, fo buy. £ 26 There is a form of the negative infinitive made thus, Me0i@imogpabd, SR ; but this is nearly obsolete. 94 A GRAMMAR OF THE This verb, used singly, is confined to its primitive signification, but el when added to a principal word it sometimes answers to our words am, dan ing ; though in general it is merely intensive; as, @D BV HQILL 0g)FTDOI8H N He is doing that work. emICh Ileo AAINE®mIQe 001203, 1Ise I mall teach you every day. o 6WEIOH QBN 216HIEHEMNO . Pray save us. eXp 2nd. HPQOYO present, £hg 60T past, @ QYo future, o cast away. When used with a principal verb it signifies umay, out; denoting completeness; as, whi @OAIOD BOAIOM )@ QYOMo. He pushes him out. @old @om QS| §ETT. They covered it up completely. ®OOIMD @OALL6Y @VSH: S W o. He will drive her away. 3rd. cfflsce@,(wb, to lie down. When added to other verbs, it is merely intensive. to] verl It is seldom used in this sense, except in the present tense, and requires perf neuter verbs; as, It is written. iS (¢ ag)$®) ] S B YV, oo Qe HOIBISHR Y. This cloth is torn. 4th. ®@BOMR, OHISEEMN?, fo give. Whether these are used as principal, or auxiliary verbs; the first form must always be employed with reference to the first and second person; and the latter when speak- ing to, or of the third person. Added to principal verbs they are merely intensive; as, @At eolse 62198 )M, He is teaching me. eMICD BRI @2® 62106 BIFTD). I did that for him. 6MIOh NS BHIS M- I will shew you. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 95 , but 5th. 61a_190rv0 present, 60190 past, Ha_19d0 future, fo go. When any used with principal verbs it denotes completeness: sometimes it is redun- dant; as, NCEODAa 190, Quite wet. MERYHS BBIO 215090, My horse is dead. 6th. &.01Q} "> present, @Q_lQ‘%é past, ©2.1Q)c future, fo do. When used singly this verb retains its primary signification, as emach @) ) 6 0 KLCUQ’ I did that. When connected with verbal nouns, as before HD(I‘% explained, it has two distinct uses; First, it is elegantly placed at the close of one, or more sentences, to ting which it adds much force and beauty; as, @2l flg) 685 GGG 6 2.1Qe. He heard the call and is coming. @0 LI AICMIB 6I0h GV CV0IRN EnWYye 6.2.1Q)s- If they come I will assist them. @oQID QI BRI aIOEDWS GlatIdhQlo .o 0 They came, reported the matter, and went amay. erely Second, it is used as a connecting verb. In this sense it is often made to link verbs together indiscriminately; but its proper use, as a connecting verb, is to join two or more words expressive of different actions that are ires performed at the same time. The following examples will show how it is commonly used in both ways. @olh 2 NBleeQje a19SHWY- 6.2.1Qjrvo, He is laughing, and singing. a @D @D aEnY o BEROLLSHYo 0210y oyed They desired and feared. eake & 120100 H0la] @VRDiIBOQo HBIENGING § ol X pQYe 6of) 62213ad HeBLIGH OO Baimes Elod (B0 O SHOWY, 612 109TH 3 © &Y 062 So. If you repent of sin, forsake evil, and walk henceforth accofding to the commands of God you will be saved. ADJECTIVES. 128. Adjectives in this language are not varied on account of gender, [ 96 A GRAMMAR OF THE number, or case; and with a few exceptions, are placed before the words ouf which they qualify; as, FLonaN gm)nt Wicked servant. el GV, Great elephant. 62101 0o, Small vessel. When the verb @01, in any of its variations, is used in a sen- tence, the adjective may be placed after the noun; but in that case, a Jec poun, or pronominal termination, corresponding to the preceding noun, ought to be affixed to the adjective; though this rule is not always observed. V) @(YCQ%QJ(YB (NEJNAICNI &M, That man is good 60D (ia) @O, NI, He is a good man. 6Y) This is bad. i >® 2o T LN, FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. pa 129. Besides words that are naturally adjectives; as, ONgJ, Good ; a8), many; &c., many nouns, under certain modifications, are used as adjectives; thus, Ist Many neuter nouns ending in o, drop that character, and the remainder of the word is used adjectively; thus, Month. QIO &6 Do), Monthly account. 29 Vo, 6Y21)dho, World. L1 HIYe, Worldly affair &8Bo, Falsehood. 2.@® =@, False piety. 6 VVRY o, Beauty. 63(“(\.}“003(9;) @‘7), Handsome woman. 9nd. Many nouns ending in o; take the participle 6 88 ;* as, VeI, Joy. CROODIN QD QAITDRAIM, Joyful news. Ve @Cfi)OQ_Jo, Wrath. ©&900)8® a:wa%wb, Angry man. High tree. me&;, Height. 900320 %@a, 27 Words formed with the help of ®o®22, are generally confounded with adjectives made by 2e# ; but this is not more common, than in- correct, such words, with the addition of a noun, or pronominal affix, being nouns of character, or quelity, and ought to be used as such. [ bave omitted the mention of them till treating ot the adjective made with 2 38, that the difference may be more readily seen: thus, the following phrase cannot be correctly applied to any merely human being, ®0 @tocgab M my@oYseaiod @& ;. but we can say, tey 90 MY RIQYeaaiMI®a®, which means, God s truth. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE, 97 vords 3rd. Nouns ending with a vowel, expressed or understood, are, with- out any change, used adjectively; as, Brass. Brazen vessel. a_flfia aila® ald®o, o, Rain. OF HIelo, Rainy weather. 6019, Mud. 6016 Y, M uddy pit. <f3>f§§?, Play. £6! 619 &.00, Play things. §en- 4th. Nouns ending in O or S, double these letters when used as ad- s, 4 jectives; thus, Joun, 6.910, Mire. 62100 &%), Miry pit. rved, @@O, River. BDVOC OIS, Raver water. adls, House. adlg &Yy, Household affairs. &9S, Jungle. 55 Bloo, Jungle country. 5th. Some nouns and adverbs are used adjectively by adding to them the particle ®@ven. In this case some of the words undergo a slight change; as, HIPIN2 60V o0d ; ol Py S, Last year. Last year’s festival. a 1@, used A0N\Jo, Month. QICVODTD B0, Monthly tax. Province, Cozmtrg/. ] the o coc, { } aBUeeEDY 2150, Country custom. 6;)63&0&963(5@ @6\3:1960, Now. { NVE»HSo, [ f } Present grievance. 6O 6) L6 Yesterda y's busi- enoMeAl, Yesterday. S B9, } ness. a16ME, g Q16 YS6) @YD) Ancient }zz'story L e Ancz'enll‘y. news. L @029, § 6th. Some nouns take @05@v», which is the past participle of the oS verb @0SHE N, to be near, to approackh : as 2 s Ea), FEarth. § Glloe @050 ) o 166 @YUBIIT Vo, thly comfort. § @A) Qi oM md@d SO BHIGe, I in- @O, Spirit. { } Spiritual things. fiifixi vThe mere adjective form may be applied to any one indifferently; as, have ©6BQIc MLDYPBBAUIMIROD, Glod is true. 9281 20’3%0{) L) G2 QI IH M, l’;jun s true. rase Nouns of this description may be frequently translated by what is oh ™ termed the English passive voice; thus, @R edialleeemizdh BWEHO@IWYSE AIMIG M. When he is angry he is to be dreqded. (0] 98 A GRAMMAR OF THE 7th. English adjectives and participles, when used adjectively may be rendered into Malayalim by the relative participle; as, 2 TREMN 66 @ @h, The smiling boy. 2dl o) aredy)n, The dead man. 8th. Negative adjectives are formed by adding the relative participle Ay, ort of 6044, @0 80 he past participle &S, to anoun; and prefixing the word so formed to the noun that is to be qualified; as, @O, Knowledge. @ocflnfigg:m@» & 00, Ignorant person. Truth. SaMoRer Ty Q¢ False affair. (YU(;D’))CJ, NI, Shame. NIEMs BHFIT, Shameless person. th OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE DEGREES. OF THE FORMATION OF THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE. 130. The comparative is formed thus, 1st. By the help of the particle &900 or B9, which is affixed to i the accusative case of nouns; or the ablative ending in (2“2(65, or 69 Rjlo is used without any adjunct. The person, or thing compared is put in the nominative, unless the final verb requires the dative case; as, @V BHBHISBROMMIOM B (IIMNEe MTBOMN® (N %@9083(\(‘16. It us betler to give it to you than to him. @A BOOALIEMNEHIDo MEJAIMIBOT. He is better than the other. oo RO VD OM B0 IS OVB® I This horse is whiter than that. @V Mo OBIAYe HROZBD MIE:M. That tree is higher than this. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 99 Inay These forms are sometimes qualified by particles; thus, @2IOd @ 6o AN GH00g @O o ODIRN 1 YR NN, He is wiser, lit. more wise, than his Children. 6 o136 OmIFIM@MIOMEnIte &G olSle al ciple B EE M@ gD QYo CNRIMI (1To? g the How much belter is it to worship a dog; than to bow to Idols 2 501, oo o (/3 @DBNANM BRIV ag)eO mfi@%a&ga&flg(&@arm, T'his cow is more excellent than that. son 2nd. Sometimes the comparative is formed by means of adverbs, or the particle 63 Doy affixed to the nominative or dative case of anoun; as, O® 6.2QY MBIOM aglO0s af)@e @SS IMON. It is easier to do.this. E00IOM ACOAIONIB o m@@'fl@fig\%e He hath less strength than the other. B OF THE FORMATION OF THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 131 The superlative is formed by the help of certain adverbs joined d to to words expressive of character, quality, dimensions, &c: as, ) B0 GO ag)O0QJe NOMIKYSD CPLNELIEE alIBEON. 1t 1 He dwells in the best place. MO390 ®OAIOYM @LA)C)."Q O_.l@: 6‘)&:95(6;@. The king gave him the best, lit. the chief, garment. BOICD @RI aglO0Ae @IS allaaRlen6ay S0 Hey Y. He is the least esteemed among them. @0 O HNEHT 000 e I NIWDIEBT. 1t us the greatest among trees. OF THE NUMERALS. 132. A double set of characters of the Cardinal Numbers are here 20 100 A GRAMMAR OF THE given; the first beifig the Common Malayalim form; the second a form introduced by Europeans. Common Malayalim New Form. Name orm. wae:*. 530YY) 65 ™ (ML) @06, @O ag)P. oS % 63 © 0 3 O Ot W W N = Yalo) a1@Yo, 10. EEt 2P 3O3R b b Do A @ BONIO 115 : Yo aJ(CeE. 12 A0 L o__xm?.a% TEL 13 WISI(.x Pal(og A 1@y 9. 14 6\ i) a®) a @@L, 15 AVM) LM A I@IONIO. 16 A)0) 09 A IO, 17 ::; 18 a0 A A IBIOMS. 0 PIsia() Yo' a e @IMml® 19 .0 @(6’)@_\@. 20 a0 Qa-\@. 30 m @0 40 Mo, O ®)o &M@, 50 M mo @PQLI® 60 S 50 (PHPUY) Q0 80 n@mm. o M IEYD O 90 of D00, (@O 100 o) Q.00 200 W a0 WO by ) M. 00 QO O. 300 or ranD R’ 00 NI 0. 400 ®)oo 500 @n (@@6%& @) 00 @VQMRO. 600 29 | 900. agPORO- 700 MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 101 forme (./00. ag)oY Yo O. 800 orboo. O®I%H 90 e, 900 L£000. @) 0o. 1000. Yo, L0000, @I N0 o. 10000. 3 Yo £00000. oI oes. 100000. JJNDH&Q £L000000. el (09 wo. 1000000. qygnafl ~£0000000. RONRYO IV o-B1BHIS) 10000000. 133. Fractions are written thus, QHeI@d. @Yo(. BIah. iu @VEVD I DD, QI 06YTI). AN ot QOl o el 2 N () 268I6vI). 16 AUy 3 RO 20 134. Ordinal numbers are formed by the addition of G®o or GO 6 @Yt to the Cardinal numbers; thus 630 ? one. B0OMI., or 630MI ATV, Sirst. ten. Q01D 0o, » 1O E @, tenth. Qo @, thirty. Qytflflflflo » Qe |mIa50D, thirtieth. hundred. B0, 090, » (ROIBE @YD, hundredth. @@, | thousand. | @@, ,, @Y IO @Y, | thousandth. 135 Adlverbs of order are formed by adding @®a@ to the Cardinal numbers; as, EOMIAD, JSirst. Q& EIQD, secondly. @omMIam, t/zirdly. ML, Sourthly, &e. 136. The Cardinal numbers with the exception of $3c one, the use § of which has already been pointed out, are used as nouns, or adjeetives; when as the latter, they are placed before their substantives and governed & by the same laws as other adjectives. As nouns, they are used absolutely, or placed after nouns and regularly declined; as, B0M o, One came. ®@?21QN@ s 610190/, T'wo of them went. @20 1@d EsElerho @21 elsemsiatiw). The legs of two of t(zem are broken. A GRAMMAR OF THE 102 ol 187. Our words, by pairs, by threes, &c. are usually expressed thus, @ for the masculine and feminine gender: but any noun may be placed after the numbers; as, 1l 0o o, Oor 6o 09IS, or C\‘-?@@OQQflC By paurs. 2 2 22 22 By threes. QRN e, omMoeeald, 2 29 2 29 By fours. b 2% 27 2 By fives. @oQemi eald, @O0 Haid, kb 25 2?2 By sixes. S01 2 R b)) 2? By sevens. a)e PP @:L;»(D(.‘, = 29 2 2 2 By eights. ag)o'g =S 6\0_.3&), 2 27 By nines. 6216 I A 6\.0__3&, e 22 7)) 2 1@ 1eD Gald, 27 29 By tens. The higher numbers are thus expressed. GG 6129 1S, or GVMITI® 6 1IN, By fifties, £e) » O® 6a0IRg, By liundreds. (RQAMPO B alIW'S, Our phrases at the rate of, or. so much to each ; if the sum be under nine, is rendered by repeating the number as above. All sums above eight may be expressed in two ways; as, oo o URBOVcdn cg@ alteMe aflMe 6HIGAD? O [ AR® @i6Mc, or OBWal®m OB l® al6Mo OBIFTD). At what rate did you buy, or did you givefor these cows? Zgave al the rate qf QOfanams each. MRS ORI 2IF6 GRMID @), or BRMIBMI® al6vNe 3 N D roeRYM29QIg 61dH0SOYD). 3 I gave fifty fanams to each of my Carpenters as a present. =4 The following forms are used for all genders, with the noun understood. =4 o063 or oo Rg or o@oEMIOEN2IN S, By pairs. 2 Q@%mqufl 5 29 2y 2 CON Y IS, Bythrees QQ%(YY) OOMNEL (NHOYM) 1 Py D ONOMOAL 2 nOMI239Q0)g es9)g, § By fours 0 i @7 QemHNg By fives. @0 Q)5m) ” eIV 1S 5 : O30 99 GTOICIVG By sixes. :i:. b By sevens 6) (Y SHIcaies 29 ag)BPLIN S ™ 92 By eights apS33 29 ag©53007g 63(}’1_).;7; 9 1 2muUIe) mIm ? By nines. 2 $ 2 §7 @Qls MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 103 thus, a1 Wa _\@Y0) I Da oIy, By tens. atter @GOMI@ A2 SO ) o™ S” g 2 By fifties. 'S, RO 2 MROMPHOIV'g 2 By hundreds. es, i ADVERBS, 138. Besides the adverbs that are naturally such;; as, & ales here, &c. some are formed from nouns by adding @ ®/1g to the nominative; as, £} 903, Steadfastness. Steadfastly. 90|00/, 6Y\J.JEJO, Strength. e 121090fg, Strongly. (Y\)@ Q, Truth. Truly. V@, Qs a_I®MI®0o, Sincerity. QAN AIV S, Sincerely. 7S'7 In a few cases adverbs are formed from nouns, by dropping the last let- ter of the noun and adding ag)ycn; as, reds. nder Qxl....‘ 9&}(;7 Craft. 9 196QM, Craftily. B1INo, oight Day. Bla_enmum, Daily. oOQlWNo, Quickness. 6\().,163(/)0’3, Quickly. e Mad The following list of words and phrases, of this class may prove use- OY0) full to beginners as a reference. veat 60 613900, Now. €010, 69 6la|2Po, And now, even now. S\’Y) 0 @080, Then. OOz {98:, BTO2IFo. And then, even then. When. ag)6210¢, -ood. n,g)@‘adf)éo, 0@638:\953@, And when, even when. Whenever. Qs ag) |05 995180, 10681 0@63&_—'1‘3%‘;, o@&&flfl%’o, n@%o G)a= 190, } Always. ours ag)OOMN B0, ag) MM B o, Always, for ever. 69 (3, 6D WYo, From this time. S e Mleadd, eurileanim, Henceforth. 166V, Formerly, in old time. {2 oSO, &SHHOM, Suddenly. pens O, U3)(@L)o, Quickly. g hs. AN NG, HMNEMo OBHINS nes SN 2IW IS, } In a moment, quickly. A GRAMMAR OF THE 104 allIPH 6mIQo0, Instant by instant, momentarily. @1 NPl ©@IQ0, Hour by hour, hourly. NI ®IQ o, Bl O®IQo, Day by day, daily. b QOEYE 6@ IQo, Yearly. 9 898D, In time past. At once. 6 (0)56:TD, At last. E 613G ey (A0 At first, at the beginning. ;:’f’_, ]9y 21 (@ Ao 6)dHIENS, In course of time, by degrees @7 HO0 QOml, Bogle FOm, A little while before, lately. Q5 ml, Before. '\_g\’ Afterwards. “(Dl alleom, @f GO Do, After that, afterwards, then. Immediately. @ sob, esob mem, @O HD DO LS, o) 6\@6\6‘1\3 6062], @/’X }By degrees, slowly. oo Neesl, o y2ibd&ieal, Very early, at dawn of day. (tN 0l N OIS BE e mlI0e, Early, just before sun rise. z At noon. (% 662,80, o VBT o) ONES, In the evening. At midnight. 010 a9 03Q), To-day. 00 a5 00 @M, That day. &6 MY, To-morrow. (LJ/\ 26000900, The day after to-morrow. = =) (( The next day, <. e. the day follow~ A e000mMods, ing any specified day. 33 = The day before, . e. the day be- B 62110, fore any specified day. :: { 60 M 612, : Y esterday. B) Al NeTmI T, The day befpre yesterday. (% Never. This form requires a nega= o SOBMIY o, tive verb, as; ) ) 6V 501D BBMIBa eatIdh ey, 1 will never go. () ealles, £, Here. By €IS Yo, And here, even here. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE 105 Hither. 800116S®o, Towards this. 65668303, 6o adlesmilom, Hence. 5": Do, On this side. m. (wo,) ‘On that side. @O 16S, GE3, There. @oai)6rs Yo, And there, even there. Towards that. ©OIES3IS, Thence. @0i1e SMIoM, agalles, Where. ag) 185 B0, ag)se3, ‘Whither. agya e soiom, Whence. ) Fo, Any where. 0g)EE3IBe, AIOEISTAD)o, Any where, some where. ag)@3aley, No where. Far B0, 360, 1660, Many. Very far. 0160 FOO, EOLOY, Within. a OO, Without. O2620S, 60213, Upwards. O DY, ODDD, Above and above, more and moré. OIS, PO Downwards. S, al 1609 Backwards. A JDO BH9 =90, o, Below. @ILONIZ, MIPATMIS, So much, so many. ¥ £, @D, So much, so many. ag)(©, How much, how many. )6 )OO, Much, more. D©6AYs, ag)O0s, ag)OOUe, Very much. Q_n@%(fi()]flzéc, Moreover, besides. @ (@Y 2L, Not only that, moreover. '4° ONO9 BN 9D, Clea‘rly,l evidently, truly. aJENINV G, Newly, lately. ]g@a almQils, Commonly. 6 Q16NGoQIMo, MAISartal, Well. P 106 ‘A GRAMMAR OF THE HOAH, Loudly. 6B Udo, About, for the most part. A little. OO, BO0OCR, @Vf o, 6|60, Separately. O IQaMm, Vainly. aMla, KOA .2, Together. yal al (Tl_jf} fi"\YE; oy Again. Sen 16, Perhaps. o108 o, Even. Mostly used in negative sentences; as, al { IO e D LGS AN Not even one. In affirmative sentences this word is best supplied by m&10vm); as, eI BB ®HOM OBIOM aible{lEs0m. Even nature teacheth this. od, In native writings 6a_192}- is placed at the end of a sentence to de- [ note uncertainty in the mind of the speaker; as, the @20_0h Qo H)a_198 0. It is said that he will come but I am not sure of it, ox he may come [D:¢ (i perhaps. st or ¢ m See 107 SYNTAX. 139. The arrangement of the different parts of speech, in the Mala- yalim language, is in many respects opposite to that in the English ; thus a noun precedes its governing particle, and a finite verb always closes a sentence. ative When relating any thing that has been said by a third person it is usu- al to repeat the words of the original speaker; as, 6ICD 61219 HQANM @VAICe aJOEDVY. She said she would go, lit. I will go. 6mE30o @A 6S 601N agit™M GDLD o 1OWYD, They said that they went there, lit. they s.aid we went there. 140. As to the mauner of using the different words, it is to be observ- ed, as a general rule, that in short sentences, the nominative case must de be placed first; all other parts of speech are to be arranged according to the relation they bear each other. 141 In the following concise rules, which are illustrated by suitable (Ome examples and idiomatick phrases, the agreement of words, and the con- struction of Malayalim sentences will be fully exhibited. SYNTAX OF NOUNS. OF NOUNS PUT IN APPOSITION. 142, When two nouns come together, one of which denotes the title or attribute of the other, they are rendered; thus, Ist The present or past participle of @7 8300 is affixed to the no- minative case of the first noun, which must be the attributive, and the second noun, in the case required, is added to the participle; as, OHBLIBI &M BT §O(a)dhI0o c&pfi%:l The Lord God commanded thus. S o“-g-:}"ce@mwmmow AN o, George the Teacher came. Qj‘%cfm\oasm 0N 0I®MIWY 6921621 B)aeR QY 6s cfi’)’)@'/}o. The business of the Cochin Dewan, the friend of the inhabitants. P2 108 A GRAMMAR OF THE 2nd. When there are more attributives than one, the Conjunctive ikl particle o must be added to each of them, and the participle affixed to the last, to which the other noun must be added as in the last case; as, ISIMONVOZIONO (NUBla{1@RMAIMB. My AMREY e Se B HANNEE,CIOIBRIY IO @D AP eN 6a19n )2 the Ramen the preserver of good men and destroyer of the Rachases went that way. In a few instances nouns are connected by the particle @0 ; as, I @O 6830 3 6GYILINTD, Durodanen the eldest son. 181 Sen 3rd. If many nouns come together, or if other words are placed be- cam [l tween the nouns, the form is sometimes as follows, 81 CVSBEIEBONDO Qo (EUARINIIN], TUBAL )RV E3NSYYe mvf OUBILIM 62 1QYOMAIMIW], @ECM el Ee M Al et @S @ HNMILIIVN D BE M AR Llo mgfimmooegm. God, the creator of all things, the searcher of all hearts, and l/?e preserver of those who put their trust in Him, is good. g to] This form is mostly confined to Native writings; in conversation they generally adhere to the former mode; as, CVBLITT A0 QYo MY T@IAYe MVUBDAL a)BRWE36S Qo HUBIWM 62 QM AINTe, DO OB M AUIGHS ©HXN®ILIAIN BHBAIe (NLIAIMIE:T. OF THE NOMINATIVE CASE. 143. The Nominative Case is placed in sentences: thus, 1st. 6®IOD a0, I say. Pres SN0 B, The horse ran. &) 6 aimad al$o, The child will fall. a8 ]} I ©12 106 HEMOOM BRI e 06T, He said that you must go. S L —— E: Many “ Enghsh -éd‘jectivéé, and particularly such as fol]ow—nouns, or are used emphatically, are rendered into Malayalim by the personal noun: and used as above; thus, waN@IMIW alowoIacd. Parashuramen the holy- 62y 10l 52 QB MRYAIMAIY 6 al®MIHEU@GEAIh. Charanamparumal the wise and good. 9 MO AW SN0 mfl@mm@ 06BQ10A. Almighty and Everlasting God. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 109 101 In long sentences it is better to place the nominative and accusative d to gases just before the final verb. as, 2nd. Two or more nominatives, of any gender and number, in one )R i e ! sentence are connected by the particle §o* being affixed to every one o them; as, h 03¢ A ) @A @’Wo&go 060 1mE3S o @oalles gare. T'he men, women, and children are there. If an action be simultaneously performed by two or more persons, HEOS isto be added to the last noun, or the meaning will not be clear; thusin the d be- sentence QI3)04o (YN @B IO, The Rajak and Brahmins came, the only thing certain is that the persons spoken of came; there Y [ is nothing to convey the idea that they came at the same time: whereas Nl MIZRIe (EJ0aREM o HHS I, implies that they came to- U gether. [ the Actions performed by a whole company; as by an army, &c. require af)5d2e, @I I@e, or 26)H), according to the nature of the sentence, they to be placpd after the last noun; as, @o0Id agLipa i aitm. They all came. G”? DO | Go &@n@d%gv_o @SDM & ag)afle 6351610 190 (YY) Men, Horses, and Elephants, all ran away. 2o BB BOBe QICA Sa 1)) (] The whole of the ink and water is dried up. 3rd. To point out a whole class of persons or things it is usual to ex- press the first or chief of the class only in the nominative and to add QB £100), @ S&IYes, or &PA), with a corresponding noun or pronoun, as before pointed out; thus, ®a0UEIEbeId QmanQ §6r)2UNaNtAId MIsRIaNemIs @@ GO o). The Tassildar and the rest of the officers reported it to the king. or ) nal BIZIMNE00 MLV BMEY 0g21%e @NOrToL: 6. The wild Elcp/zranls and other ¢ Beasts) eat up all the paddy. [ J * Nouns in all cases, are connected by this particle. ot 110 A GRAMMAR OF THE 4th. In neuter nouns, especially of inanimate objects, the nominative case is frequently used for the accusative; as, 2] HHIENBAIHOIMHAOM @VAIONIS alOd. Tell him to bring the ink. alan o830, or o J@RE@3ng a0l Vishnoo plucked flowers. (O I ED® 60 1o agiMN BRAIOT 06T, 4CC( He said I will do that. emp accl 5th. Participial neuter nouns in the nominative case often correspond to the English infinitive mood when it performs the office of a noun in i the nominative case, as, o walk is healthy ; to play is pleasant, &c.; thus, QS( @0 N0 ©21QY ™MD OMIAED I ed 1 T'o do good is pleasant. Mey YIMOBIERS alOQOMN® 6 1R 1QYEH @I YYD, SV Wel To give good advice is Wise. P GENITIVE CASE. to i 144. The genitive is placed first of two nouns in whatever case the all b second noun may be. In other respects the following rules must be observed. the Ist. When two nouns come together, one of which denotes the pro- perty or attribute of the other, the noun denoting possession must be in the genitive case: as, 02220011000 B0, The king’s horse. HTCYHS §SWND, Owner of the horse. His hand. EAIOHCHO 6O, @0 LIBOS Mo |IWo, Her garment. GAYsS alailao, Magnitude of the earth. Mercy of God. 6613 ITH HOHO Gyal, In some instances of nouns of this class the nominative case is used for the genitive: sometimes the nominative is slightly altered to answer the S, same purpose; but such nouns may in general be used under either form; a 3 or fG)O @ YOS a1, Buffaloe’s malk. ag) D@20, 038e37 61615l OO @@BO.JJB}O@@O, 99 Tust | ot { &)9@0‘ "j) Oy } Mercy of God. Steadfastness 238 2 @mgg@anbogo%j, { of mind. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 111 native Some nouns make the genitive to end in 62 as, 6 ALY (@D 6121 @00, Superintendent of the T emple. &seileas Mo, Waves of the Sea. aN2eas aleny dnde, Furniture of the house. This case is often confounded with the common genitive, but this is in- correct. The form denoting possession of property, &c. is to be used in accordance with the given rule: whereas the last form merely signifies employment on the property, or within the premises of another; or the spond accidental connexion of one thing with another: thus speaking of the m 1t proprietor of a temple we must use the common form & & (@ @BN6CbO thus, ©SWb, Omner of thy temple ; but when we say O &N (@D 6val @0 19@), it denotes that the person spoken of, is merely one employ- ed in the temple: again, speaking of a house, we say @160 or @9 Q) SWe2IN, Master of the house; but speaking of house furniture we must say, Q31S)6al Q,ifrgcfia'bca 2nd. When there are two or more nouns, in the genitive, which refer to different persons or things they are united by the particle So. If they ¢ the all belong to the same subject, or to persons having relation to each other, er‘{ed; the conjunction is not required; as, RIBOMOQe BHENIMMOQe HLABIe QGOIIGLL B pro- he 1 &HONM The Histories of Ramen and Krishnen are alike. @Y HILBOBINMDOYo (FAIYOS QYo BOOR DS &Cla 6D 2 _10QYo. I will speak of the wonders of heaven and earth. @DIOTHO BBHHMO BEVOW 68967329, h Bring his son’s horse. OO IDVNOE) BIRIGHORIROS oruoemoufz{flo%%as ed for gmb(moa) QoM. p he The servants of the ambassadors of the Indian Rajahs came. 1, & 8rd. The particle @@ @b is used in this case, and sometimes in other ik cases, as in the nominative, with this difference, that the word affixed must be in the genitive, or any other case required; as, yd 6D (MU 2000 g melIqy QUIEB3EHS CNVIBIIOTD o 165 Aoy 16| aloWa. 1! I will describe the nature of the beasts from the lion downwards. 112 A GRAMMAR OF THE ®S653179)8® is used in the same way; as, Blal90r)e]) @SE Qe §FA)IUIMNIOIBES FOIW)aNe O3 BRMNEE30e MNUS) 2 ©a I, On account of the avarice of the Dewan and other officers the people See the note.* perish. DATIVE CASE. 1145. This case in Malayalim is used thus, Ist To express the object to which the action is directed; and when in this sense the dative follows the accusative case of a noun, or verbs im- plying purpose or design, eQIeNE] or @G is often affixed to the dative; as, GO EVALIDES HAIOLIDn GVAIOD 6@ D0 He prepared them for their work. GO a\C 60D () BI0< N6 HAIENE) SV am%. He did it for you according to his word. 6mICd (Odo weMmamiMmIw/lg goaliles alom. I came here for your benefit. @O HEIQI 1§ @ LIOD 60 ™ 62.1Q);. He did this on their behalf. oo EIBjo ©21QYIBD IINEB 0 EONNBBe Haltd02IRSg ) So. If you do this thing it will turn out for our mutual benefit. 2nd. Words signifying pleasure, displeasure, need, danger, equality, suitability, benefit, opposition, nearness, passions of the mind, or the bodily senses, require a dative; as, GO EOMNHo EOMIR 2PILOM. T'his is pleasant to me. 30 Great care and discrimination are required in translating the English genitive case, as in numerous instances the corresponding Malayalim words require to be put in other cases; as will be seen in reading through the Syntax. In fact, except with some particles which always require the genitive case of a noun, this case, as old native writings prove, was not formerly in much use: the idiom of the language requiring the dative; as not c«@eo®, put ROJeae®, mire. 3 R — MALAYALIM LANGUAGE 113 OV BHIGJs GV 60N SBMIN BN, ° That affair was displeasing to them. e QrIONEELI PRTUN T=YoRIQF-ANA IR They will not need. eople @O® GVAIN VIR AL DAY, That is nut necessary for him. O NONdEs @Y @Yy VA IAIQ ) R)B6 (Yo, You are exposed to danger, or danger is near you. @B EOMIO or EOMIOMIS LB NI, whent That is equal to this. S Im- GYEO6ME00 o®c (0186 M) 62 101166 Al @Y. ) the Ornaments are very suitable to this woman. @00 E0VIE Ha 0o 612IWY,. He conferred a benefit upon me. @RAIOD @oaldn AleOILBINg Ilane. 4 P He stood in opposition to them. £20N@30e GVAIOM, or GRLOMO 2.J0Qe M. The people stood about him. a0 ho ABEM @M &8N0 BOSETIBHE N, The time of my death is near. @RALIOD @D E or BVALODIS ot 6210 g He acted with mercy to them. GO FosHlAte OB )0 HWIL,QBEE. Hatred becomes no one. ity GO @LJS%')(‘Y)D @RaloM arrscv\flg,sa : the He is not willing to do that. @V HIYFH oM @oalnh e2100 OISO He did not pay attention to that business. @0 HIP) ag)eDO d},%cfi:bofia» 6iQa| mecm. This sight is an abomination in my eyes. 7 alm 60idm 60 @)@ @orodlal. OU%h I have no taste for this. qlfli‘e ,WfiS ; the Rt 3rd. Verbs signifying to show, provided @@, or SdHIFHE VD Q 114 A GRAMMAR OF THE is added to the principal verb; to give, fo happen, to instruct, to help, and to grant require a dative; as, 1€ @D 60MBe @VM BISIDM YR et He showed it me. 610D NMNBHD o6 a 0N e Mo 1 will give you this book. BOAID @Y H® OO GO OBHISEYD). He gave him that horse. oo HIGEBE36@IBOWYo NIIOMHO O ITH (Yo Vo) c8¥2 $6S MOMBEBAIV ] Mol B0 60 1), All these things happened for thy glory and our good. @VOIYD @AM @_a_sae,oafl%, He instructed him. @D NEe VeI N Ebvo. They will assist you. @VAID GRAL ™ BR®m (e He granted him that. 4th. The verb 6a_1930rvd when signifying to go to any place requires d: a dative: but in some instances the ablative ending in @ or @«fi) i used; as, @I 6892 @ O, He is going to Cochin. @2 0o GVAL LB 6. She went to Aleppie. @D 62 1GNYdn Gal)do. They will go to Chenganoor. 600 DB JOED eI ] T went to Trevandrum. 660 ®d g ad ealIEm. The child is going home. Sth. The following verbs require their subject to be in the dative case. 60(r5ldHen e LM I am /zungryo 22 29aC)EB 0, 35 5 thirsty, od 29 N es o, sy pErspire. 33 IO (YYD, 5 think. 93 Blg0m, 5y Gain, | MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 115 hlp, 6th. ©6"2 and AI@(vo, when used for §6rv2 together with their PR negatives; 6Ql6Mo 6I6NE], and their negatives; when signifying need, require a dative of the person; but §6s signifying fo ewist, or to be in any place, takes a nominative of the person; as, He is alive. @oAIb gere, ®oid @oniles ez, He is there. o@o 21D HNV 62 1Mo § 67300, Or Lo, O T'his merchandise will sustain loss, lit. there will be loss, or loss will come to this merchandise. oo O8elmail ™ Alme §eMBIB®R ey or AIBlS RS, This child will not fall sick. gODIMITD OV Nde £19B0 HENE. I gain by this. EOr3lde CrUEHSA'Rl. 1 have no complaint. @@ 60(Y5lde O M. I want that. I do not want this. 60 ® @r&m A LI6NE), - 7th. The defective negative verbs, together with &% Qo require e uires dative of the person, and are used in sentences thus, M s m‘uécm 0D 6)a ) 5 S9. She cannot do that. 6986 HlatId21IIh (uadlQ, I cannot go-. GRIOM QIO aaal. He cannot come. @OAIFD 2 I0QIIOD & BIQ)o. They can tell. I cannot hear. MR B @da,bo%jmb &P 50Ny, ACCUSATIVE CASE. 146. Verbsof an Active signification govern the accusative; as, Ist. 6mICd @oIee OIad v, I love her. @V EIVBE300 066AIO] M0 BAO®IOTD GV )HE 8 " The heavens declare the glory of God. 0ase 2nd. Some verbs govern two accusatives: it is however to be observ- ed that neuter nouns are generally put in the nominative; as, @200 BVAISHM Qo wlo{12. They clothed him. @Y UBIM GVAIOD @Y 01900 o__\cflg:p%io The teacher taught them that lesson. 20 A GRAMMAR OF THE 116 1 as, 3rd. Causal verbs require an accusative ;° 6D oy dho 190N (g, 1 caused the book to be read. 6m0b @oAIBM BB7E Ce@ANOM OdhIA]) o). men I caused the enemy to be slain by him. F aflga UHLL EBMEE3HH QY GV OHIENS BOlg ol Vishnoo reigned by him over all people. @R o0 EDF O 6H:I6NE EOO @oSlafla). He caused this person to beat her. 4th. Sentences in which the accusative case is governed by a verbal personal noun may be rendered into English by our phrases, lover of God, doer of evil, &c ; thus, 093D HNAOERNMOICD 310700, The lover of God is blessed; lit. He who loveth God is a blessed, or happy person. GVBIBOTDQs (BEAOWRYe YSajaimilcd ewmand GOV B2, I trust in the Creator of Heaven and Earth. 0 (V036G VAT BRNT AUBRe GOPTD ED(LHO! HBOMADEEY 0 VORI to & SIED 698N o £)gH 03] Neither the worshippers of images nor the lovers of money, will obtain heaven without repentance. ©0R) M) T @osjm“;oe&m»mrvb U6 HX B0 2 |SIED 600 oam@v')gfl. See the note-*2 The worker of iniquity will not go unpunished. den 31 See para 225 on the Causal verbs. 3 When in English one or more nouns, governed by the preposition of, follows a verb; if such preposition can be rendered in English by about or concerning, the noun must be putinto the Malayalim accusative, and goverued by the particle #1255 as, ®RAICH @D HIYOTD @)g) oMo He spoke of that affair. @Y @MY OO M ROWE D) 0] ERAID BERAIHMIS AJION. They told him of the goodness of that mian. @Y aJBREeMPYo BY @G@@JO @Sl @pd alostn® ®9cd G):fiagqg 66m9o ? Have you heard what he said of that man and woman. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 117 I1st. ABLATIVE. 147. This case denotes the agent, cause, and sometimes the nstru- ment, of an action ; though the latter is better expressed by the particle 6262 affixed to the nominative case; as, —t> 1 @VAIMITH @@ 62K 6I|S. That was done by kim. GVAIN a ICEHTD IR NETITH GRAID Q. They came in consequence of what he said. erhal DIBOD BVAIMIT LM (EOBLBANOLIHN HFOHING God, 6\0_!%8)67&%. Ramen was conducted by hum into the wilderness. @Y QJBHNOTONLO WMEMEAELIMNITD oMo OB ™ o, OF M) mgpam (ley 0. These plants flourish well on account of the shade of that tree. it aleilate @V@MOEMITD AUBOT ago Ao 190)880m aid emodad BVBER|S OB (. Those who suppose that greatness comes by riches are in error. /) /| = BVOIND BT HOSIL OBHIENE GRS @S]o ). He flogged him with a whip. htan 2nd. ABLATIVE. J0 9 148. This case, which for the most part requires the particle HOS, denotes the manner of an action; as, I went with him. 69 @BRALeMIS HOS 6 1Q). I am with thee. sition 6o oreomas HOS © 6z, h by @I OB MO {IVo BBOQJe AINOTDIS HOS 63 alivey (o lap(e All the time, or while, he lived, ke lived with honor. @I ANEOTTIS SHOS %nflgzé He was born with disease. UU—— ) 4 2 @b merdo ajeesis £6s allem. He fell with his burden. 118 A GRAMMAR OF THE I The following verbs require nouns in this case; as, MWICD (INOOMIS @6 Al HXN) B, I pray you. ©ALOD @IS oefiaa?% Heforgave them. s BOAIND BOOLOBIS CNIeCIID) H6bo. He will speak to her.. @DOIODS .23 10BN o. Ask them. GO VOIS @0 () &I00 @@__D%‘ 3nd He so commanded them. @S0 D @mfl HHMIS 6 oIV, That matches this. In @i Iz llemas am@%. He rebelled against the King. thisa 6MIND GVAIODIS Ao 195)B6o. I will ask them. Tespo @0 D GVAIOMIS SBrai)ol. place The 4 They were angry with them. langt @DUCD @IS aldho,l. He hated him. In a few instances verbs require this case of the noun, in the sense of Sfrom; as, 6WIND BVAIOMIS BSa OHIGNE. I borrowed from him. @2OI0h GOAIOMIS BV® 62Sla, or QII@312L. He got that from him. used @O 61121984, 90 29NV BOAIOMIS @D ailslay q.__l(fl 1 He seized it from him by force. 3rd. ABLATIVE. T 149. This case is used in several acceptations; but its primary mean- of th ing is in; as, shor emIND 662D ANe 1M Be 0. I believe in God. @Y aedy, Mo o bs CDWDWALY. I have no confidence in that man. @) 0I23IANODO A @Y 8e>Td ©928)0 ammqamw’] (1ea () The kingdom was prosperousin that king’s time. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE., 119 2nd. A part of a whole as fwo of them, is expressed by this case ; thus, @200l EeNEeId §0ailes UenEMa aglM a0 d:. Tell two of them to come here. ) het oo @VBHE' O BTN Hatseye ongjaieay. Not even one of these persons is good, or, There is not even one good person among them. 3rd. This case may be sometimes rendered by our preposition at; thus, @l menbo allflad o ez, He s at home. In most cases however of this kind, the final @m{) is removed from this ablative ; as Cfl)o&l@flmjb, cnanei@voy. This abbreviated form cor- responds to our words in, at, {0 : but observe this change can only take place with nouns whose nominatives end in o ; and not always with them. The correct use of this form constitutes one of the little niceties of the language that can only be acquired by practice. @V MVBWOED BOAITD OEBISWED alITD). nse of At that time he lived at Cottayam. 6B92]1ad O] I BRAIOM Bere. I saw him at Cochin: lit. T being at Cochin saw him. GVt ®mOMO CrneLEdYD 61a19)). He went to his place. When speaking of going fo @ house or to school the common form is used ; as, 15!2) @0l mento AN @d ea o). He went to his house, or home. @I a e @@ en1aw). He went to school. There is another form, in common use, made by abbreviating this case of the noun, and the particle ®2S®@n@d ; and then joining them in their meal- shortened forms ; the meaning then is ¢o, or at; as, @0 BNEAIMD.IIBHED Halti). , God. He went to the District Court. @o0Iob A@EnE (e, . He stands at the door. mdfl ©V oY alSiHecd Hsoe. That cow lay at the gate. A GRAMMAR OF THE 120 4th. This case may be frequently translated by the English phrases, at each other, at one another ; thus, £0EROM Al 0 OB Se{9820)Go MEGT &SI A 2 0By @saArd. When the immortals thus heard the words of Kaly, they looked at each other and began to smile. ) 5th. It may be rendered by the English preposition nfo; as, @oAIOd GRAIBM VGG S5O, He cast him into the sea. When ag)ds, or ag)9621He is added to this ablative, it may be rendered by our words info, unto, to; as, @D BRAIOM UAGON OB BEH ST, He cast him into the sea. GO LD 66T LI MD]60D). They turned unto the Lord. @I MNDADNELES 61atINV). 3 She went into the city. by 4 @oaith EaAleNeas eaorrruenedl@ailonn g3 @ONeAL (NU)eaDINVONDM 18862180 @OAIB O1HING 1o, He took lzz'mfrom an earthly to a heavenly throne. 6th. The ablative in 6(_9__(0)0 is used in comparison: (see the Syutax of adjectives on this subject.) 60 @ @OUS) B0 BB GV ITOL. There 1s no distress grealter than this. 4th. ABLATIVE. I Ty 150. This case signifies from, denoting separation and motion. Ist It is sometimes rendered by our word out ; used in the sense of from ; as, @ NG @IceMe. Move out of the way. @o01d @oeno sreN@N@ oM @oalem ®2dleng 6YOYDy They thrust him out of his cast. S MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 121 Tages, @00 @oalges algleborflom @oaleg edIeNEaIm mé)%{:i. &SJ He brought her out of her house and beat her. @RI N D @Yl gs @A O 440605 Gt bed af He departed out of the City. 2nd. It corresponds to from ; thus, @V MODO (BTN TDNM ail@6mDy 1019 QN He separated himself from his Sfomily. y be @0t @Y 2ocaento ®@vWyalscedom allere 6a_19X). He fell from the highest part of that tree. agilescrilom alom. Whence came you. VBITYD oaoefi:\(mflmbcvflmm @Y IO ALDLIGE300 LIBo. Bad fruit will come from a bad tree. 3rd. This case signifies distance from any place and may be rendered by the English preposition of A O ! 6 &ISWo 226212 B0 QRN@NOM QIS BsIECN. \ ) 8 Cottayam ts North of Mavelicara. X a 0o I8NV TN WO MIEE ald) O MBI (Y YT, fax of Krishnapooram is sixz miles South of Mavelicara. VOCATIVE CASE. 151 The vocative case, with or without interjections, usually com- mences a sentence; as, MNOMBSI) Het). It is well, O Kaly! HBAIOA ag)®N O HNOBHV N G O God! Save me. s of @600 (NIB>Sa. Alas, what sorrom. 6.01@39@®) ag)eMho @oSeemd o). O Friend, come to me. Nl cv9a] Hlerilad smach EBwaNes . Swarmy! I trust in you. i R A GRAMMAR OF THE 122 SYNTAX OF PARTICLES. 152. agyom. This particle is used, 1st. To show that the subject referred to is contained in the preceding sentence; as, & ®9 Mo allPo agoM @AIMd a10e0Y). He said that that tree will fall. hav, 6D @O® ©21Q% ag)t GOAICD a 06T OS¢ He said I will do that. 9nd. Two or more sentences may be connected by placing this particle at the end of each sentence; and adding the conjunction §o to it; as, @D Ao ag)Mo BVBNOM B0l NICNIIO]HRe ag)(Mo GOAIOD o 1060, He said he would come and speak about it. BSHEMEMIOHH &B1HMICM6 o i1S)HeMEmIOEs 60 BemIme MIANOEL OIS BIRALHAMYs IAND O IVE3IMAILe Q0o @LB)O%@, Ramen blessed the monkeys with a privilege that every thing they bit should become sugar cane; that all they caught hold of should become iron ; and that their saliva should become medicine. 3rd. This particle is frequently prefixed to neuter demonstrative pronouns with the following meaning. agOMN@Oho ee .o, After that, whereupon ag) M@ 6HINE, By that which, because of that. emI0b Afl@Ned el 8B alygailem &ens adienny §0199] ag) MO0 BB EYBHVo agOM ol ™ Y Yola s V) IR tha When I was in the way I saw a cow and moved off ; wupon which ) the people mocked me. il 153. ag)OM9é 0. This particle always stands at the head of a sen- tence as a copulative conjunction; thus, 3 oAecbo eI NOHMIS @0 2.16)E) 0o ag) M @RAID WEMEEINAIVIF 1060 ag (NI 60 BRI Bola)I00 621Q). He recommended him to pray to his Savieur, upon which he did so. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 123 §DIOH QIGeOD OIS HSlad agMIeo eilEs Alme ai1S)a. I drank o great quantity of water, in consequence of wh ich [ fell sick. ding 154. ag)oMImd or agyMIeyo. This particle has various acceptations as, 1st It serves to connect two antithetical sentences which, without having any necessary connexion, are brought together merely for the pur- pose of making each appear in a stronger light ; as, @008I01L:00 LIERNHDO2|F0 agOMIT aNMwggsald rticle VO NN]BHQJo B2 Qo T'he proud shall be ashamed, but the lowly shall rejoice. o AT 29D e 21 B0 ©a B0 ©2IQYMTD agMIT A €02 PTMOID 012160 Qe §alGalleanm. T'he righteous does good to many, but the unrighteous injures many. L. N 2nd. It connects sentences in the sense of and, then ; as, anm 60Mgn HaleBUAlOEHEMOA ag)MITD eI lenho BHeINHOS (@IS D6e. they Instruct me, and I shall observe thy commands. i of (TN a@®mM allsallednemMea ogomMITd emIth @ LN b 2 afive Deliver me, then I shall be safe. 00 oLRIDOMBM & Ol.2] @t\\)or&é&@@moafloflm ) Rl ™ BdB6o. Eshwaren will rejoice in me, then my poverty will cease. 00} 3rd. It stands at the head of senterces without any other meaning than to excite attention to the subject that follows: in this connexion it is similar to our word nomw, as it sometimes occurs in the Scriptures; thus }]”(,V in the beginning of the book of Ruth. & &h sen- ag)rMoah gswow%_mfl@o?o 0)9Wo MSOTRY M2 e §1TD §ENZINV® ag)OOMYNIMD. Now it came to pass in the a’ag/.s* when the J udgcs ruled. Jodb agOMI@ 6MICD AN IR NDDES 6)aldd:QlIvh M} nluI ) 2101 B0, Well, I have resolved to go to Trevandrum. 150 R 2 124 A GRAMMAR OF THE 4th enp! It 1s often a mere expletive; as, 18 all ag)oMIad 3 oM #:9G e ag)Yn? 15 What is the business you came about 2 agOMITh @VOICE)PBBEg-|I0e AIODEMo Come when it is necessary M & 62108 6)AS) 6B IMENAII 5 a@)(YNIB RDEDIS 0G5 EJo @O® 6).0195) 2 0@ &) Procure a cocoa nut shell and bring it you will get it from any one you ask 155 It ag)e YN This particle stands, (R Ist At the head of sentences signifying for ; as, ag)ONMITH 0 JBIEME3T0 alOQYOM@ M @, ©HMN 0020)g BVO ag)serle): ET oW o pad @oaind o) @295 ONWo) Maddho MIUDIWo. For whoever trusts for eternal salvation to what the puranas say, will assuredly perish for ever. 2nd It is used thus, @OAID agPDQY® ag)eYROMITH the The particulars of his letter are thus ; or, He wrote as follows | 156. ag (626680 I@L. This particle is placed at the begin— ning of sentences; thus, @I HOCDO BV OO EPEROW QYo 6NIQD 2705)a_{9088H @ IO 6 PODOBHINENBNNIT IR b @ 80s Beflalgeneend. You ought to honor your father and mother because you know that % God hath so commanded There is another form of expressing the sense of this particle viz. by adding og)©£]2 to the word that precedes the final verb, and adding @ to the final verb ; thus, al 09239601 EOMdn 2| MODEMNOD oMo MIY,ODEIEH @O 1B I0o agigdle MIMBESD ML) GVEBOM @ O king orant mefozg{wnevs have sjou not alt authority in the king- dom ; or, is it not that all the authority in the kz/zgdom is your's This form, which in the translation reads flat, is in the original very :{ MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 12 9 emphatic; and if a judgment can be formed from native writings, its use is anterior to that of ag)»6BI616mEAVIIDH. 157. @U@ BI6M2, ag)OM @ 6106773, are used in sentences thus, @O & 6dIMNEM . 0210} 016519, EYVMEE 2 IO @VOIENM 3N B6so. 0) He committed a robbery, on that very account I will punish him. @2 (Slolad. @YUl ] i@)Eammealesld, agom any IS @D @8 ' B H N/ T You know hereliesupon you,on which account youmust not cast him out. 158. QDB I8, GVBNIG. This latter particle never coales- ces with other words, but is placed in sentences; thus, Ou] VBN Qo MYala] 66BLGDIOM GVLI6®m N ()77 roosm'“lgjomb CDBR HE' B0 ey ; @Y LITH 69 Nde @VOLHN @wo_\".(odmb @0LIO® AS0OICM] Yoo @AY Sl “lg\__;. No one can save us, but the God who created all things ; on which account I have no other wish than to serve him. @VEOH 673, is usually affixed to nouns or pronouns; sometimes the initial letter is changed into its short vowel when thus connected ; as, @D E0GINMNWYBH BMREY;MD ED e E:I9NE, mIND 1= @VOIOMNIS moma(&@aw"]g\g. In consequence of his being, or, because he is such a man, I will not 2 speak to him. 10 (16830 &'y 2 NOMgeAl0IB e BIE @2IU;0102)d. Because you are Christ’s, you are blessed. ut Mle3dodn ABAIIND HFWIQY OBHINE Bro Hlge mflg%. by Because you cannot come, you will get nothing. () @O® OIS, in the sense of GVOB:OH6M2, is affixed to present and past participles; as, S eMINMD @VAIOS Bl I0BOMBDOBIE ERAIOD 60 l16)S 8 CH] 0= In consequence of my going thither, he need not go. @b M2 el (e dINE Ml BRAIGT 'y ecv(\%o_ffloe&m. Because he loved us, we love him. 126 A GRAMMAR OF THE 159. alleom, This particle is used in various ways; as, 2 3 1st war It is placed at the head of sentences in the sense of afterwards thereupon, moreover, &c.; as, aleem VM, aend) mg@amsvgawbo o lnesade CEV Y S LIGPLI I [ GOAODO @RS B 6210 Qlom. Afterwards the Sunyassee came near to Subramunyen, wn order to hear his words. alecm @Palnd @oaleg LeINIla,. Thereupon he rcbuked her. o NOCMQo V5 HAINTDT HedIOBEEMOANN drgflal. Moreover he ordered that you were to go quickly. 2nd. It sometimes corresponds to the following English words and phrases; thus, alfleom §66M89? Have you any besides these? Er A LR ? alleome 9. Will you come? Of course I will, or, can you suppose I will not come. il emo0b @o®m 6.219en? aNetMag ! (0 Stall I do that?2 What else is there to do? as Sometimes a{160M ag» ? in the above connexion, means, Why do you doubt, or, make a dispute about i. 6®Ih BB (NIler0e@m @O0 BRI e a|FIlaY, afleom BB o GO EWeL |$62)? I do not fear even a lion, Do you suppose then that I shall fear a dog ? 3rd. This particle is sometimes merely expletive. It is also used to excite attention to the subject in hand; as, by oM e3I0h o 10QYOMD OBOcEnE M o. 0 dl Pay attention to what I am sag/ing, 66alr)0d eegide goalles alds, oM agOmlom tf 6mI0h GVOEE3IS 60 MMD. 0 fi The Doctor will be here just now, for what then am I going thither. 4th. This particle governs neuter pronouns in the ablative ending in @(O‘b 5 as, fl GaL0D GarV@ad aNeom @oaide alom. She came afz‘er he went. @ @d afleom eoalnd 6356 alr ). He ran away after that. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 12 { 5th. Tt takes an ablative termination in @(?Sb, in the sense of after- uids wards. @oldn Ao OBISONEBOOBINE ©OAIODIS 641 a0 Bjo HAIQUBO®OM HEHOAL AIO; afloMe@n @ ad @DAI60 Ailel@dls £V IMmBENIMNALie HBTHO 1 {0 Ql Q.o An order came not to examine them because -t/zey had been for— gen : afterwards an order came to put them in chains and send them up (to court.) 6th. An adjective signifying the neat is made from this particle ; as, Sl OOD B3IGlo OB BN S. and Let us hear the next business. 160. ©o. In its primary signification, this particle corresponds to the English conjunction and. It is used thus, Ist When there are two or more words to be connected, this particle e must be affixed to each of them :** this form corresponds to the English conjunction and, when used to connect a number of words in one sentence ; as, v””/ HGBEA2IDs P BBo MSBRMN® 6MID B6Ng, 1 saw the men and women walking. m B@BOETMIINM BOAIONYe GVAIOMO &0 &6 Qo GVAIONMDO OLOG36S Qo @DAID ® H:M)at. 00’ They saved him, his horses, and his chariots, Jrom the enemy. &t o e <L | to 3 In many instances two or more verbs, trhat in English are conn ected by the particle and, are rendered into Malayalim by using past parti- ciples for all the preceding verbs ; and the form made by the verbal noun and ©22m js ysed for the final verb. This, it is to be observed, is not an exception to the rule for placing m the conjunction 20 in as much as all the preceding verbs in the sentence or words used for verbs ; are considered to be in the same state as the final verb which, in this instance, has the particle 205 thus, her 6mI0d BRAIOM &HMB Al Qo 621, 1 saw and spake with him, 1 This form may be varied by using the neuter noun instead of the par- ticiple, in which case the conjunctive particle must be repeated; as, emoad @RAIeM HINTH Qo AdQHQ]o G)A.{Bé. 1 saw and spake with him. emIcd MIWIANOM &M ASlg Q)0 | @RI BRD® 68 SaW)o ®-ai Yo, T will see the Rajah, bring the letter, or order, and give it to him- 128 A GRAMMAR OF THE BB AUBHQYo AHOOICODMD 62 19dHQe 61.21Q) N BENE ag)O GOALICD o106, of t He said he saw that one was coming and another going. goMd 69612190 62 1Q415EH DaldhIREBTIO B leNE] Qo FOMI BHI6Mla| e aldn HAIENEIGe 6mIND ) MNdn HMNY (Do 6.2 IQJYY. I thank you for the benefit you have just conferred upon me, and for ‘[JG l.‘ the kindness you showed me before. he 2nd. This particle, used singly, corresponds to our also, even : as, 60NMEE) EVAIOD §a190]), 8O0M 6WINe Blatddso. He went yesterday, I will also go to-day. 4 Sometimes £,5S is added to the conjunction, which renders the sen- by tence more emphatic: as, ther e0Mde oo IS @lalla] @OMAIeL)); @Y HENER o 565 605 2] ®OOMOACT 6HIND BV6 e X H6 (0. I pray you to procure Did you not build and give me this house ; v and give me that paddy Jield also. i.ng ©Y oMo Qoml es), ) 0o HOS HAISHMe. That tree was cut down before, you must also cut this down. @0I0h 6139.2.]) 0160 Qs 61a190IO0, BOAIOM &S] Though he went even as far as Cochin, he did not see him. ©OWIVe 62IQYBNOMBHIB o BVt OBIEe §OAIND @Q‘ ‘\' i3 This man did more evil even than that person. Eing] o) Q@o (‘r‘%@gfl Even this is not good. I 3rd. This particle is used singly to denote that the whole number of O persons, or things spoken of, is meant; as, on, ] ¢ @O0 o aflse adloQee6m. He sold his three houses: meaning all he had. @AIHODO 62 B®, 020600 Qe AIBO@D Mo Bring both his servants. Implying that the person alluded to has only two servants. MALAYALIM LANGUA 129 1Y If he had others, the conjunction is not required, and the construction of the sentence would be different; as, (CGIoMIN g ) 3 _Jr‘@)‘a(fib QEMNE, or 6B 6o 16K, ALIBI& @D 6 (DR, m Bring two of his servants. It must however be observed that though a part only be meant, if such djflz be pointed out by the demonstrative @, or o@o, the particle 6 must be used ; as, @DAIOODO = y B30\ ©B 63 Vo 10 QYo QIREBY No Bring those two of his servants. 4th When this conjunction is preceded in any part of the sentence, sen- by a negative verb, and followed by a negatiy verb ; its meaning is nei- ther ; as, 0o @ Airvh S 198002 ageesled emITes Sa19&QNay. (M {f he will not go neither will I, ocure 5th. When this particle is repeated in megative sentences. the mean- ing 1s neither, nor 5 dy as a198yole! 9 6jm(‘J)<LQ_) o There is neez‘/zei milk nor wate 54, @™ OIS DAL YA G D &3 That is neither good nor bad o This particle serves also to giv completeness to a sentenc Tt 1s thus elegantly used in a way, to which tl 107 1T € 1S othing corresponding in the English langua 161 @M. This ]MILIU follows the word to which it belongs. and of sometimes has 6 affixed toit. Its general meaning is self, in reality, ver e nly ; and words of a similar import. It is however often used to render the sentence emphatic, without any specific meaning being attached to it @oid mEeoM, They themselve Y It is a ruth indeed (ST (Y\,)J: ) oo IGO0 & 2100 GVAQ_IPs OO (‘Sf‘xfl 1 They are not the only persons guilty in this affair. Y (Y7 AlANEQ) GO HHICD QeMmI &6 I saw that very same bird before. S 130 A GRAMMAR OF THE o aNiad mecm @oaiod ©aIRN 110 He went into that very house DNV IB MID MO VBT You are that very person Many of the above English particles when rendered by @& must be connected with other words signifying ¢ruth, &c and these must be placed after the final verb as a separate sentence; thus, th DO &) o ONUDIRAOEI? MlvIVe @MOOM all Are you sure of it? Very sure (96 09I AiBo MIVTIWe BMEHOM It s very certain the king will come to-morrow @7 IOY A lCEeTHm®m UM 0 @M What he said was really a truth C0! When the Malayalim adverbial form is used with, or without @ &cm SN in any of the above senses, it must be placed before the verb; as, @RAIOh U@ umQ/@IWg, or, (MUIWAINg MO O I hear dfor certain that he will come @90, in Native writings, is sometimes used in the sense of euther, or fhe neither, nor ; as, goBoL0 OBdodn ®IND 8@ allldn ®I0h eaigjom Qlde ©2IMNMo Mo OERWe. Those who either hear, or learn t/us story, will certainly oblain heaven 90 Gra 19 MICD VAN BIEDH @IND ERAIBMIS 810 CVOVIB)Ee MIND BOMMe @O §6MEIN) I neither went, nor saw him, nor spake to him 110 162. 6. This particle is used in a variety of ways; as, 1st Tt stands as the sign of interrogation thus, Will he come 2 @A @6 29? GOALOCHO @Va (e @VAIOMIS HOS 610106109 ? Dud his father also go with him? @od @D{aydh IO @QJ%&)W%QQOJO 2 Will they not do so? U]Ll Meade @@m @0OlQyeielewo? Do you not know that ? MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 131 2nd. When the interrogative pronouns are used, simply to ask ques- tions, the particle of interrogation is omitted ; as, QWO QI ? Who will come 2 ag)® HIYODT @Ol GRAIMD CMe0NIIG) 2. 1A About what affair did he speak. he ag) O alOQYOND ? What do you say ? 3rd. In sentences where the English -words like as, even as, &c. occur they are sometimes rendered into Malayalim by the interrogative pronoun, and 63 affixed to the following verb ; as, gD (aHI0o GYWIVo 6210} QI V@IV @ OOM 69010 6.2.1Q)o. This man will do even as, or, like as that man did. This form which it is to be observed is from the Sanserit, is not very Y concise; the Malayalim idiom for the same kind of phrase is much more simple ; thus, @PWI0e O2IQY® HalIOLl HENM E0AIMe 6.2 1Q)s; or ) @YYV H21Q) (a)dhIDo MEN EOQIM0 6.2.1Q)o. T'his man will do Like as ; or, according as that man did. 4th. r, 0F In sentences where our pronouns whoever ; whalever are used the interrogative particle is sometimes affixed to the verb ; as, GO ag)ssleio 60 (e} BI0c 621QIHAY GV CrueR) i Mo HSs. W hoever will do so will obtain a reward. fuin ag)® ag)slaje @oaL0d @eflenmeenlys @om (@96 2} IS 2 623 ob, Whatever he commands that observe and do These forms are from the Sanscrit, and chiefly confined to Native writ- ings: the more common and better form is thus, @V ag)EHE}o 6D )BIVe 62104 GO CrO2BIMa o@:)%o. A @GO ag)oFee @VAICH Be ~ sy WARY) b @om (0)@96rM) 6.0 g%fl Yo, 5th. When questions apply to different persons or things, the particle )$‘0/ of Interrogation must be affixed to each noun, pronoun, or verb, according (1 17 28 132 A GRAMMAR OF THE P, to the nature of the question, and an interrogative pronoun is usually plac- ed before them; but this is sometimes omitted Our words whether, or, are sometimes rendered by the particle 6 in the same manner; as, Q@()fi_‘\m:@fffic@m Mo 20 6\68>9.%:‘._.fl4?"c8519, E“o%).’)g_\j@@’()‘,@ 56 ¢ Whither will you go, to Cochin or Quilon ? ? [4 6027180 IO OEBIITDIO 6alIde @) 9 B & B Wil you go to Cochin or Quilon OO Ballde GVAIOMI, GVAIEGI, @VQIOHMI? Who will go, he, she, or they ? EO@OMY, @LWIHI, BV o (o WICo ? o Which is the more difficul Oy U f his or that 2 2210 I oo o) §c&00 (09 [ore QW A B GRS S0 A6 Alal) M eRYe s Q1HeNV9? Are these houses the property of the Rajah, or Dewan ? IV A @D SO 60D B.QEONI 69O COD ag)d™M 6D @Al QYriley, or, BV B0 HISODO®I HQONO®I ag)OM EWIOD @TOIYOTIal. I do not know whether that horse is white or black. MNee30e EOXNE0ONI & SIE0N2 a0 ag)®rlele 62l ©LOWI 62 IYIT OBAITTOMDD BaDEIYRICNI g agelde G2, « Whether ye eat, or drink, or whatsoever ye do, do all to the glory of God.” oth. This particle is frequently used with nouns, and affirmative verbs in an ironical sense, or to imply denial: such forms of speech are much more emphatic than a simple negative; as, GTAIOMI ASHs D ? Is he clever 2 Meaning that he is just the reverse @OAIOT 612 JRAS 1QYeH A IHMI? Is he wise? Meaning that he is a simpleton. @D @DV (a)b:I00 621QERI ? Will he do so? TImplying the impossibility of his being guilty of such a deed. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 133 an. dC 7th It is used to express grief and astonishment ; as Ol @06 OV 1de 69 (ajdhIQo ALIMIBILBN® ag)OvD) ! O dear, what is this that has thus happened to me ! @06QR)) a)DMO OB 1B LHIEMOGIad aflervw O dear, my cznldf(’ll wnto the well ! 8th In many instances this particle is merely expletiv ometimes 1t 1s used thus r 4 @O0 Natroe @0® ORIA M Io HEO As to his opinion, lit. thought, it is folly. QOSWQE:\Q’)) V) B Qi @(ODLA)@D(‘Q) (alto)) 98) gmni! lo | (U“Q_MW’HJ @) YN @ HY "ojomyv s @om 6 2.1 7//)){ As for AL you determined it against me ; but as for him, he did it 05 wn order to save me. ) 163 6330 This parti 1s used 1st With the nominative () a (@) jouns; as, I SVeml QI OIS0 ®@00.16S oo M) I lLived there till I was five ers (y' age @0 Qoe O.JL__: oS (013)] COJQ«SO o ol 9@)« He went as far as Mavelicara 612 It is used with the nominative case as a particle of comparison ; as mJ oo al/d, 63 o@;mm@“{mg 66V 2 This cow is as big as a horse glu' I @IS o .30‘\{3(\\* VT AAL. (.,\J There is no one so wicked as he Ve l]“ 2nd It 1s used with a dative e in the sa 1Y )8 al e way; nus, Nl (’}’ oo @M 62 QAL OMMIG o alIBdo HeNE This pillar is as h gh as a tre O VWM OMIGo = 0)6YY This is equal to that 3rd In a few cases it is used with the ablative; as, @16 (Y( 1 2 > r\@’) GO0 &air)) S ZIC ent as ar as /11.s house. @O 0g)$a{o0 0 HPIQYOHOMSH @I GVAID0 ('f}é & " BB ) |ty 0 Guwe them as much as they can take away THE 134 A GRAMMAR OF 4th. 1t is used with the future tense of verbs, and in this connexion the particle is sometimes declined ; as, g @D AIMGHLDGOTIONN BOAISe Haldd0al. She will not go until he come. G HI1Ge VIogodlenenisge. @alcd maNes @ o) By o. He will remain here until that affair be accomplished. @oh g0 adles Al ealIpeomdHn 60l 2 NeraNom WYY @OMISsH e, Ser He has paid for my expences till he come here. 164. ag)®g40. This particle is always used at the end of sentences; as 60m 60 de OS2 PT 618988 IV BN ag)oMIT & QY@ 0 16MAILIHL. 1€l I wish to purchase this, but it s known I have no money with me. See the Etymology on this particle. 165. @9@0. This particle has various acceptations; as, 1st It is affixed to nouns and pronouns in all cases, and sometimes to another particle in the sense of only; thus. EOm QIR Not only ths. MI@30e BDAIO0IS M@y es AMEA3IND (J&I0e Ol @100 00 EVEIOMIS BIWo B A IYB®. Do as you please to them, but, or, only to this person do nothing. eHICH I OLY gL o106, Not only I, but all went anway. IQGORN T ALY HIVelete o |6018s. §E. There 1s salt water not only in the sea, but also in the lake. 2nd. When but in the sense of except comes in the same sentence with only, @02O® is added to @9(®)o; as, OO BTN RIDRLIIO® 60D @_Q_)c&o.fv‘o GV He Pl QY e? Nl Who can do this but God only ? o®c @VVo 2I@e @VLIOMm 0TS GYMo AlorMal. No one came here but this person only, or, except this person. VLE MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 135 oxion 3rd. To denote completeness 989 is added to the final verb, and an ng) inserted before the last letter of @9(@)c; thus, oo 0y BUAD FHIOMINS 6UBEN]BE e This cow O!z{y remains alive. () 219 |P9lom aB9eNZAICM ERFBITh B 2@ o Only one th/ze sheep that were broug]u‘,from Allepie died. m Sometimes @9(®o is understood, and the ag) is joined to a noun in the sentence, or to the verb that precedes ©p; thus, @(Y’fldaa BH 98D . I have only one. a8 I did this only. 60 ® e 2 | @% gj_\g%_ ) & 166. g )@d. This particle is invariably affixed to verbs in any tense as, mne 1st To denote the English substantive with if; thus, ®I0h @D @n@\%@n\uo @ MIBONM ag)863) @ @D(a) Mo a 1OBHYWEMo. If you are that man’s son, say so. mes 60(e)I0e HAITMa ageHl@d HalIed:e ™Mo ) If it must be so, go. @VAIOd @O BI00 Beflal ageEled oA @ (@I (b3 62 16@Q16Mo. If he did so command, yow must do so. eI EOmHM 62 WY ISHNEBITH ag)eMIS dNA O D8 6YMOA, If I have done this, forgive me. GOAID NERE'S a lHNEIT GDRNBOT ogislad o0 ORRIS @éh)fl(é‘oesa@owfi(mmfc. ence If they had been of our party, they would have joined us. 9nd. ageelod. Affixed to negative verbs, corresponds to unless, if % ¢ not ; as, ®0b 600 Nee Va0IRNBENTIEY a8l @d BV 61210 60 OB HPlB ) al. I cannot do it unless you assist me. 6 PE A GRAMMAR OF THE oy @b GO GVMEW OdEITFAIBG NI ag)s @b o@o @ $Flanilal. Wit S) &M OBHOQAINND o ten That timber cannot be placed on the stand (to be sawed)unless they USE bring an Elephant. 08890 ageNMIS B i@ emINd nlrde, deilaley a9 @d QIR B 0i ey If the king commands me I will come ; if not, I will not come ‘L.x.)__do O LIGS Llc &3 ©lay ageslad @oalod adlal a3 [0 If he will not drink milk and water he will die canm Yolearle )@, CHW 0o, and @@L, have the same meaning as, and ar often used fox ,quxou ; thus @D QIO ag) ™ AIR)EIE 6MITD @VAIOMIS o CVIO) 2,1 5132889 If he come, I will speak with him. 691000 AIVIT 16\(0(’YYP If it be so, do not come | 60116 QIOMI@ &M ASE @I If you come, I will give a cloth (1. e. garment. ) 4 M @D alSEMATNOEIES 6H210MIT @oal6s eala thel @@l en e (VU If we go into that city, we shall certainly die 67. agoley-. This particle has several applications; as, 1st ag)8la)s corresponds to our word but, when used to point out something in reference to the persons or thi s spoken of in the forme: part of the sentence; a (5 il 60D VIO BB A ag)8lele VAN ageoM &6 g° I did not see ham, but he saw me @D LIHE 6 YD UQO 66VE M1 o Q@%’}E’_é @0 Qb 9 6D P /ey It is true they have eyes, but they cannot see i @V a)HOMIS BT QLN QY &HO0 & 210 g 16851840 lnfr 1 O GVU)J!""D @I (@I5H]E ,,,,, oy, He committed a great crime against me, but Iwill not cast him out MALAYALIM LANGUAGE 137 ) 2nd. @®IMo. May in general be said to have a similar meaning with ag)8)8)c used as above. It is invariably placed at the end of sen- they tences, on which it confers great force and elegance and can only he used in particular cases; which must be learned by practice A5 QLige0 allnae §6M3IW] evmId &I9). VIl @9 (Yoo There was great difficulty, but T accomplished the business. 012 3rd. ag)s)eyo corresponds to although and though, when the thing spoken of, is unconditionally certain ; as, Though he was rich, yet he be- came poor. 0 48, @I 0g)®OMIS &)g:fl% gLl 6D @oales aa_xocofl% Although he commanded me, I did not oo thither ™) @0® 60 Hemd @o0levdIgaesslale (e o @FLB)e 65 B226 0|50 Though 4 you have known it once, I will again remind you. 0gOMO oMo v @scn ey ng)SGQELéo @D a10QOMm aNve I la {ab. Although you do not believe my word, ()elzevc what they say. 4th. This particle is sometimes rendered by the I‘ndwh words never- ) w572 theless, not;vzt/zstandmg, as @RI mo@@’gm% Ag¥lEJo (Mo @VAIOHO @S He @ 1) dHhsv Mo He is sleeping, nevertheless we must go to ham. Oul 6DICD BB LONAIICI (Vo aq)#>leye Necbo @ @(Yb &) B3 (VY. Y Notwithstanding I am a rich man., I um your servant 5th ag)®hlae is sometimes put for even ; thus, ¥ GVIND BVLO® GV GVAIGChO Q@) agleyo SO® @01 orilal. W No one, but he, not even his wife, knows it 6th. When ag)s85)e o is repeated in affirmativ sentences the mean- ing is ewther, or In negative sentences neithe nor as, ) & 6MICD ageseys SBAIh agslele AR Lither I, or he will come »01:" T 138 A GRAMMAR OF THE wh emICd agslate @oAID ageleje QIBEQ A, Neither I, nor he will come. @OV ag¥lee OB ogshlajo GOID 6dI mg.()_j(()“sa. They will bring either the Elephants or Horses. 168. QQ‘)Q’YQ"“O. This particle 1is in many cases merely expletive sometimes it answers to although, after that, &c. ; as, 6mIh oo BHIYHTD Bl PO WHMEBIN. al 06TT 0 Ige @PIOCHO ULBlaIEBIM GG BB o.xm'?gv\ Although, or, after I gave much good advice, there was no change in his disposition. 169 [ LO)I=RT This particle is used, 1st. In sentences in connexion with an interrogative pronoun, to sig- nify whoever, whatever ; as, GO AlOMILle eI eoalesMlom eald@ala. Whoever may come, I will not go hence. GPAID g aI0ETDIEYs, 6D BV® 6210 Whatever he may say, I will do it. 9nd. It denotes the English subjunctive with although ; and must be carefully distinguished from ag)88>)eyo, when used for although ; age0M @202 080 IHOMIS &OS Ha90lBHRI1L] Although, or, even if you detain me, I will not go with you. 1) eI QINbBIQad HsoMIee BV |$H Wl Though I should walk in a great Jungle, I will not be afraid. 3rd. This particle repeated in the sentence corresponds to whether, or;- as, A AN ©alr0ele 6Bl OANAS EOBOMILYs 6980 90 ag)CMITH §.2|WI &6 M0 MERH'S BRFERDH 1] Q1Y EYMo. OQ It is indifferent whether you go home or remain here, but you must come to me at noon. 170. (a)d9®o. This particle is used in sentences thus, st With the nominative case of nouns in their full shape, except MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 139 where they end in o, which is dropped when the particle is added ; as, BIE\(@ I QW )@@ @). O1dh) J udge not by appearance. @I @VAIOHMO @I (aBHIBo H2IOQIEMo. You must do according to his will. letive 2nd. With the genitive case of nouns abbreviated ; as, @OUBHS 2 IFTWOD (@B I0o EDAId MS. They walked aécording to their custom. \ Bo BOAUIBOS B WHH D (@ dI0e @D GV s ald o m%o. ] unge He will recompence them according to their doings. OO H @MW (ay®IDo ag) OO B6) HEM Q. Remember me accord: ng to thy mercy. 0 §ig 3rd. It is used with participles thus, @AUMAI EYAIR) QS (agdIDe GO OBHISHGo. He will give as each one has need. ®IOD agHOMIS 106DV (a0 eIt 6.2 1Q1%0. I nnll do as you told me. Mlocm e llenmMalends o] ol AlBOM (o 0o ad)OMIIFo HGEM SONESIOEHEMO Q. ust be Have mercy upon me, as thou art wont to do to those who serve thee. 4 4th. @&O™, is frequently added to (a#9@o, to strengthen the sentence ; as, @Al (FlomIna] (@BI0s @O 6 21QeS. Let each one do as he severally determined, ] BOALTOS H00E@IEOD (aJBIVe @O IO BVAIOD hthet, R AN OB 0. You must punish them according to their crimes. el 5th. 035(&3 When @, or o<, changed into their short vowels, is prefixed t0 (eI ; it signifies in this or that wanner ; as, 1/ /fll(fi ] @V (a)HIVo 6)2IQBD. You must not do so. @O §0(0)dhI0e @M H2IWY@IMIT (1Yo 69 (o) &I0c MO 612 l6Q5Mo. Because he did it in this manner, you must also do it so. e“(l][ 40 140 A GRAMMAR OF THE ) @Dl @RENTN @DIHO SN2 |® OHIE M 8Jalod agomIEd (AIM@n B36Le AINMIAd IR &' IDo MEOM (YNMED NVA0IN 1B e. You are a good man for saving them from distress : if trouble come upon you, I will in like manner assist you. 171. @sexn. This particle requires verbs, or participles, and is used Wi thus, i 6mI0h @A NeS B2 IMITY HSOHMN AIdPe EDOESIT OHI SR B0, As soon as I go thither, I mill send the Boat. 2% 60Q) HSOM OLIGPo GGl The water rose as soon as it had rained. emI0h @2 il6S Halor §SOM GVAICD 61a_19Plk, &6 He went away immediately I went there. 172. em®9Qo, is placed in sentences thus, OIS0 O®IQo (Ao (MIS OHMIQo BIEA. In every garden a tree ; in every country a language. 3 MSHEEE®IQe MMOMDO BAlMe QLRI 1B6o. T'he more you walk, the more your disease will increase. 173. qm@b. Besides being used with participles as explained before, this particle is frequently used with nouns, or pronouns in the nomina- tive case; as, San oo BYENE QBAd BB atOmIlOM &H0o MEDE ™Mo, From this year, you must pay tax for that field. 60 0M @mad, or, c®s BlAINUe QD@ 6MIND @D (ayB:IVe 6)2.1Q) 0. From this day forward, I will do so. 174. aie®, This particle referring to time and place is used 1st. With nouns, or pronouns in the nominative case; thus, 6WIND @@ CrVILIBBM® B EOAIIBSMICM e al? oS)QQfl%\!. I will not go hence, until this is accomplished. @OAIOH 61alI Mo AIOD MICD @VAIHMNIS HOS Q_12@Y0). 1 lived with him up to the day he left. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE 141 @ o®o MMIFH QBN eHICt 2. 024219y & Up to this moment I have stolen nothing. @O0 QemI E6NE CCVNLle QIO Ga 19N, come He went unto, or, as far as, the place he saw before. ond. used Q16@©, is generally used in the same sentence with Q@ ; in which case, o is added to QIO : sometimes QIO® takes a dative ter- mination; thus, ) BB 296 JOTH 61:.2.]) ALIOODYo, 01, ALIO H630 6HICD msoMlgens I have walked from Cape Comorin as far up as Cochin. @oalh @I Nees GO aey T ®e M. AISD YO1T) Qo 101210 OBIEIID) B VY2, He has been learning from six o'clock this morning, up to this time. 3rd. The participle © @ is frequently added to Q16@; as, & QmEd (@) d lenwWes =MoTTd el Q0o Sald 2dli®a 190, Of the people whodmwell between Cannanoreand Trichoor, 10000 died, ot 1 {9 OIS is used, ofore, nind- Ist With nouns in the nmominative case, and with adverbs in the same sense as Q@ @b ; thus, GOWINE OBIF GVAID H0o 61 IS O, He has been in the habit of giving tax from that year. )00 @D OBIOMEmIS ag)id BMEAIT alldnie. mses) QOB (Y Yo. Gricf has arisen in my mindfrom the time I heard that. 2nd. 6®mIS, is used with Q16®@ in the same sense as Q@QS}O; thus, oY @VLIG|PO®IT OBIge AIOOLYs LGS AT OO 01 QQMJ’JOSUW. He went from Aleppie to Quilon by boat. (622026700 O®MIF 21D 1O WSS BRI I & ds @P QYo BV OMGY OYIR §ENE. Every sect, from the Brahmin to the Slave, has its own Custom. THE 142 A GRAMMAR OF 3rd. ©6mog, is sometimes used in connexion with 6 ®os the latter bhe- par ing used in the sense of Q16)0; as, BV @@moamog%@@ QUNE3de. The beast.sfrom the Elephant to the Squirrel. 176. ®@0£y26@, €050, aPl61d. The whole of these particles re- quire nouns, or pronouns chiefly in the nominative case, the two former words are sometimes affixed to participles. They are used in sentences, Ist In the sense of besides ; as, 2i0h @oalles 621 (@O GPAPEm OB £S) Q,Q__E(XQ} S ! Besides the work he did there ; he did this also. 190 1TA BN Ao, 00 OE&Ma PO 6Bl @D @I 2106/ onc,o@o’i%. o There is none other besides God, to save men from sin. @02]96®, With the conjunctive particle o affixed to it, sometimes COI‘I‘GSPOI’I(].S to moreover. 2nd. These particles sometimes correspond to without ; as, eao@allapem @ald ageom @adl. They beat me without a cause. wBRSIRNaPe® SEMla] 2MRRBOM BRAVMIGSEIFAIIM? B QLID. Who can cleanse a man, born without holiness. 3rd They are used in the sense of except; as, 11 § @&Y0 QY L v goadles almapem emITD enaiesmlom o__goagsmc@flgs. I will not depart hence, except he come. GOMAYIOD @_Q«Q_Y‘fas emraci)gd, There is nothing here, except this. @DWICe BNOH: ag2IIBo o190, All went except this person. VD EP6E oo BRINTTIOM ABOOIB Q)((Bm%\ag%, There is no medicine jor this disease except this. 4th. Either of the above forms, or any negative verbal participle fol- fowing a noun or pronoun, with @@Nfi?@b, answers to except: the MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 143 I be participle retaining the meaning of the verb from which it was derived ; as, BB (ACIWEIVD OIS £,6S 92196 EO@OMIm () IDe 601D HP BN, No one, except an assistant be with him, can do so. €S 1e- @D QIEIO®m EOBOMITH 6mINd Eratsd ey, OIIer I will not go, except they come. %N Sometimes an adverb is placed between the noun and participle; as, 2% NEMIW] HalQIO® EOBOMITH By X OBIdN ¢ d Q1o % The crop will be destroyed, except it rain well. , @ 5th. If godlaont, 6901 9MIVg, 60816 Ee6NF N, or @r&@:fisxé\flg\wv @ NoS1g, be added to the negative participle instead of 6;2(0’5(“’)‘)(6{), the meaning is lest ; as, ’ 00200 0laom aemilgnrem e dlaiomd @oalenss f1mes COVoNID) @6 [BD). alk not with wicked men, lest they deceive you. 0 il6s GV OBH0IOD 029D LI ayogeMo. Lock the gate, lest any one should come in. Bo0sd MNNe2IVg MSHIem oTlesnezgeMalom N @o0de (NEIOa 6L Ha 6B USIOBHN o, Instruct them well, lest they should behave proudly. 177. &396@, Used as a particle, corresponds to without. It is used in sentences thus, o) o 1st With the nominative case of nouns; as, @b HS96@® emInd Sa1980Na]. I will not go without him. s@o MIZZ;ENDD atdHRMAId 611a0 &1 oy 0 QB OOLAIODD dN2|8d GV &SIOG QYo @D o ©alOBUNBBM @I allLeIVGS aSEnId HSIODYo V@R M)IW (@RI BSIODGo 6O YYD T'he people of this kingdom were for a long time without the knomw- I £ fol ledge of the true God, without faithful Ministers to instruct them, and without a true law. 144 A GRAMMAR OF THE 9nd. It is used with the accusative case of nouns; as, @old @lorgelem &SIIO®m EOOIES N IMIBOHIEE MNUB)a Hla 19O, Because they are without Christ, they are perishing. 3rd. Negative participles are sometimes used in the sense of without ; the participle retaining the meaning of the verb; as, ©RAIO NONWISG Q0. They came without getting wet. o @DAID ag)®CMIS 0 1OWIO® Ha IR He went away without speaking to me. @b ailademem ¢om 6}.9_!%, They did this without thinking. 178. 619641, This particle is used, Vel 1 5] With the accusative case of nouns; as, @D 66 1BE36® 6alIfAl @Y. They arelike children. @O Hal1oBal @YM®eH ? Who is like unto him 2 ©Y 09I23I0116M 6a196a) @aooo@mnfaaflgfi, There is no one like that king. 2nd. Sometimes with other cases of nouns; but in such instances ag) o) must be inserted between the noun and particle; thus, 200 CIHEL BB agOM HalIeel @00ld o2y, They acted like all other nations. LR@ANBHMIS ag)(M HalIHa) BRAIOD ag)HOMIS 61210y Ver He acted towards me, as to an enemy. 3rd. As the nominative is generally used for the accusative in the case of neuter nouns and pronouns, when the nominative of such words stands for the accusative ag)O is omitted; as, @@ 6 1IAL B2 IBQYE M. Do like that. @V B QMo HaIBEL GOB)ERM. It is like a tree. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 145 @Y BlalN)e HalIfel GV QJaje EVMIOM alm e g 96rerIglal. There has been no day like that, before or after it. BIELIGE3Bo (NQRELIE2Y 0 2 1o Bl lISEL 2 0QMT. out Griefs and Joys revolve like a wheel. 179. @@QJig. This particle has a variety of applications; thus, 1st It is affixed to the nominative case of nouns, in the sense of @ o\@h together, with each other, &c.; as, 6MIMo BVLIRAINVG (moe‘ofl%é,, He and 1 disputed. 60 ULIBo BOAIBAINI G (NICIIB)a,). These and those conversed together. 9nd. When affixed to the nominative case, it frequently gives an ad- verbial sense to the noun; as, 6WIMe BTN HHS alshrIVW]g &hajlSe RERLIE I and he traded together, as equal pariners. @om NAEgWINg alaidle It increased four-fold. @oalind eEIAMI)g 9B CCCIGNOPRE He acknowledged this like a fool. GYWI0o ateMe EOMIVIE OIS |9 & PFld0iay. I cannot give a thousand fanams at once. @GOAION HIEDID EYHAO0RINVI]F IO, N;!' I came with desire to see him. 3rd. It is affixed to the dative case of nouns, and sometimes to ad- \Q% verbs in the sense of for, to ; as, @oAId 2InEBl ol 6O @ 219} | the He did this for the sake of honor. »Old om0 @AICMINIS 6B:ISDD). 1 gave it for, or, to him. ae allaiaNomils @valnd o aoq. He sold it for the expences of the Onam Festival ; 1. e. to defray the expences of that feast. agONMINVS'S 69 (aHICo & 2 IQYMTo? For what are you doing this? -[r 146 A GRAMMAR OF THE 4th. Tt is affixed to pronouns in the dative case; and to the Infini- Ra tive Mood of verbs in the sense of for, for the purpose of, in order to; as, @oalcd odlesom@mIes 8@ Manale @VOMNIE] He soz;glzt a place to sit down. 10 ®oaItd a e desngem@mM@lg 6@ afls 9e2ieel be He made a house to dwell in. ©oOleS @OAIh @BROLE® BHISEMENEOMMIMNINV]S & 10/ ). He went thither for the purpose qf seeing ]z>er, @oald @:gle 19MIWg a9, T/zeg/ went in or.der to bathe: @I a@I5aIMIR]g 6Bk @o®m goalles ealal. I placed it here in order to give him. oNae3de BoAIOMO ENTNOW GV BEEeFAMN@IMNI g oAb )36 HMBEETDSTD. They selected you that you might proclaim his fame. 5th. Adverbs are formed by adding @@ ®J1g to the nominative case of nouns; as, o l @00 BVAIONS EaOMY2AIWF al0EDY. He spake with him secretly. 180. Ao, VA BHRIV]S, 600D, 600DAIIQIS, @elo, %e_\amcoflg. M A@no, OO @, and Galc,are Sanscrit nouns signify- ing cause, &c.: at times they are used as nouns in the Malayalim language and regularly declined. In other cases all the above words are used in- fin differently, with or without the affix @S, as particles, and usually follow a nominative; as, eID MA@ @VAIND CAVMIMNMIQS ). It is through me he is rich. @oalerho 2@ YOT ee0@aWg @0l (NUBla 6190/, He perished on account of his wickedness. ®IOd pale @Dl @0 (0B 6 2 I @ It was through you that he did so. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 147 fini In some few instances these particles govern other cases, thus from the Ramayana, ) a% ANob gats agrd a&ed At eaiow. | Through you, my son went into the wilderness. 181 ® ) @d. This particle is used with the nominative case of nouns and pronouns. If there be more than two persons this particle must be repeated ; if two only it is to be used singly ; thus, 195 @00 ld medlad @A ZAVERHEde a 06Ty, They spake bad words to one another. @Y P62 Bal@o M2ATH GVOAII I sm_mé. Those two persons took counsel together. @oald medlad maedla @osla,). They beat each other oAb e aH mgg’l They struck each other. 4 The particle @8 is sometimes added to @a3)@d, and used thug M) @201d ®eAA8s aldh MHOMIY) Al )al. The hatred they had to each other, increased greatly. 182. &o™o. This particle is used in three ways; thus, (ase Ist As a particle requiring the genitive case, in the sense of the En- glish preposition after ; as, @OOODO 68 6o B8H IO BVAIOMG 6o 0222 After that the thicves robbed him. Al GO Ba 10O B1ed™e @RAID AIOT. ) They came after he went. iff- 2nd. It is prefixed to nouns or pronouns, or stands alone as an inde- age 10 finite pronoun ; in such cases it signifies others, the rest, the remainder ; as, @oalth Btedio ageIalnnIss @ GoOIG g, ally He made it known to all the others. @I @6 a BN BHe§ iSO eveds ® 6N 2100610 6o alOMDE 10N, After he caught five birds, two died, and the rest flew anay. 2 B alF@e 0AIIHS I BV o0 sald IS @l @ 60190 Oa®c BId B0PYge Ol A regiment came here, from which 700 men went away by water, the remainder by land. U 2 148 A GRAMMAR OF THE 3rd. In some cases when it is prefixed to nouns, it is used adjectively X0 with or without the sign of the adjective; as, @oI0h O e A ISEMN OO o 160 o], He caused the remainder of the city lo be built. @oaIOh BN QED CVSHOS OBHIFAINT, He brought the other sheep. 183. @0S®n@d, which is sometimes declined thus @05£06)2.160, is used with the genitive case of masculine and feminine nouns, and with neuter nouns of things endued with animal life. It is often, though in- correctly, used with nouns of all kinds. ag)OrOlom ag)®ho c@rog,oemsb i@, Why do you come to me. He went to her. @20 BVAIBES @G B T a9\, @Y CVNQYOS GVSHOTD 610 I M. Do net go near that Elephant. 098200 N600b0 BOSEneLIBGe AlAMIRIQYeS @VFH 6B H2IOLIEMERNM @AIOD @D IS oeag:fl%i, He commanded them to go lo the Rajah and Dewan. @oaltd UAlIANDO EVSENOLIEN JOMISHOS alOETD 89)) lim He sent three persons unio Shewa. 184. @ 00)@b, a@edd, By, with. Signifying the present possession of any thing. These particles are used indifferently, and require the geni- tive case; as, ag®ho aiBe® GG oo ealteydlel. I have not even a Chuckrum with me. )| &%msmomewrv‘oo a 1001 (MA) alemIcNID §EE. That merchant has good sugar by him. 185 aNornoeel. Ts used literally and metaphorically in the sense of nwalking behind, or following after, and requires the genitive case; as @Y NIV @M,6m0 allomoesl @o..\oc&mflgs. That dog will not follmv a stranger. Mecko e NomIeel almand Goaleds aAA3IES o8 Nrod (rflo‘.maoa'flg{g. If she will not follow you, it cannot be helped. ag)®0bo aNoMIe et MNSHEOMAINM §aldbIle §ENEIdsc. He that walketh after me, will obtain a benefit. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 149 ely [} 186. ©@0@)6)H>, @OD)& @b, are used with all kinds of neuter nouns, except those denoting animals; as, @ald MAEIQYeS @IDIeE: o, They stood by the river. GV 610189 BTNEOHO GVB1OH 6.2 l10M. He went to the water. ) @ CNLIEHIONDO GRS BB faMe Ballaje M S@® with | 1 You must not plant even a tree, near that place. These particles sometimes follow a dative; as, ) MEs 2186 B0 @016 H:. Near the Church. @oaletho aNls B aldldn CUReE @Y. His house is near the road. Saf) 699 is sometimes affixed to these particles; as, % BIF OO GOOD ©8 6 0. A4 paddy field near the jungle. Bi0Y) The force of the above English particles, is often rendered into Malaya- lim by @RSHR, or VAl @Yy; as, @WaIOm MEE2Vods @VSONB|BEMTD ag) EVAID @0 gsion Ol6vovDy. geniu They knew that distress was near them; or They knew they mwere liable to trouble. He went near. @RAIYD BRSO 6210, aago_o%m @I VA @YDy OGlHRMAINLY §OTIdD 6 CNVA0 I 18P Mo, Friend you are at hand, I pray you to help me. GenIse @D al§6Mo VAl GVRNBOM agslale @A a @Raliles auomflgg. Although that city was near, they did not go thither. 187. emé&wm. This particle is used, | 0d 1st With the the genitive case; as, @RI @AIHOLO HMOD QYRVETIOM I & He came against him to fight. 150 A GRAMMAR OF THE @D GYMQYHS HMED 6.2, 1 They went towards the Elephant. i. e.in a direct line towards it ]; 01381 QYNS HMNOD BB (eIMS HOS. There is a pigeon house opposile the Church. 2nd. With a dative; as, ERAID ALMEROM ONEN BSlea o). T]Ley ran direct lowards the wilderness. @0INb GRAIONO AILIHTD 66O E:ED N @M Q2L He placed 1t towards his right hand. 3rd. It is sometimes placed before words signifying straight, or direct; thus, @DAIh HONOD O 6 BeIS a0V He went direct to the Southward. 188. @Sc&)flm’s. Is placed in sentences thus, 1st. With a genitive; as, @V oo CVHBOS @S@J\flfl) 66z, He is among these people. &6 f')" ! @Y @I RHBHS g0 SVIT QO BE™ HOS M=) QITd OBHI8B0. 1t would be well, if you were to build another pillar between each of these. ®Q g 70IB:@OS 60 SQINAD 2 1) OMEZBG 0 (Mg, NS, There are some Cocoa nut trees standing among those Jack trees. 2nd. With a dative; as, vl ®om DS £ 0osn 605N &HSBR. It s lying down among the sheep. 61 @300 VIR BEREdlesM@IoNIsWle @ altd alome. In the midst of our speaking he came. 3rd. The force of this particle is often rendered by the noun being put in the ablative in 6O @b, without any particle; as, I © 23nEaglad FEn2Id HOMETTe|SIO1HS . Plac Wicked men are found among that people. Iion) BYQIP HHT a1ei@s LWMAIIRIVIM:N. There are many rich among those persons. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE, 151 189. e0aad, eneeal, Alem. These particles are used, $ Ist With a genitive case; as, e @AM PENE MNOE@3HS HAT GILS &I §6ere e Q) He had authority over iwo cities. 000 aldale a@®HO OAT 6OBBeSS: Let this sin be upon me. 4 @V BONBRTD §0G)He . He is sitting upon the hill. rect; @I ag)eiHo L @BBOS HANELL ag)AN SV, He raised me above my enemies., @0 1eMo HFaNemo easal aial aJg@@3de OB O NIREoYear There are many flowers tied up and hanging over his bed. 60 MNOMO Fem GvAId oM. They sat over this. @® (3AlQ6s Aem aloone. It flew above the earth. 2nd. With a dative ; as, 40! SDARTTIOM OATH G a BN )@ uogonb QIn0)Q, That Bird cannot fly above the Clouds. chof @O0 meLiIsn 6261 M allges @HrIEles 0. A lamp is hanging over his head. 8 (%) @ cpeiedlom dlom @elnd Gom eaia). He put it over that place. 3rd. In some few instances, the sign of from is affixed to 6®b; as, @l @ aflfecbo eamdoer alemo. He fell from the top of that house. ) &0 G)Q(Gb, is sometimes doubled ; the first being put in the dative; asq O08 HAT FeaLls QIO Sorrow increased more and more. elng 190. goml, M6, gmilad. When reference is made to time, place, the being in any particular state, or, to the performance of an ac- tion, @6m is generally used, and placed in sentences thus, 6mICD 21060 AGBOMOM geml @oAIh alom. He came bqfore I had done speaking. 152 A GRAMMAR OF THE Blne a1Saymlom geml e0Ind @oales 6wl ’ I went there before I fell sick. ®oAIOb oM @AM NINLIOTDED ailetMQje Bald V) He went again to the place where he had been before. GOAIHHO AREMEHOM QoM G &IGe 96 BEIN]L That event happened before his death. ) ageho geml MSOHBHEMo. You must walk before me. 2O, is sometimes used for Q6 nl; as, ath AW oy EYEHOG MO GOAIOD 0 106TDK) He sent the people whom he had before appointed. emo0b g Mrgleas @emesaa AIGM® ¢ Halilo 1 EHFITTDIT 69 Mo CVeHSo HENEI Mo If I do not now get what I was in the habit of enjoying in former alg | days, it witl be a grievance to me. 2nd. Qmr6d. Signifying in the presence of, is used thus, ©D ady)enbo gmited Mlmen @l EIE1ER 20 HOG May you find Javor in the presence of that man. @OAIOHMDO QM 1IOE CCVADIEAENIS HOS 60 IO &N Mo ] You must g() bqfore him with joy. @DIO0d0 AMeE GOAId AZEET). S They kneeled before him. 3rd. Qonilab. Signifying before, in point of time ; sometimes i the presence of, is used thus, 1§ ®oal0h o alom g ad AIBALINREs®IBON. Datn He ought to come before this. I A age0bo gm @ aen6Me. Come before me, i. e. into my presence. @oaiom gmicd §MmRIR MM ag)giIO0HIBe @0 Wo 6BIMe @D 6210, He did more evil, than all those who were before him. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 153 ; %25,], is very often added to @m. @b ; sometimes to Q&m, to signify S beforehand ; as, Jol) GO AMREYNHO HIGI@3OY B2 Golnd @onNah c%é] a1 C ooV, He spake beforehand of that man’s affairs. }'\ @®OAIOS G 1983:360mMm1I00 ag) D a0 eacm gmll @b &5 NeMI] ala dedesMo. Think well beforehand what you must say when you go there. OF 6 Qo ag) "M eI VIE@3EGIS QOMI &S aICWYMN. 1 tell you beforehand that it will rain. The sign of the fourth ablative is frequently affixed to gmI@d; as, oM M) agye0bo gm NN 61a9. Go from my presence. @RAOMO gm NI Goaind 8Seelr0)). He fled from before it. flon\o 191 aem), almNad, ailoed, alo&ab. These particles riner are used thus, 9 ag)ddo o New auo. Come behind me. @RI u@o_flanbo aNmNabd oSiore. He stood behind the cow. M0 SO GVAIOHMO a0 (NSHEOT. The horse is walking behind him. ®od BMsmsRIecho allodad alcre. )6\ He came bekind the crowd. Our words before and behind are rendered thus. Qoo Q_Q('Y)_.éo, Before and behind. Sometimes thus, 2079 ® eoa@es amiay. aloHleyo ©6M2IQ @ (YVo. o the There were men before and behind them. 192. Loy, LlSiad. These particles are used with the Genitive or Dative thus, Ist. &6, must be used when it means beneath, or under, in place; as, @Y HGlelabo FoP @ eaus) [SLacH There is a box beneath that bed. o0 alSldn BleY @Holene There are stones underneath the threshold. X 154 A GRAMMAR OF THE - 9nd. &£)@v, ought to be used when it implies lowness of rank, in- Jeriority of station, &c. 5 as, @oa0h agy®bo P D SV, He is under me. AlalofNedl Yos HFad e 9an)IunnanId 9ene. There are many officers under the Dewan. 193. m929%, is placed in sentences thus, ©V® I T MIOP OB M. Put it down in the room. @o0b 2IgBRNBM mIey e os. He came down from the chamber. @D 2I0D EOIODO MIFP BB, He is below this person. 1. e.inferior to or younger than, &c. 28291 (NI oaDINVM BTN OAM DB ACQSS I @ O HDO mIeE M. The king sat upon the throne, and the others stood below it. There are various other modes in Malayalim, of expressing the sense of this particle; thus, Come when the sun is down. @OONY, AlB6 M 30 Q). 2O@TBYIOM @D @Om 600 He took it down from the tree. 194. ongsenl, DORLY). The English words, bétmeen, betwiat, midst, middle, are rendered into Malayalim by these particles; 1st. They are placed in sentences thus, @O &3 @E..\c&%_@S@Jo MSH] 83T eMIGHNE, There is a channel between those two mountains. @b etelles Mol &G eaflaamlad ©enzIes e They put up a gate in the middle of that hedge. 82901 (@39 &S Qo EDE3HOSWo AORR) @D GO GV IBN R 1)) H6) YD, The king hath made that river a 6oundarg/ between us. 6mME30o 6alddemile AIRlQYes aeRN) eala) @Ol N &HNE. As we went we met him in the middle of the way. 156 MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. in 2nd. ongeQ), is sometimes used thus, @V Q0 @Vato (ViSO GGy He broke the bread in the middle; or, He divided this loaf into two w» halves. @Y Q6E MSHN] &106a 190, T'hat cloth is torn in two in the middle, or in two halves: according to the English phrase. drd. MG, is sometimes declined in 19 @b ; as, ©Y e Msailat LA Hsaeeom. That cloth is torn in the middle. @O @BoAI®BeS ngadlad oo, He stood between them. @oalcd @ algearlento mgalad eo@are. He sat in the middle of that Boat. o @Dodlento msallah am ajedo Ilay ez, There is a tree standing tu the middle of the river. 195. crudlsial, crvdla@vo. These particles are thus used, nsé @)oo adls o 1g6lQes UGGl MmO G BN, My house is very near the church. EHN@AANZDO CVdlaiavn BB oo HENE. There is a tank near the temple. o2y&aS1290200 EIIaNecdoYe croayeRechoge @) dst, Q6SQo MGlel@n atddnlal. Wise men will not dwell near a king, a serpent, nor a fire. GV MBI MNEARHS FAIME@TIOM (NVA)6al GV, That street is near my house. 196. 2 0Qeo. This particle requires a genitive or dative; as, ) @D MOMHO alcmilMm 210G B@ ealel) 688, He made a hedge round is_field. ®@od ag)dho 2100 o, They stood round gbout me. )0 1987, ey lers)l. Follows a dative; thus, @90 O NEn OALNE) Om 6 216U Mo, You must do this for me. 2 o) VB OIS BIRADEMU 186 YT ? For whom are you labouring 2 2X 156 A GRAMMAR OF THE 198. ©@0H@v, is used thus, 1t 1s within the house. Son BOD IO BODHOD @@&_fim. QBB TN L.00 6o HENE. There is water in the boat. @VAIOMDO QP BT BlMe HENE. He has a disease itn his mouth. 199 o800, follows a Dative; thus, b1 @Dd MEOAEs a Mo VI @OA 0210 They rewarded him evil for good. O NIBe ald:0e GOAIOD OB 6.2 1Q)e. He will do this instead of me. 200. e is thus used with a Dative; @Y 6)QJ, 26" 77 ) 6WICD 2 |AISBTICMIAP)267B L0 aleMo HhSe QI @53) . I borrowed 100 fanams to trade with. BHNENBTNOMNIG P I6NE 6TIND @IS BN, I invited him to eat. 201 BB, BHHLIG 0, BT, STDHAIEN , SO HalIeal. These particles are used thus, 1st, With the Dative case; as, BBOYES) GOALIHDO HOCEDIOM MdED CalHM @RI il The Judge sentenced him to a punishment suitable to his crime. @Y B1Q1IM)ER) oo MIZRIATIOM mBe 2OV O YYo. That Dewan is a suitable minister for this Rajah. @DIh @OMO Lo BB ®BAIEN. HAIRL 6.21Q)o. He will labour according to his strength. @YW 2Medy,)om MBI B@e e HEMZ. That man is tall in proportion to his stoutness. @AY @O0 CrVOMLIGYTIOM BT Ha )6l waRe eal Q}YY6NE. He gives alms according to his ability. @M SAHAIE @VAIODO &I c. His business is according to his mind. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 157 9nd. These particles are used with verbal nouns, and neuter pronouns; sometimes 69 is affixed to the particle; as, a@OOM @SB mBONIER: HDIND B@ H00A L. 62wy Slal. I have committed no crime to deserve a beuting. This form implies either that the punishment has been inflicted, or that it is only threatened. @RAID A 19 af@D ag)SHEMENA 6o Ol = He placed the vessel within his reach. @V 2BlSemENIENRALD Mo gene. He hath a disease that will prove fatal. @D BAMAIGNI B, ssa.:ro?g_\g. There is nothing suitable to that; or, There is nothing that suits so well as that. @AM @ I0ED® BED ; GOm QAN §2¥T) a0 QOMD: BdEo. What he said was correct, (or as the English phrase is, was to the ) purpose) and what he may hereafter say will be lLike it. 1. e. The known character of the man for wisdom, probity, &c., is a suffici- ent warrant to just{fy such a conclusion. 3rd o With an infinitive mood; as, @I ag)HHOM @0Sla |90 mdEanle. alom, He came up to beat me : That is, ke manifested signs of his inten- ) tion ; or, as we say in English, /e did every thing short of strik- ing me. Such phrases in Malayalim are very forcible and must be carefully distinguished from the form made with the infini- tive and @@XQJ1g with which they are often confounded. @I agyerrm @2 Slajamaceily alore. He came for the purpose of beating me : That is, he merely came with such an intention, without showing signs of his purpose. )0 @D (NVHHSe HMINBAIIND ®EQIEMAS AiTAI Mo &MDe OBl He heard no news that could cause him to grieve. 4th. MBOAIND0, IG5, and sometimes the other particles are 158 A GRAMMAR OF THE used with the future tense of a verb; in which case the last Q_o'of the future is dropped or not: thus, poi GOAINES A JONOHEOL 6Mo sarwaéhgde Wi There 1s nothing there, worth speaking about. mel @Y OHN@OTD HMNODSe oo B RAL]. There is nothing particularly worth seeing in that Temple. ag)OMITD BPIQYo AIENe 6MICD (UBElHee. I will strive as much as possible. 5th. @&00IeM0a and 83, are used with past participles; as, RO a0 6Mel KISTNBOIEI0 emId allom ol %fl%m. I have sown sufficient seed to obtain 100 parahs of paddy. 6mICD allandlajalerms cruiwlalal. -~ It was not effected according as I thought, cit would be.) @Y &IGjo Mo OHZOIEDRAL. That business is not so as I heard it. 6IND A 10EDDAIEN @D o o218, He did not do as I told him. 6th. Some of these particles are used thus, €04, SBROTRo BOD S IO 1ol @IZRIAIeOM &QM')(Yb 10y, B Hal. No one can go when he pleases, to see the king. @00b EEDAIEN. H2IQeS. Let ham do as he likes. 2 202. o100, and #,0) 2 always require an accusative case; as, @Y HIGOTD al0) BO @V OV AIB)E 60 L4 No danger will happen aboul that affair. @ILIOMO @RI o) QLR CAIL(NIIA) 2]2@ @D HB:ale AU, If any one speak to him about his state he will be angry. inco ag) MM @Gl MITD NVEVIEIBE . What are you talking about. @D HIYOOD @HO)ay @D GoAlOMIS @OIN 2] nsb They informed him of that matter. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 159 f the 203. &6z, The use of this particle, in the formation of com- pound words and with the verbs, has been fully described. When used with nouns in the nominative, or accusative, it signifies cause or instru= ment; as, )| ©32890 1600 Bl OB emInh @om 610 %. 1 did it by the order of the king. IO BB OBHISIZI OB NS @Y UJHMo OAIZ 66T I cut down that tree with an axe. as, 69 o 6BHINE GO ce;s:’)gj”l;zzj. M I caused the dog to bite him. EMID BVLEM ORIENB B.2,|iSo QESIEN I traded through him. 204. «.5), signifying through requires an ablative in @((5{) ; as, @D Al £S5 @oalod ealIw). He went through that way. @valod Bandea 69 allemn adlen®yo QERNIY He fell through the window and died. There is another form made by abbreviating the noun and particle and coalescing the remaining letters; but this, it is to be observed, is a mere it northern provincialism: thus, @I Do BYONLYAS MSOMITH Bl alidse. If.you walk t/zrougk this river you will be drowned. 205. H6s. This particle requires the ablative in &S; as, gé @TOID @VIOMIS HOS i, He came with them. @oud Goalles &210Mea 1930 @oAh ®RALI6NIS HOS (OO .2 |G dHIEI@ (1 When they went thither he was conversing with kim. 00l £ 6)S, 1s sometimes used with a genitive in the above sense, but this is incorrect, and chiefly confined to the Southern Districts; thus, ag) DO HOS . Come with me. £ 68, is frequently used for also, even, and words of a similar import ; as,, 4 @D agOoM @Al eWIRe &eS L] He struck me, and I also struck. 160 A GRAMMAR OF THE @D a106DDE® EWINh &HOS P I also heard what he said. 50 6mINRo @VITEo £,6S @B BHX] L. I and he ate it together. @000 BDAIB OIS HETHM HOS BVD OEI SOLY- She did not even give it to her child. oo CVANATD OF HSERHS HaIQIOm COG BRI al. It will frequently rain at this season. 206. &nla,). This particle has a variety of significations, and is used, 1st With the nominative case of nouns and pronouns, with ag)O™M Wl placed between the noun and 612 ]; as, e BV® NEJ® ag)(™ BAla] GRAlh @, He ate supposing it to be good. @dICh ageho MLEENIBOOL agiM BNl @OAIBNI S WIMORIe a0, I advised him as though he had been my brother. INE) The student will observe not to confound this word used as a particle, with its use as a verb. When placed after a neuter noun in the nomini- tive case, as a verb or participle, ag)™ is not required; as, omI00 ©72320 N0 W @YMIO S By HAI2] ag)OHO B1QJo AMDBAMANY @R o). I placed my gift before the Rajah, and told him my business. the Used as a verb ela | sometimes follows a dative; thus, the @BOAID HHEN@ORNTD ©a1IQ) ML 2o NSQY, M lar 60l OmIPD). U He went to the temple placed four chuckrums at the door (as an offering ) and bowed (before the Idol.) he a$ 2nd. 60J.o,, used as a particle, requires the ablative in @(6{); as, tig PRNd eala) 6mInd @EDAIOM BENE. I saw him in the way. @oalind menbo aNfa eala &@ all@omn &Flo,| He made a feast in his house. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 161 With this ablative ©Q1.2.] is sometimes used as a particle of compari- son; thus, agoMiled eay aleNWalnb GO@ANLY agyM BERAIOM cIlo. His opinion is, there is no one greater than I. ) | 3rd. This particle is frequently used with Adverbs; as, e0afles 6alay 0o @Gl Weawlay agsslad emoch ) OBHISITD 6o 1980, If you will not setile this business here, I will goto Court. used, 4th. ©Qla is very commonly used after the past tense of a verb to I (YY) which the conjunctive particle §o has been affixed, to signify after, o1 denote completeness; as, HMICD O 6ol o@m% (CI)) .2 Q) 90. When this is finished I will do that. 6mID &g o Qo] QIMIe. HM? After I have bathed I will come. These forms are generally united thus, for c’ag@%icam_ozj, &3@6\% 2]. The pronunciation is varied, or rather corrupted accordingly. ficle, EWICYD @D $6)6M3,] laloQ). ik After I saw him, I went. )L”/SO SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 207. As it was necessary to anticipate this subject when t‘reating of the Etymology of Pronouns, and of the Syntax of the Nouns and Particles, the Student will have seen that with the exceptions already stated, the S Malayalim pronoun is used as in English. It is however to be particu- % L larly observed here, that the natives, always both in writing and speaking, use the neuter singular pronoun in reference to neuter nouns of all num- L bers: but such a practice is merely, the consequence of ignorance ; it is as much a violation of the idiom of their own language, as it is in opposi- 35 tion to common sense. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 208. Examples of the use of the personal pronouns, Ist. M% QIRIs agiOM GBOIOD 0106V, He said I will come. 17‘ 162 A GRAMMAR OF TH 60 @0ail6s Halydh0iley agom ®0QINh alCEw) Se He said I will not go there m 923001 60 @ 62 IHYEMNHANN agONNS Hajlo] 6DIND 6.2.1Q)% agiM HOTVEAIVIG A I0HQo 610 B The king ordered me to do this, and I answered that I would 1g)ERE N BYRIILYe (7)) HatIBEHE Mo Homwever it may be you must go @IOD BRVAIOD HEBITH (NEOARIS a OOV Ne T'ell me if you see them 6D Be @V m(’)c&mfl% ag)or @D o O6DT He said he would not gwe it to me MO HalifLl IR Qs I ARAZBHAIND O QLelZ=Y There is no one so wise and learned as you :é @00IH GO OEhISOBHE Mo Guve it to them ou o0 DV EVAIODO GMIIOH HOIENM Qs alIL e 01 QYo OBITEH 2 10N 6Ala| BVALINd BHN HQJe 6ol al This person placed before him Butler, Milk, and Rice, and ke eat he el EWOa|SIOmYe 0NN IAB0I0 @ Qq;o@ro,qj’)mb Be ye neither afz aid nor dzsmcued @OID BEVDNOMN H,6786)a|900 @VAILH YOO VOO Mo 66MEIQ)) When they saw it they had much joy Pe 2nd. Examples of the use of (™9c and 6@3dc, as first persons plural aI1O0M @Y HIYOOD B0l (Mo HOOHH DI 0N ®)o 0O @D @2AT @eAlad o106 And they said one to another, we are really guilty of that thing e15QN@h e oo MY SO OMNMIL ORI LIS, o100 BB B e O ErNNJ. If we enter into Lenka Lenka-Eshwaren will assuredly die 66201600 60630 (NOHMO BelMEee Alsaalalgsre. O Lord, we have broken thy commandments WEB2IMOD BHalBROMN® 0galde HBE0o 61.21Q)o We will do all that master orders L‘}f’:j MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 163 3rd. When @90 is used for the second person singular; or if the second person singular be addressed, the pronouns that may be required )) n‘b - in the sentence having reference to it must be in the same form of the - pronoun and in such cases as the sentence may require; as, @b 600 NeS AUBOM IV MENDO a (N dbo £OS 61 R RN 0 Y B 4 T 0 045 6NZIOBE .. When you come, bring your Book also. @oald e0rMeal merm mam_ncfi:fl%o They looked for you yesterday. iles mMlen B m(zfl‘fi)mflé%fi I mill not give you any thing. ) o (1M1 In this case the adverb @O_QGW S is put for the personal pronoun VY)Y, 29) ailes lere, and @0i16)S there, are thus very frequently used among the higher classes, as honorary words, for the first and second person sin- gular of the personal pronoun. ) 4th. If the nominative case be in the third person singular, or plural, J and have pronouns in the sentence referring to it, such pronouns ought to et be rendered by @20, or m@e2V0 in the case required; as, ) 'j’\ @oI0d @O0 Bm)(RIBTD PENFHAIED A I0TDR L], He sent two of his cown) servants. I Lfi ) Had this sentence been, GoQIHO®O ngOZ\J(Zfl(’Gb DEVE 6 ale)D alO6TDQ 2,1 ; it would mean that ke sent two of his (i. e. of some other persons) servants. fural. GYWIVo ®OMDO HAVANMOAIBOS AIBGMITD OO ) () YOGS That person was encouraged by the word of his friends g @ld ®G53B OSEPO atomiN@d ea_19N. 108 They went into a field that was not theirs. ——— 835160190 BME@3e O3NS S 20IBOS BMOD @) 16H 62107, The people who fled turned back upon their pursuers. e : 5th. In compound sentences where several nominatives occur, the above rule holds good in such parts of the sentence that have reference Y <2 164 A GRAMMAR OF THE to a third person as a nominative either expressed or understood ; thus, cle eI 239NN HIEMAID Bla I Mo ag)rm @D ®OO OO AMOBIIS aIOED. Te told his friends that he was going to see the king. 1(S) = 0986 00 ©00l16S 6aIM@ento evedie @oaind ME33192S alO6TD QB&JD(OG (&0 24 . Aflcr those persons went there they did as he ordered them. M@z Oo 6)a 196 ag) M@ 634 6S H5HIN0IS aa_mé‘;%. They asked their companions to permit them to go. 6th. The regular form of the reflective pronoun for the second person singular is thus, @ICH MO @V® 6 .a16/QI6Mo. Do that yourself. For the second person plural, used in this sense, ("e@3do is employ- ed; as, aNasde me oM @oailes 6.21626Mo. Go there yourselves. For the third person singular the form is thus, MO IO SO 20 BeQo 610y, He stabbed himself and died. For the third person plural @oId @OOM, or MEE3de AN is in common use; as, MEVodn NI M@ MO, Thewr destruction was their own work. @0l @om 621de,) agM @D MECM 006w 4 They themselves acknowledged that they stole it. The plural forms are sometimes thus, @D ®E@Ve MO EHOOBNIVIRM ag)(Y ag)00 al 060D, W They confessed themselves guilty. @0 Id @E@30H @O OOMID agiN @Al N, They themsclves said who they were; or, They declared themselves to be such persons. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 165 5 These reflective pronouns are often expressed by the help of the parti- ) cle @26 for the second and third person singular; thus, 03] @O O @Y AAS ag)SOEHEMe. Carry that load yourself. I @DOAIOD MIOMD ME M @e@:fl 2.1@v). He hung himself. I @oAID @ISO MO @oaldn 6.2190 afgmi). 4 He himself gave out the rice for them. @Y ®IOON MO 61395921 B1BHINE Meho &Il elgl Aol §on He 71imsqlf wounded his onwn leg with an axe. P canmess INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. - 209. Examples of the use of these pronouns. 1st Of ®@»®. Masculine and Feminine Gender of both numbers. @O 6a I |? Who went 2 @OD CODBOS @I ? Whose horse is that 2 6DID EVBOS BVSEOMD Ha s o? ) 1 T'o whom shall I go? eID CV B 60M OB:ISHHNE N0 ? | T'o whom must I give this?2 ®IOD @YD 302y V6OV, ¢ ) Whom did you speak of 2 § @OLIOD @EDWODIS SO® QIIGEA)a | ? From whom did he obtain that? 2nd. et s ag)® is seldom declined; it stands alone or is prefixed to other words; as, a® a B NI, Which cow is best 2 ag® Q@ 696m9 @I ¢ e Which is greater this, or that 2 166 A GRAMMAR OF THE ag)® COQNEIAYD @ICh eI ? To what place are you going. oy WO @ S ag)® SN Q_‘e.flazi? Which Elephant drew this timber 2 o.g)o..l(\’b, &c., are placed in sentences thus, OB BAIRN® agyih MEJAIM IR ? Who is the best of these two (men.) ag)2Co 60(a)dI00 alOVT ¢ Who was she who thus spake 2 3rd. g, is placed in sentences before the verb, or after nouns and Pl’Ol’lOU_DS 5 as, @M 6HE3Dc B9 ag)(Y ? What is that to us 2 6E300 ag)YD) 6o 16QeNg? eve What shall we do 2 O af)(Y) ag)OM @I 639_195?%. What is this, he asked 2 @d agyYNOMIN g Qlorve? For what did they come ? tle agYNOM 02 IOD CAVONIRHE BT What are you lalking about 2 A a1060DE® ag)(Yo) ? What was that you said 2 ag)O"o), is sometimes prefixed to nouns, in which case, 6@ is usually In this connexion it corresponds inserted between ag)(Yd) and the noun. to our phrases, what kind, what sort ; as, 690D ag) OB} mm%nfi @ YT ? What kind of a man is this? n oo HIYTH™M aeYDIG SIS ¢ What evil is there in this thing 2 oo AT a@O(VDIB o IHN]QYHS®I B ¢ From what sort of a bird does this feather come ? A O EBICATDIT 60 MEn 60 @ AINIQIBBNTE ¢ In consequence of what sin has this happened to me? MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 16 { When ag)s5le)o or @V o is affixed to @YD or agy®, and the fol- lowing verb is put in the past tense with @b they correspond to our words whoever, whichever ; as, @O0 agissrlale ©AdOS AT @) 68 o Whoever may come here will be beaten. @DOIVIAYe BAIEL §.210Y 0@ GoAIM @ el &ge. Whoever may work will get wages. @Y de ag)SHlalc GWa i@ AIMITh 6mIh Goalom oo a0 ) B6 0. To whomsoever distress may come, I will assist him. and oo BVMBE T ag)® ag®hlete GV HI50d SalIVoch 2 1@TGaISs0. Whichever of those Llephants go into that Jungle he will die. ag)Y0) followed by a verb with @®ayo affixed, corresponds to whai- ever ; as, ®ID ag)(?) 4 106DDIRL 6mITD EPANOS 6o iId:e. Whatever you may say, I will go there. H The construction of these Malayalim sentences sometimes varies a lit- tle; as, 69 (a0 ©21QLAId EDO agslaye (g icngl. Whoever he was that did this, is not good. goMds, LB(@,A1IVNSBHAIND agi2IOd ag®iays agOMIS 6D @ ool . Whoever it was that did this to me, is my enemy. ally 60MED (af1WQBH QI ag)lom ag)®silate 6mICh Eom nds 6)£:95 BEL YYD, I give it to whomsoever I like. The use of the interrogative particle 6, and the manner of placing it in sentences has been fully shown. (See para 163.) s DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 210. Examples of the use of these pronouns. (v @VO @IV A I0TT? @VAIND @ Who said so 2 That very man. 168 A GRAMMAR OF THE goaltd @Y BMER @M om eEBIEaln. This man brouglzt 1 from that house. ®@valOh G0 & (*momba(zfl%g. He spake about them. EOm @AM 6BISH BN M. Give this to him. e IOd M@ 0O BieA . VAL Saldd Qo 6210 After he came they went. Examples of the use of the demonstrative particles @) and o@o. oo a (NP dho OBITEHaL) @0 Do €:dHINZQID. Take away this book and bring that. ©W HIYo aa_sc%cu& 0D MmO GV @HOT. These are the persons who did that thing. oo () @CAIHGHI00 (LA IV, This woman is better than that. ©VWIBHOo 6 afles alomerg |90 oo &IY|EIOG & Ao a@®oMIs 62198l When those persons came here they asked me about these tlzings. These particles, affixed to @0 or CG@CG&)_@)QO, are used as the ho- norary pronouns for the third persons singular and plural; thus instead of saying @-Q_‘(yb 621D WD6Ma ®mEOM, we must say o@o &0 S AIQ® Do MECM. What this person did is good. Sometimes instead of @0 person, 63a0o body, is added to the par- ticle. This form is considered more respectful than (@@69 ; as, &Y 63 als @D &é;fl%. That individual ordered it. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 21 1 Examples of the use of words of this kind. emIOh 016390 EIAIEL 621D O&BIE ag)eDO & ©)E300dn APy AITYIIB)HeMM, On account of my doing the Sircar work, I cannot attend to my o affairs; or, my business is prevented. oo BAIMo GVLIHESS B IH N, This is their house. i\ MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 169 - @RIt BN ERES VBB GORIFEDO &ab ag) alle0QYo 6 aiw),. R He delivered all his property into that person’s care ; lit: hand. ngOhOYe MNOODOWYe. VLS. @lgond BG ©IBFIA 96z, There is a king to settle my and your dispute. oo B0 COMIHH VIMNERQYSBDA]. ‘3 T'his money is neither yours nor mine. EOMEn AIBAIINGED BAlje RIDED 6WICD o) SOD8H . I only took the money that is to come to me. 0@ 6DERoBN o 1ONE 3B QIlSIENO. This is our ancient house. 6ME@IBoBNEH ©GUjo OIS alAIs IR )2 gens. Many have grown rich by our money ; lit: have increased. ) B RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 212. The relative is used in sentences thus, 7§, @D HIYOTD S al0DAId 690 NeS e Ao, y ho He who spake of that affair, came here also. stead GV HIYOHO®D S0 )2 alOSTDHAIENDO A @ @aim o O A JOTD H1alIN 10 RO, The son of the man who spake of that affair, has gone to Trevandrum Y pa‘ @b 6.2.1QOmISQYo GDAIND @AV, AR He knew all they did. 6mIh BHENEIZED ol ML®Al. The cow that 1 have seen s not good. HHBAIOTD BN O SIOD ANBED)HDIS HOS MNSHHB® Keep no company with men who have not the fear of God. eI @MY Bomdlenbo eced. € ) & ge gomMI @M 2IQg L1EIEHM 2190 6HIND O 0 BN 2§60, //)il‘ After I became a Christian, I cast awuay the gain I had before unrighteously obtained. Two or more relatives may belong to the same noun. In that case they Z 170 A GRAMMAR OF THE follow each other, or are separated by other words: but a verb cannot be placed between them ; as, CNMIB)2,) alISOM &1d evaliles §ens. The parrot which speaks and sings is here. @20 N6s 6a130) BV Bens 20edy ), e ; or, ®@2aileSs §alddhQo GVAIOM BHIENMDH QYo H2IW), O %(E@dfib Q0. The man who went there and saw him came. INDETERMINATE PRONOUNS. 213. Examples of the manner of placing these words in sentences. 1st Of 6386 or B BOQYo 6 QLIOYYe. The whole came. @D Sdn 000 &:esvm. He sold all. & X BBoQo o fPa, 62190 The whole of the crop hastfailed. @R agebo @) BeaQe HRIEN2 HPETY. He stole all my money. @DAIMBEB® TN SEQo @D HOOR O FTD. They took a little from all ke had. @IOD BHIEMVOMEO®IBO Qo EOVIERED I, AlL that you see is mine. OO IBOQo EDE=Code AICYT, All this happened to us. 1 2nd. 0g@gJI!@o. Mas. and Fem. plural, is used thus, i @Daid agalI i@ §oailes 9868 ? agaldiBe QONE. th Are they all here? All are here. il ®RAID @GS g SPALBESQYe QJMIIOEH: (oM fo &g200 BRAIOD 0gLILIOOY. @AlevNslel. i W’lzen he stood before them all, he did not know the whole of them. Dl oo 62190 @DQ & a@RII LB o @o&&flgflonb @) Q). This rice will be sufficient for the whole of them. 6mIND BVAIENIS agLIIAIORIFo (VE] LEMABIN. ad Q6TVD). I gave them all excellent advice. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 171 e - 3rd. ag)gddo, Neuter Gender, is placed in sentences thus, A ———— I @0 agiele OBIEZAICV. He brought all. @Y 2UNE@:00 afLiIs B O 190 - The whole of those Beasts ran amway. 0Ty @DOb 005 gBNG@20o agigyde OAISIEE6T. ;)m He cut down all these trees. oo O8®BOo agLITMOMOYs agiddo 6atdFeonn 6a_19W0J), T'he leaves fell from the whole of these plants. @D (Do HO® &.Ocbe a@gdde Ao GG He put manure to the whole of these plants. O ng)g%omo’flam&bo%o 4@ IR, Thiss better than all. oo AN1SE O ag)a @AYo c@'@g’)‘@aéo a19@OMFNE, There are people Living in all these houses. 4th. ag)g]’o, abbreviated and prefixed, or affixed in its full shape, to @0 Qi is rendered into English by our words eack one, every one; thus, ag)5yIQIec @ (a)BI0o 62 166 e, Lvery one must do so. e01e aa,c%mf)mnrb ag)2 %0 HOBAIO @D @M}Drfig:floe&e. Every one that docth good will please God. w= gomlem allcoicnSleacmalod agate ©6 IS aRlah) oM B WYeo. Each one who believeth this will avoid evil. It is to be observed as a general rule, that when pronouns in the sentence refer to such nominatives as signify each one, every one; however the Malayalim forms may be made; such pronouns must be doubled, and if the pronoun be made with any of the cases of @2a_irvt, the first is put in the nominative and the last in the case required. When they are m formed with any of the cases of @90vb; both the pronouns are, usually, put in the case required, or one of the cases of ®30vb is supplied by @ 6, used as a particle; as, 1 ]a may ama%nb agadle ®DAIMAIODO, or @mOMtO @ 60O o@D (@)£900 or\soefimflc.d 663 0@ OO BLIM (@) B0 MSOBOVEH. o No good man will walk according to his own pleasure, but accor- ding lo the command of God only. Sz 172 A GRAMMAR OF THE ag)2490-10R5 BRAIMAISHDO $IG)@3e e il 2 190)6Hee .. Each one must mind his own affairs. a0 @ODO MOMIO :IYIERO @dla 09239 allexmos asn_muu’)( 16 @6 No. Each one must i@“orm the king about his own a airs. ag)ay? ERIMHS 0 @@ BONVAa,lBOM 6niletniaes 6@ 65 MEIHL. Each sect made the images that it is in the habit of serving. @D a1 Hs0e agile AIMER{I0e @V@MIOM OB CAQNEA @YD &) Ao (M. When the whole of the cows came, each went and stood at the place where (the people were in the habit) of fastening if. 5th Examifles of the use of @(GB(GYU\(Y\), &ec. OO0 IO, One (man) came. @oAB)TH AEBANOD @@ JHIVo IO, One of them said so. @Y P)BGT BB 6o 19 One qf those women went. @0 afls&glad & mMiad o) «19QiDOBIesH. Live in one of those houses. oo HBIVBFI EONIOMO Bhrel BSleDHea IR, T'he leg of one of these horses is broken. @6 6 a® 610190 IR) @D @@ e (M al2020 @ EY) B One of the five that went he put in prison. 6th The method of using &6@ B, &ec., in sentences is thus, SODIBERM a LT AIGe G6ODIODI (@S0 @D N, /1 Each one’s word was different (from the other.) @01 BORIBOEDM @Y aleMe Al®e 6OBIS S0 He gave five fanams to each. E0DDOHRINDINM B0 amcog;;?ro')oessamoéoo While thus speaking about each. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 173 Mo These pronouns are often used with plural nouns or pronouns thus, @D 0g)8{IUBo BO0IBETHMINS VI O™ B 6z. 1R) Each of them saw the king ; or, they all saw the king one after the other. 3les0o BOOIBONWINTS OSBRI O0aEIe .. 168 You must all go into the water one bg/ one. @D ag2RATWMIM ayg@@sde B60INMIRNG aida ag)S e B No. Pluck all the flowers, one by one, from that tree. ;rm In the same sense may be rendered the following sentences. e @Y HOAIUIMNNORIEO @AM AIBHDO PRI @YD) oM 29001 @daldn aldho OO0 @VEHOS @Y )P MNo. Remove those qfficers every one from his place, and appoint others ir their stead. @ ©IERIB02IO ® DO OO Al B lad aide ai1S)2]ad®IeNs @OAIMAIeDO I erdICCOM@YD 602Td 69 BN, Those kings sat each upon his throne holding a sword in his right hand. @oIMaltd menbo mento adldlecidn 6alreBemMe ag)™MN 08I il The king commanded that each man should go to his own house. @b ®mEO OO GYYLE3Bo ag)$OD GDAINA ) OO BIQITD CPQNEIAIOLIHE 61alINBGH:EMNEANT 09 23901 c&gzfl : thus, The king commanded that they should each take his arms, and ga to his several guard. €0 7th. Examples of the use of QQJD@RDOGBM(YB, &e. QIOIBEDD ag)selale GVAIOG HENSIT e a0 ena )3 O® 60 (b%@m@')gg. Whoever may see her will certainly love her. QIODITBOD ag)sh Lo eoailes ai@alnd amgg 60T AINeS. Whoever will, let him come. 174 A GRAMMAR OF THE emITd VIMe aNeIwWaINV)g WIOMIOM ag)selale 6.0,y Sl ) I have done nothing whatever against you neral IODIDODD GPRILY &8d &Sapad agenbo afl st @d QO B® refers W hoever may get intoxicated must not come to my house verbs he co 8th. Examples of the use of 2OCOIBGEDOD, ACOQIND lgjadl o, eoomaind, o leid, and aead ©D QI 6\&.!')@))00__59(})0 QHOOITBBROD QIO When he went another came eDIOTL Qam) HEME® oo a NI, dre MOV BHOOINMEL] What I saw before was this very book, and none other. “Y 6500 A @0oIObd Al of th This person came, the other did not e ealg) males gz 2500®m 6mIND BNy The large box is here, but I did not see the other aigjalob aigjan e85RL e ag)d &M 2 a6 @EneM. Whoever may ride in a palanquin my son must carry 2 QIZIS@De QILIMe &HEMEIT @AM @om ©@IK)2 and 6 6196V Z60_1 s trang If he see any thing in any place he will steal it. lat gom 62382 joi0d eemMaIth agom emICh @GIEVS! QB N2, 1ty I know who ke is that stole this @00 60MAIetO BB agym 6D QemI mecMm @V BT Ve €Xan I knew beforehand he was such an one’s son 8pecy @2 L @l@d o Nead acrve, aNeid Q_l(YY']@d a dif Some of them came and some did not. hus ] DN o0 @VICE)Q 2 Iy dod D @b 2 e enaies 9ons Some of the things you want are here 690 610t o__\"éo a181@e @OAIOS ©6N3IN WO When I went, many (persons) were there ‘»&lge MALAYALIM LANGUAGE., 175 B;\Ego SYNTAX OF VERBS. 214. In reference to this part of speech, it is to be observed as a ge- neral rule; ) o) Ist That when there are two or more verbs in the sentence having reference to the same time, past participles may be used for the former verbs, the last verb is put in the tense required, and the participles must be construed as verbs in the same tense as the last,* thus, Jé‘fi(}.l @Al Miles M @O0 & eW ailod il 6 0M 0B QY)o 1L, He came here, sold his horse, and went away again. @D oMo OISO IS FlTd goShas. i That tree was cut down and put into the fire. When the past tense of the verb ends in €0, that tense is used instead of the participle, but to be construed like the final verb; thus, @oaind @oales el memto e:doey alloo o a oM BB Qo 6.2 1Q]o. He will go there, sell his horse, and come again. @O ®: gl HOOC) ODITB. fo. They bathed, came out of the water, and wiped themselves, 2nd, When instead of participles the form made with the verbal noun 2 and ©2.Q| e is used, such forms are employed for all transitive and in- transitive verbs; and by some few writers for the passive verb also; but this latter is not agreeable to the idiom of the language and therefore not to be 0l imitated. @oId BHNEnQ)e HSE0QYo HNEIH QYo 921y, They eat, lie down, and slept. fem Verbs represented by this form ought to be of one kind, as in the last example, where all the verbs are intransitive. If a verb of a different species come in between two or more such verbs; it requires to be put in a different form, but the tense must be considered the same as the others; thus in the following example where all the verbs but one are transitive. @b EOMOW Hdla{lsoe MemMelTd OegHQo DbY@ a1 oM @@ e EVREn Qo 6.0 1Q}o. He will bathe the Elephant, tie it in the shade, come again and 0 loose it. % See para222, on this subject. 176. A" GRAMMAR OF THE 3rd. Intransitive verbs frequently have the past participle of ©@g; ten crvo prefixed to them, in which case they give an adverbial sense to the noun with which they are connected; as, @D mgfia_mb &) ). He became good eI emfiq@)mb GO @m’?%. I became poor. OF THE PRESENT TENSE. 215 This tense is used, Ist To represent present time; as, onl 6mICh BOAIeS OSBRI ; or, HDICD BVAIOG OCTY a0 B (YR, I love ker ; or, am loving 7&61‘. QZRAINOD BVALIOMNIS NMVIB)EE (Y2, The master is conversing with him. @DAIOT 6)a 190N, He is going. 2nd. When in Malayalim replies are made to such questions as, what is he doing, 6962 must be added to the past tense of the principal verb, and if the answer refers to some business that requires the standing posture, the present tense of the verb (Mley O o stand, ought to be added to &&»I6M3; as, the @DAIOD ag)D) ag)SHBOD ¢ What is he doing 2 @oaloh & 6963 afl%m@‘ He is digging ; lit: he stands digging. @®oaId 6Iod OIS O1BINE Mgy T, They are c?(tiingjire n‘qod‘ Tng If the business requires the sitting posture, the present progressive form is used; as, @I BN BBHIENEN D] BB (Yo He s weaving. ' 3rd. @90, annexed to verbs, qualifies them thus, Ser 1st When affixed to the future tense of a principal verb with &8s efy €79, or, more commonly GUHRJ | or 58 added to it, the meaning is pre- paration for any thing; as, @D @@ 6.0.1Q R0 ). He is prepared to do that. - o MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 17 { Dty The usual form in which witnesses, in courts of justice, close their writ- 0 the ten evidence is thus, oMM ©EBo AIOMITH BHEIM HalIBL) OBHZOBISH 2I Qo crO2AM 2 00D BHallg agal 60lay EIAD @I Q The Kychet which Ramen wrote and placed (in court, ) acknowledg- ing that, if any discrepancy should be found in his evidence, he is prepared to receive punishment. lit. If there should be any dif- ference in this, ke is prepared to hear what is commanded. Ind. @028 or @YY), affixed to the infinitive signifies being W) on the point of doing any thing; as, ) @DAIYD m(élgjooowl He is upon the point of death. @ol0d 6o®m 6210909 BBE . He is upon the point of doing this. EO® ARG I2090/). what This is just about finished. 1cipal Q8B o QEIAIINININBNE6 YD, ding T'he Boat is upon the point Qf sinking. o he 3rd. When 673 is added to @90, and both affixed to the infinitive, the meaning is habit; as, @RAOD AImIQENE, He is in the habit of coming. @RAlOh @) e imallem @05la|2QNE. He is frequently beating that child. Q@0 added to the past tense -of a principal verb givesh the same meaning; as, eMIND BN MIQe 6O @ am%m@m. ,sgi'\'e I am in the daily habit of doing this. 4th. The present tense is used when, in relating past events, the verb serves to point out some circumstance as existing or happening at the time pn referred to by the past tense; as, U 1/ & @D HMIBH) ag)3OENBOM H6M86 900 BV O6N3 IJI’L" 6189 ST When they looked and saw that there were, lit: are, eight, they gave him two. 2 A 178 A GRAMMAR OF THE 98390 QBT ag)OM) 6309:_&},&3.3?60 @oaloh @oalem ag)®OOLIMNMINS eraice. When he heard that the king was, lit: is coming he went to meet him. 601gHo 6aIE@IOM 4l & IAIBDBEID GDAIONIS al0 e0mEe |90 @HDO BEX) MUl alenldde agOm ola] @t Goalles ea s When the watchmen told him that the water was, lit: is, rising, he went there supposing his crop would be destroyed. @O @DV(e-HI00 GYHBON ag)M @oaId ERSR )4 ®2190 @I AeN=Iem OB . When they declared that it was, lit: is, so ke was speechless. PAST TENSES. 216. The manner of using these tenses, has been already so fully de- scribed, as to render it unnecessary to do more than to give a few exam- ples of each form; thus, OB MUA) @6 0g)Ale Lie 190IV] ag)oM 5200 If S (6742026 (SO @0e0 dhSa|9NIVg @ Wailad 2198 &:S)a alaw. When a Brahmin heard that they were about placing the lea'vesfor the feast at Wykem, he jumped into the Back-water in order to swim over and was drowned, lit: drank and died. This refers to the story of a Brahmin, who, fearing he might be too late for hisrice if he waited for a Boat, jumped into the water and was drowned. By the leaves are meant plantain leaves which they use as plates. Engl Lt @O® a gy o JEQEIBHS HAT AETD el MUAW @IV YOV, It was at the time when dew was falling upon the grass and flowers. a@e0bo @valoh adlesnm cvawen ewich e@od) 60695 GVRNGON. I was at Calicut at the time of my father’s death. @b BHMEMOTIOMN 6 1986mde DI GV e 66\ IENE BN, While they were going to eat, I was looking at the dance. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 179 aY @M O MlEe BB B0V 6EIFOW 2 lge. He hath sent me a horse. b, 60D ag)0 MIIRNg GoalaNbo alpalem @EIed) a0 SR gom I have waited his coming for many days. o, o) eI @oNNeSHe OelI@alnd (omieladles . I have resolved to go thither. @AIOND0 HIYIHOD @BOla aleife |9Fe 6D OB 1y S6v 29 @ o, I had often heard of his business. @00 0cde H2lQmIV]g B 6mIS. §6BIV M. She had a small garden. 92390 60 adlo s A@e a2 gmiled 65 §06e |90 T}' Je— 630 ac&éooe@rvfi@\;) ®Ido. xam- I had before heard that the king would come but now I hear nothing (abont it.) y 1o If @0 QN®) B8 o be added to the perfect tense, it denotes uncertainty; ds, 5 @ @RI @0(a_)BHI00 62156720016 E6e. Perhaps he has done so. es for det 10 FUTURE TENSE. 0 late 217. The Malayalim simple future tense, which corresponds to the wned» English future and future perfect tenses, is placed in sentences thus, 1st. 6MICD VAL agf WO 2QaS) wailes ai. Vow The answer to what I wrote him will come here. &IV HPEDD OB 6MIND GVANES 6laltddso. I{)‘)[m I will go there after the reaping o) 6 Alcho QIGBOM@IOM Qerml HITD oo ay® @)ERo. I shall have finished this house before the rain sets in. a @D BAIOVTRIOM A6l 6D B ABEIOR 6B 003 (e} Before ten days 1 shall have killed that Alligator. D 180 A GRAMMAR OF THE v 9nd. A future continued action is denoted by adding 6&96ME)@)H6e to the past tense of the principal verb; as, VO ag)sH)eje AIOMIT DI ag) DO HOIAL 0210y 632620 B6 0 6t Whoever may come I shall continue doing my waork 11 § ag)OMEe @SSO NIV B0 BFIHIOMINE] O P60 Whatever obstructions there may be the river will eontinue flowing The whole of the above sentences may be expressed by the verbal ne- gative participle of the principal verb, and the future negative of D166 oo added to it Sentences made with this form are more emphatic, and denote a greater degree of certainty than those made by the simple future ) affirmative; as, 983901 QIIOD @(zflcemw'),% The kzng will come; lit: The king will not be without coming From these remarks it will be observed, that in Malayalim two nega- tives not only destroy one another, but that they are more than an equiva- lent to a mere affirmative. When correctly used they render sentences very elegant, and more forcible than they could be otherwise expressed 3rd. Examples of the use of the future tense with the first person sin- gular and plural to denote mzllmgness @Y 6Ll eI ag)SHnIo I will do that labor o @) 6\(7“@3 6V0) 353 0o OB IZALID®I. W will bring that pade ciple 4th. Sometimes when ©6M2, is added to the present tense of the prin- cipal verb it is used for the future This form being, found in Native writings, and sometimes spoken, is here noticed for the purpose of informing the student that it is incorrect and ought to be discouraged; thus, ) @ (@800 601} 90h 60 (160M @05 PO 613 If you do so I will beat you. aflomInBlm;mnmBmbeIssm (UBl0IR 2 IC3OMISI U6 uoggisfimmb MIB A QYINVERIM B BT O QIO ISTDHOIEDT M 3 OIS 6 Wo Weranamadityanunenen with joy replied quzcli to Shree-Ramen- chundren, I mill assuredly seek the Goddess Nar e771a729yana7zekz/ and inform you MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 181 o 5th. @®YQNAB6 0, added to the future tense implies doubt; as, £20290 @O0 6ME] 621N 662I0NGB8. "3 Perhaps the thieves will steal his paddy. 6th. The future indicative is commonly used for the indefinite mood in such sentences as the following, )OS @DIOd Ao ag)oM GoAL0h a06 emInd @oaienho alise aflvaiondlalay. g He said that he would ; lit: will, come, but I did not believe his word. | ne Dl lMPERATIVE‘ MGOOD. , alld fure 218. The Imperative is used in sentences; thus, e ™M €006 G )H. You come down. 6D agsileje @AM agsleje @RAID agsale @M nega- 6.2 1QMS. :1uivas Let me, or him, or them do that. tences Naezdo 6o 19810, You go. el Ml Oaldb. 1 §il- Let us (plural) go. 2nd. When there are two or more imperatives in the sentence, parti- ciples are used for all the verbs but the last; thus, paddl,/ 03] @ailes e oM eom @A OBISHe. pl 1= Go there and give him this. Ml@ade ©62 GO0 BHEIME e (ay@I6r75l.a @Ol Gl 15 oM eratlaecvadla, @valeamis Qflom%ac&s oorrect Qo Novd. Reverence the commands of the Lord ; love, serve, and pray to Him. 106G | oMe AN, BO@H QIR NERMAINd EO® alOQYOM &I QIes369 MOla] MM ailandla] alleom e )8 e 6EE3IS MODOS. ) Let the reader of this Book think well about its contents and give it to me aga.in. Jamen 1l e!”: @D RS Hlai@e 6DAIOS AIOOE Mo afitM al0HNEMo, ) Tell those two persons to come here. R —— 182 A GRAMMAR OF THE 3rd. Examples of the use of the polite Imperative, permissive, and precative forms. 6mI0h agpallassn al10BEMEOAN &hailaIaje. Be pleased to say where I am to go. 6m&E@3do 6O® 621015 AN, or, 6DE30o eOm 92100 6Qlo,, or @.Q_JG\.QQJ)% QlOeSs. Allow us to come after doing this. g0 @ 0NZaD Be19malIoh Bp™M HEWITH 69889 ) @O, Be pleased to permit me to go home ; lit: It were well if I got per- mission to go home. 06012 agenbo Elme 6EG. BRI Algen 910 A) QD) B0, I pray you to cure my disease ; 1it: ff the Doctor would remove my disease it would be a greal benefit. ~ &Y o. WERRIMOM B dhIGlo 6Ol NI la{] 2 L = | @6 | Oh master be pleased to effect that object for me! 200IBo EOMIBe HNDIN) (3l MO EOMlde O N WIB:OM @D 6ODAINW]S HIBEN)) BIIOHAMIS &HOS (NIVIWEM 3 ag)®oM © HX 68689 6M . 1 have no other help, thou alone art my salvation, there¢fore Oh Nara- yana, (07*57vlzaever may be the tutelar deity of the temple, ) save me. This is one of the Muntrums from the Shastras, used by Brahmins when they enter into the presence of the idol in the temple. From hence it follows that a Brahmins faith if fervid, is not very last- ing; for he will repeat this form before the image of Vishnoo, at one time, and if interest call him will repeat the same before an image of Shewa, or any other Deity, immediately after. @y al0la] @O6dHn OHBINBSIWON @0emIIS OAA 6\@355*,9)@0 6 QL6 Mo, Be pleased to pluck out the arrow, and in love, gently touch thy ser- vant with thy holy hand. RJI h)‘p. @@, Inreference to the Deity signifies Zoly. When applied to a mere Cany man, excellent ox honored ; as, ingj ©223900160M0 @6 dEs. The honored hand of the king. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 183 | a’ld INDEFINITE MOOD. 219. Examples of the use of words of this description, 60D B I0®HAMSHODIGe BV 61a 19BN & HlQe. (W I That person can go as far as this one goes. 6DIND @O @oNES 6.210IB ©Y) BIGle VILI B8, If I myself go there, I can accomplish that business. Ao 2} al16moe MBIV IBOMITL MNes B2l sl eas) cfimfl&@@é’ef). f per- If you have money you can 8o and purchase any thing. )OO BNt 6DITE ©BHe 190188 M I (Yo b 00 I ought to succour my family. Mf)aa@%f)@g?_)l‘)g“o QINTEXe WIS 7o) @GUQJW@O@&&%( YN @I (VY0 e ny We should serve God at all times. PU— @I @ (b0 61.216QINRmIBN. He should do so. AAA @I H2IOYUEZOMN BIGe OB BOCM GO, This is the thing you ought to do. pd M) 01011988 AIMIRNB M ag)B3 @d (I Nds G HAlal () S MO, 6. e —— If you had been learned he would have®™ gwen you that employ. Nara- MM B AMAOEIRNBOMNITE SVANES 6o 10N @A e Mes OM BHoTE @Om HBSIe O, S yihen If you had been so disposed you could have gone thither, have seen him, and have purchased that. - Jast- @I ®oaes eolom ERAL6ENIS 62.198).2,]900 @D > {ime aloh G @o. ewfl, 0r If you go there and ask him, he will give it. ~ — Q) ICY YO (e )] RBAEN02IHH LDV No 6.01Q) el @oQlde N 00 QQH%, Although you do good to wicked men they will not be grateful. ng ser= % In reference to past time, determination of purpose connected with z; hypothetical case, as even though the king had forbidden I would have gone, g eI cannot be expressed in Malayalim by the indefinitemood: in such cases the indicative past time, connected with a variety of expressions is used thus, 0o &HIYYTBIM ag)d@IB AleM®IWo 2 e agFlajo mgy cg&lejo smoch ER® BRAIM 6dIFA. li lit: Whether there is any opposition to this thing or not, I gave it him. ! A GRAMMAR OF THE 184 INFINITIVE MOOD. 220. With the following exceptions this mood is used as in English thus, 2 apler. 63_0__15%9(‘30 a_.\(flgjjfljb. Learn to do good. wher @raloh eafes @ @VAIeE $I6NmINd EYE: (. to e The purpose of his coming here is to see her. @ealnd 0o afls alglood msa. may He began to finish this house. ls @Ralnb ®algITh aadleneg|$al0h BRI MAL. EXpr He is not worthy to be loved by her. 801, The following forms are frequently used indifferently with the infinitive; requ and may be rendered into English by the indefinite mood ; thus, @oaloh ©o®m ©0ANNeOBee M BIMINg 0alles alom; or, @RAINd @om @GR 19I5 eoailes Qlomm He came here that he might make that known. @R B:EleEeenzseM alnIRlls GDOSIT Satow@l. He went to the river in order to, or, that he might bathe. ASlecho et mE)UeIg HSOMIEY BVWOMO Bde 2111 ) BHISOHBENE] ALIBo. but {} Although yourfield is lying uncultivated you must pay tax for it. em0h @oaeMm 0 &XladecgemmmMIly @vailes 6 o100, T went thither to save him. The Dative case of any relative neuter pronoun is often used for the infinitive. In some instances either form may be employed indifferently, No rule however, without but this is by no means the case always. 3rd numerous exceptions can be given on the subject. To know how to apply Separ each form correctly, requires an acquaintance with the language that can only be acquired by the Students own industry. @oatnh prs2r0NeMm @&IENOM@ICM NIWEOE: 1018, 6190 ). In He went to Nagercoil to see the Rajalz. iifllple goalles @M@ gMlds LB MOMISEH 66>l 0¢ fy] Aag)®MN 0 SHN Do, of lett God who hath given me power to come here, will preserve me. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 185 RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. hthus, 221 In addition to what has already been written on this subject, 5 (M when treating of the Etymology of relative pronouns, and participles ; it is to be ebserved as a general rule that any number of relative participles may belong to the same noun; thus, 1st If the noun has two or more relative participles attached to it, Gy expressive of different actions performed by the same or by different per- gons, the form made with the verbal noun and 6.2 Q7o in the tense itive; required, is generally used; thus, @Y BB 6P QJo Ailm Yo 6.2 1QIOM (@@,%c@;bo 1165 @o_?;es QIO EMBAN a QD 11165 Tell the men who are ploughing and sowing in that paddy field to come here. GO Ad o NSPeYe @AMAD QIIBB QYo .01 ) Q16 gp_o.?@s QIR ME Mo, Bring those persons here, who fished in the river and gathered sand. Hde 2nd. In other instances when several relatives follow each other, all but the last are put in the past participle, as in the case of the verbs; thus, i aNes M a1 @DAIOM §HIOD BenE I saw him who came and resided here. VB LI Je HENEAETTNAN BB 663 AIBR G eI @y (W B6 M6, I the I trust in God n'/zovsees and knows all things. yenfl}'; Wil 3rd. Relative participles belonging to the same noun, are sometimes x‘lthOUt separated by other words; as, by QIOM QITDAIMe 0T A SRS O6aImah coailes ‘ve thaf ove ) -~ The clever child, who came and told the story, is here. L In all cases when the relative participle stands alone, as in the last ex- ample, the open vowel sound of @0 at the end of the participle ought to be fully expressed to distinguish these words from the same assemblage B0 of letters when used as verbal participles. 2B A GRAMMAR OF THE 186 If there be many intervening clauses between the participles, it is bet- ter to use the verbal noun with & 2.Q40m, as in the first rule; thus, V@) 2ee 210NV el Wen QYo @dleMmo © Hno VDERBOSQo VNHEE3 It < 36S 28086SYo eQmd 69 @ &e6g agi(™M al0HQo 62.QY) W(E@QB02ID MUl the 8 o010 ). C0DS| The Jews who rejected the true Saviour, and who said, his blood be he n upon us and our children, perished. toa he i In very long sentences of this kind, it is generally better to use the form made with the participle and pronoun as before explained; thus, HEFETD EVENEIT OO @Ve O @RIV 20 Ti MIQo MOMO GEOWELIND 21®)la] AIGBOMAIM?I bea QYo Mgy BMEY)H0 OIOB1REOMAIMNIYe GV BICND Som D2IODIS £HHS MSHBOMAIMIG GG HHOM BB b @n._flas [olagc Here is the man who dishonored his father last year, who is in the habit of deceiving his neighbours, who despises good men, and associates with the vile. 4th. All the nouns in the sentence may have separate relative partici- ples which may be qualified by other words; as, ®OODO (e ZRBHB 019OOYe HMYENHBOM 320N NITH PR8N e ©HNP06a|SIC1eR0™ RME@de GO 0NN EYa i@ QIOMIT CNVEHSHaLSIOMm OO0lHnNIal. The people who are well protected by a king, who very much loves his subjects, will not fail to grieve if misfortune happen to him. VERBAL PARTICIPLES. 222. The Malayalim words made with ©#9673 affixed to past parti- ciples or the past tenses of verbs, may be rendered into English by the words seeing, hearing, &c., in such sentences as ke remained in the house doing his work; thus, @RI (MU ) COHDT O IHG) O1BI6ME @VI6S oleiagl) He sat there looking at the Lion. @DAID BoIOMIS C\‘\)QC\’\)Q(&%Q eI ©Y CNa0el i\ @ Ao, He stood at that place talking with him. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 187 } DEL @D BISINBOG B6MZNHINZe BW 6D RIN M o OBGOBINGo B3SlHa990)). 0 0 They sceing wild Elephants and hearing a noise fled away. 9 It has been shown, in para 214, that when a number of verbs occur in 2 the same sentence, all but the last are put in the past participle; but to be construed as verbs of the same tense as the final verb. It is however to od b be noted here, that sometimes the preceding verbal participle may refer to a past action, and be construed as a participle while the final verb may form be in any tense; thus, @D AP MSOM SN 290 B SEEOM. He kaving walked 1s lying down faint. EU 1009 This form however, though used, is inelegant. In such cases 69§ should FAS be added to the participle, which in this connexion denotes completeness. A 0 Sometimes @Y OO is added instead of 655; thus, 6DIND BV @IV A I0ETDIS BV 0 I@D aldhe n the 6&:0$ QD). and Ham'ng spoken thus T gave him ten chuckrums. O@ISOTIRD O210M QLN s @onlob allfab 141061 o). After having gone to the garden and cut down the irees, he went home. YAD\W eO®m MW 6WITD GOANOS SatIdhe. o After having finished this, I will go there. Na 0 MID @VANAHS 62 10MIHD GIAOMD a;sv@gd; I ues When I went there, I did not see him. fum @Y a1BAINOMN OBHIENZAIM HCOMIND OAINZHAII @0 a1081 SIS After having brought the cow and milked her, I got an abundance pal‘ti- of milk. r the house VERBAL NOUNS. OF VERBAL ABSTRACT NOUNS. o 223. These nouns can only be used in the nominative and ablative cases, or with the particle 62672 ; thus. W&l 21958 ag)(MSH BNOCDO @@ EOM IO . The meaning of the word Jumping s this. 2B2 A GRAMMAR OF THE 188 I @DAIOD QD) WITh eI CLELY-\V)IER The I will not go on account of his coming. are @21d age 0§ o6 BN HINd I, el I came in consequence of their calling me. @DAIOD 612 1IBHIPY, OBHINE @D & Qo UILI2I8]. On account of his not going, that business was not effected. OF VERBAL PERSONAL NOUNS. 224, After the full explanation that has been given respecting this part of speech it will be only necessary to add, 1st. That neither verbal abstract, nor personal nouns can govern a geni- an tive case; for the reason, see para 120. the 2nd. Verbal personal nouns always require to be preceded by the same cases as the verbs form which they are derived; as, @V @Yo OBISODAIND eoailas alom. He, who gave him the bock, came here. @RAIOM @S 2] @Tle @AD6S Mgy OM®m EBIND & the 078 I saw the person, who beat him, stand there. BOAINMMIS (VNI 2 () AS15Ed B 1IB:eMBIeM 6mINh &.6N3. I saw the woman, who spake with kim, go home. 210 MITd HS)Eeea s G0 O@lay 6aldQ)]. The person, who was bitten by the serpent, died. CAUSAL VERBS. 225. Causal verbs, formed from verbs active, govern nouns in the ac- cusative case like their aetives, and require a second noun in the accusa- tive governed by the particle 618,962, in the sense of an instrumental ablative, to be expressed or understood in the same sentence; as, 3 the @D BT LIERIe06EIE adls Q_Jsrrflqfi)%. Tey He caused the carpenters to build the house. @b c@@s’?(qj')% 6)6)a_l ) ©d eoailes gere. Here is the child whom they caused him) to beat. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 189 It has been before observed that many verbs® have no causal forms; when therefore the actives of such verbs, or the active forms of any verb, are used in the sense of English compound verbs, the noun with the instru- mental particle is omitted, and the verb governs nouns in the usual way, as, eMWID EVAIOM mfi@&fl')%. I caused him to laugh. @20I0b @vAIen AUBET GVAIOMIS HOS GoAIO 6 BT B QYo H2IWY,. He made them to come and sit with kim. this PASSIVE VERBS. 226. When simple sentences formed by a nominative case, active verb, enl- and an objective, are rendered by the passive form, the agent is put into the lst ablative and the object into the nominative case; as, the BRI ag)HON @RSl ). He beat me. @D AIMITH 6D @ros",fima&__ig. I was beaten by him. It was slain by him. @DLINITD BB 058102 1S 0 In sentences where other nouns are used, such nouns must be placed in the same cases, as if used with active or neuter verbs; thus, @900 V®D)o AIGETDIT B HOCe MAYVIIS SN D)o am G%%o, If you speak truth you will be forgiven that fault, @OAIMNITD o GVEIOMNIS e IOWee |3 DIMEBIN. 0’7%@908@( YYo, The advice, that was given by him to this person, is good. @oale0ho aflg alrgsede agalde @D taCClene s, T'he whole of his household furniture was taken away by force. OSlnge LeMo H2IY MM BOBAIETIT @MW) &0 2Ol Hee e SIMIWIC S0 6s. 1S3 May he who doeth you good, be blessed by God. ANt % The Malayalim verb ©2192 9 go, is only used in the neuter; when therefore any of the English words compounded with to go are to be ™ rendered into Malayalim, other verbs must be used; as, anpad erAIOM allsw .9 He let him go; lit: he dismissed and sent him, as from confinement, &c. @it @y @yaleom alomm ). He made that person go; lit: he told and sent. 190 A GRAMMAR OF THE When two or more passive verbs occur in the same sentence, the rules b for placing them is the same as in the active voice; thus, @0 alp - Nay,Ha 15 Go@lecho allel BIQ @800 &0 6 I $066 2502 @IV T. This cow ought to have been sold, and its price given to the poor. @aN6s 61210MIad @It @S B0 |S OBIZOa|Se- If you go there, you will be beaten and killed. 4 Passive verbs may be placed in connexion with other verbs; but in xzty most cases it is better to make separate sentences, or to put the passive nati verb into the active form; @OAID @B POV OBIOMN® OBHINE DdOOe|S. He was hanged, because he killed that woman. @D a9 NMIT HSNB06e43 as@m BlAINVe & 60DH2900 202, Ha 9. o0 et 5 He died ten days after he had been bitten by a serpent. @'y, cnuRERICNM 800631 e0Rd, MW @lom MR e OAINE] BHBIRIT ®6C Hode S 23)ay. Christ came down from heaven, became man, was crucified and died fOI’ Uus. SYNTAX OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 227. Of Affirmative Defective Verbs. Ist. Examples of the use of &i6mMeo. thlIs NER6S @VSIHN VHlR@TIOM O® OQIeMo. This is necessary for our business. WERBICNMD e 10QOMOMIGHRJo HDIND 62 1HQYE 0. I must do all that Master commands me. o) el 23} Qo AMOBHSIO® 60 OlBnQo HAIEM, You must do your work without being udle. 2nd. Of ey l6M3). 2 @D OAIEMZOM BIG)e GYDE M, That is a necessary affair. I; HOIBP 0 HAINZHAIIGo HEE. There is plenty of water. 89 Ne0ho NG 196 BNNENM IO, T must dwell in your house. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 191 rules 3rd. Of @6, M) @P6S 6a 190 @Y BIGje BHo. ) If you go there, that affair will be settled. BV a0TB® BB ag®ITd ®ICd @@ VIS )OF a9 (@ yEN, 621601701385 @ I (YVo. S If what ke says is right, you ought to sirive to effect it. 4th. Of ®:$lay. When connected with a sentence that implies zeces- ut sity the governing noun must be in the dative; in other cases the nomi- assIve native is required; as, O Ml HOIOHW BRI I must sleep. <auin OMIBe 6162, HFQ. I must bathe. 6DIH Hmes @oales ealerm eFlaly 59 I also must, or ought to, go thither. 5th. Of @Y. SIGIHI0 D @RI (FetIOW (I WeRDEDe 6019 IO BIQ). The Tassildar can only fine to the amount of five Rupees. d died @RAIYh @oailes ealecm o) .08 You can, or must, only go after he has been. FAN02ITe UBlHM dhallea,) eIy It is necessary to award punishment to the wicked. The particle £ § is used like the last verb, and with a similar meaning; thus, HENIE] HONEOA OB AQPTD BB & S. I can only see the letters if I have spectacles. N, dho BLILVM B1216QY, VMo GO &S, The truth can only be known by examz'hing the Book. g OF NEGATIVE DEFECTIVE VERBS. SRS ———— 228. Examples of the method of placing these verbs in a sentence, Ist Of e 1ez9, OMIHe HQIEN2), 1 do not want. fer @O EOIHn 6 QLIGEIEVONY). It was not necessary for them. THE 192 A GRAMMAR OF Jn GOE HOINEITD HHI0OR @D e0AIlOS HBHIG QICYY0 They brought a horse here which no one wanted. LIV IBRIBIONN OLI2L B2 IHQYENS). Bestow no labor on what cannot be effected. BESYTT] 021Q) OIS HO2IOTD OIa o {1680 6vx=), Do not make God angry by doing evil. When several of these verbs are required, verbal nouns may he used with 616737 ; thus, ) YENOTDD EBOOQABHYe BVNOMO OBINIBHO 6)('1.‘% H Qo OIQIGHEI. Neither ascend the tree, nor cut down the branches. The form may be altered thus, A @S 61a128@HEMEI GRAIHMIS NI VIO]BH QYo QL6 TSI, Neither go there, nor speak with him. 4l 2nd. Of ©@oel. DI HBBOD @04 I am not a thief. @O alo (MIOQSD®IMMEAII? @0 Is that a green colour 2 No. c@o GYOa EVUIVHNS) m%@wo? Is this person a carpenter or not? ®dald @20160 aidle{)aim FIBS 56000 ol Sla{loj® 6ali062) Gvey NV = @, OB (0 BHIVo @D (® BV BN, What he taught them was not like what their priests taught them, but it was according to truth. NEIBLITD DIMOBIMe @OAIND al0eDw, He spake counsel that was not good. Two or more negatives of this description in a sentence, are connected by the particle 6¢; thus, @D O®EE VD MEimEy G @ aflomQag. By, That Cocoa-nut is not very good nor very bad. Tafiye gylo @S] oo MS) HalIea) MNLIDo NIZIRES DOLI. Jack wood timber is neither so strong nor so good as Black wood. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE 193 3rd. Of 608, ' @I 6aiI6Q9? eoal. Did he go? No. OO B aflcrmesswrflgsaco)a? Are you not hungry. Q) ICYD BDAICNITH @ Sl@nea 1 @ovslay. I was not beaten by him. 6m20h aflgleye a10Wey @oE3ISIilele Sasnilay. used I neither went to the house, nor to the bazar. N ee3do Qc@;bommgd@GUQ BHIEOYILIOWII B3O ) 21609 ? or, M16@300 0@ CodnWYo HIVBY o 6 B5QYo 6.2 1@ iaiews? Do you neither hear, see, nor remember? emID BO® HeNElgdley eBSsAla]; or, 6mICh @om B Qo 6NElge OB S50 6081 I have neither seen nor heard it. 4th. Of ®YoOm. As forming negative participles. @b @oalles §6M ag GPAIWIe® @D © oM aNeIWoIN5Es &IP3 MILrIIB)2,. Not knowing that he was there, they spake against him. 6O a_1 16V NGO B I0 @B, This is a horse without vice. GO (NUemiB) @00 Do OIS @D mgomc@go@@@ Qd ) ol MBABI 1pen HeNe. @O0 There are many forests where no one travels and into which the rays of the sun never enter. therty @D @D BIGe @O Weramem een 1Ll SOV M OO @Y VRNV, That he did not tell that business to his Master was a fault. 6D @O® @A WISTBIS @D agecm CeIIla,). nected He reproved me on account of my not knowing it. Examples of the use of @®W6&® in the formation of the negative impe- rative. @AM B RemMIIe AENEIO® 6OMHe. 04! Be silent when you see him. b 2¢ 4 194 A GRAMMAR OF THE < Saado 60 RIS I0IBIO® eodla{lob. Be ye not unmwise. &S omI200 BHO B:SIOMQYo 000 & SIOMYo DBHERINI NRNOQ. May we be without spot or blemish. oo C/BID OTN arfi,oa_,\'ig:floemz;@mqyo QIO ag) 87)2jo 9o 1BANBNOM QYo §Bla{ININVE OMIBEE 6B IOBHEN 5 A BCLAID ag)HMIS a JOEDYT. He told me that I must take care not to displease God, nor injure any one. Examples of the use of the indefinite negative made with @®ém 60 @2 ]0iSe §21Qem0s Oaime AIQIO®m 6 A1OE6NG oM@ I3 Y. Business should be carried on without loss. ) @oANOS ©a1IBIOm §OROBHENZM® I B Ye. You ought not to have gone there. 0 neIIVN@OM agigldd ONeM @Lem GO® MBI, If you had been good I would not have beaten you. Sent 5th. Of @@ . 3 agendo aNdad o, You must not come to my house. BAEN02IOOIS HOS MSBEB®. Do not go with the wicked. M 20)1H0IO® EORNOBHE ™Mo ag)s T @B @ BB . If you do not wish to die, do not eat thut. CYEINVORIGBOS VMBI 6BV B BD Na=eg @368 N3l D. Hearken not to the advice of the vile, nor despise good people. ™) BOOBLED B 1IBHQo NOMO @OUENIOTD © O at BN BONQo 62 IQYTD. You must not go to a far country, nor forsake your family. A 10QB@IT BHIYE369 SOl ilaldlldnQe H6S @B . Do not even think of things that must not be spoker. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE 195 6th. Examples of the use of QnOlW, 602, HEFlHR L], and £ S? 2909 60 (8o QgD §D21IQY OBHIEE BRVHHOVH a0 b a0 Y I cannot cross, because I have no boat D g oM AMRANd AN QITDDEBINE eI @D Nido! HSHHN HLY ag)$ao0d 622l I I cannot take the stone out of the tank, because I cannot swim. I/?JIW &HF B Pon® HEBHWE] e aleMila] 106X 6Y Mo "o Sa_/ at once you cannot do what is impossible 500G & @ gpmoem @L%%SD I cannot do this. @0 ife ¢oalles Al &59 They cannot come here VERBS OF INTENSITY @.@ 229. These verbs may be used with principal verbs in any part of the sentence ; thus, Ist Examples of the use of a&;fi%m with a principal verb @D 80N QYo agy®MO CVPH6G alilSla1Ies O ag)8hl@d 6MIND agP@) e ILI)a (1B ohe If he seize my people any more, I will complain against him, lit (O will write and v fm m @D ag)eho @erEEHONdo Al m IS A20G16 @) %m @Q_(YYO They are cutting down and removing the bank of my paddy field. 21850 @b & SOMEEI0eIh a6 J It is difficult to pass over to Lenka ®DIo ag)®ho (Nate @Rel1a00)a OBHINE agoM emInt @Yaleires) 66 uila o joad ed: Codailay 405 If I complain (to the court) that that person seized my field, it will not be heard 2¢2 196 A GRAMMAR OF THE 2nd. Of &YoM. @D ay® BlaIIe o(Do'Q.lO('Y).n(Ub OBO) QP agelde @O0 H WY O, That comw is daily coming into my g'rozmd, and cating up all the plantain trees. Vb 60 ® LANBHSETT ag)M EBOD @CIYON NGy I do not know who tore this. OB HOIHN 2 BGEOWIT AOOOIW. dHlgHRIY. If you reject this, you will get nothing else. ®20I0D £:000 €101QY®EBHIENE SRAIONDO 9HE)IN AP BN BOAINM BB alnd oSlomieila]ld) BELOYYD. It has been determined to cast him out of his employ, because he com- mitted a crime. 3rd. Of & )s A TR. emINd Gacm amoa&waao% Mlede allmay H1SER N dhEN3. When I went and looked, I saw that the field was sown. l of y QIBNE ayS) LSRN agy EVAIND a 106V, “hi< He said that the door was locked up. 4th. Of @Yo, and 61B25H Y. af)HMIS HOS 06N a'r\,flg___\omflmam dls ®®% ag)oMm &0 B0ID a_IOETDHID B6r (V2. The Tahsildar hath said, he will send two Sepoys with me. @I @DPAUOMO 210S oSS |edIFOD. He gave him a lift up with his load. @ AllgmiindISarls BOAIMe EHd)a,). Having distributed the food to them, he also eat. 5th Of 61039830, oo HWO 6alIS6a 190, T'his rope is broken. 3 ®Id ONOMIY | Y &XNOEH Mo ma%ee%b s e idBo. the_y )6 R Take greal care, or you will fall. The manner of using @LC%;Y‘@ has been already fully explained: (See para 127. Sec. 6th.) MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 197 g}é’d"}o SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 1l the 230. Examples of the manner of using Malayalim adjectives. Ist When the noun has but one adjective. M 6l & @D e Alom allgetm ©MEA] agiafle @z B¢ 60V, A white cow came, and eat up all the ripe paddy. HQOD HBIVYYOS aJOBHLLIHED BT BSEDDE 19, ;919(/7 The hind leg of the black horse, is broken. =) 2 1ol DOWPA%P 2E,d 6LWGAL PamIe oElEnd O 00BN lgy. £ 0O~ A brave man will most certainly despise a coward. @VAIOMO B2 IR0 (Hloo el i@Idr. The colour of his clothes, is green. 15 2nd. If there are several adjectives belonging to the same noun, such adjeetives, if they will admit of it, are changed into abstract nouns, to each of which the conjunction g must be affixed and @@ added to the last; which gives to the whole the force of adjectives; as, BoNYo o..nafl(og-o_gqg_@ BB @YM 916 §ane. Here is a large and beautiful Elephant. g 10l @I o 6 JRA Q%8 @n'an&;jm‘o 2075 lBe61a| Q00 B IMIBHOND, A wise and learned man ought to be respected. eI e 66BAIBHEQALEAICd VOIS 61ald) W 9alBGOle HalILye 6010y A faithful and pious man, will not even do a trifling injury to any one. 3rd. In other cases, when several adjectives belong to the same noun, they are changed into personal nouns, and in this way all adjectives may {5 be, and in native writings generally are, formed; as, B3R Do 12ile 1285 DRIV &G GBDM g@alles g 6vYe, )kiined: Here is large and beautiful Elephant. A GRAMMAR OF THE 198 WMARe BONIZ)RAIRYES ST @m%wb BI0G)d0) OOMo OEIUNQAINYSH IO CVANIN O BHENEMNA Mo, A-man who is a physician and rich, ought to kelp a poor and sick man. I eeledn MEJDoe OHONMRIYSH @IYIOOD Hal 63 (/5] HbYo. I will teach you a good and right way. 4th. When one of the cardinal numbers, used adjectively, is connect- ed with a noun; if there be another adjective, belonging to the same noun, the number is placed first in its full shape, and the adjective is put between it and the word to be qualified; as, mMoe) AW @M HISIGONoM M alevey 6.o10) Q) 66 IDMEING O I E: 6T0. Four large Elephants came from the Jungle, and killed ten little children. 5th. If besides the number, there be several adjectives the number in its full shape, must be placed between them and the noun; as, @otAQYo laNa |0 jQ8s Gem B:O0OW emICD BHoE. I saw five large and beautiful horses. eOLUMEEG|0de o dXlQyA8d DO alBBede A, Six fine fat cows came. In the above cases the number is sometimes placed first, as in English; but this is not good Malayalim. OF THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE. 231 In sentences of this kind the person or thing compared may be placed first in the sentence or not; but that which is affirmed of it must follow the thing with which the comparison is made; thus, ©Y GWMN @Qmflamc&obe 6 2101 ® IOV, That Elephant is smaller than this. GOWIFOM B0 AR, 60 AIOMEHNIde 6214 T VAo @O AIL]. lit: | There is no one greater than that person, nor smaller than this. 2g)OOM EI00 agiOOAYe HILIANMIORIBEND MIOG QIR o One who is much stronger than I, will come to-morromw. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 199 g)ofim @A BOCO DB EIZe OO HENVBOH @ M W o aw‘\%mfloe&m. He loves his horses more than his children. man Omlate MOMINIE BM eidn afl§ad gers. @u I have one in the house better than this. a@@dg(mflammo@o QBAIYF Iy HAIERVIBMY, c@fomflammogo 2FANYEH M VEP,MNE@3 S a0B nect- WEEedo GV BYE® N6 dHI OO I@D eI same ) Bo %SQ_I(YW%OG)@ Q@cfiz(‘ffi]g‘d c\r\:%mm% 1§ put 0SS a)BWE@30e Q00 BVLHe ag)Falo 2dsalomoab Q@;eflausaeam. 210 Butter is softer than all things, but the hearts of good people are softer than that ; because butter will not melt unless itself feel the y litfle heat, but good mens hearts melt when any other one feels the heat 1. e. distress. ber in OF THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 232. Examples of the method of using this part of speech. H0"G MIOWIBo MEIYSP Qe BORAlLY. There s no animal so grateful as a dog. @D 281 (BHLIIBOBTITW aglO0c HWORP DIHBOM ag) #lelo oo GBCo QMY 00D MeELIIs 6o ISlWalnd thh j BVHOM ag)shleje GDAID GO 6N (@I WI Ve &SI O HSOND S 1)), Though that mountain is the highest in the world, and this person the smallest among men, yet he crossed it without difficulty. ay be 200 B1L1IH TR LIBS (ML Qfi’é%fl‘\) @VAIMIBYD; or, oMo ©219&HHeygs el 20y lad semIach @oaimsI aRYY0 He is the best man in the world. pa] The last form, which is most agreeable to the idiom of the language, 1g lit: He is the first man in the world. dlomd 69021809 agm @O dhe MEJM ? I Which 1s best, fish or flesh 2 968 < ®IOD 0 106TD® 6B ES OMIEn ag)(DHWQYe AIBOD CRE= S 6630, I felt the greatest shame, after I heard what you said. | 1 200 A GRAMMAR OF THE SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 2 (9. Adverbs are placed in a sentence before Verbs, Adjectives, and even before other Adverbs; sometimes they are found in any part of the sentence; as, @DALIBONO B0 @D OHAINBIN]g BFOT. His horse is running very swiftl‘y. Cor @00I0h NOMIRT] VLG He conversed well. EO® agiCOe (ML BIGjs @Y. 2 This 1s a very good thing. Tor @od @ aflfa GDMMEAINV]E @VeMEe MIVe 6 9) -2 aITD. T hey lived together joyfully, for a long time in that house. Bu @0Ith 6962|200 Ao 6061a{200 AI@s ag)M @oId aflaiodla, )@, They were every moment expecting his coming. for NOM MOOMN@ QYo 231 (@0 ! 18 1 Good, good, how very wonderful! lear Proy g lng\ yal yaly tOO‘p Met haty 3;8 3BA Oflh( 0 d A | SL]]“ T%PE 201 and APPENDIX. f the OF ACCENT. 1. In the Malayalim language syllables are unaccentuated; each word, consisting of the same kiud of letters,”? must be pronounced alike. EMPHASIS 2. Emphasis is not so frequently used as in the English language. Tones,*® as they are technically termed, are much more common. Whole o B sentences being often expressed in a way that proves how effective the lan- guage may become under proper cultivation. o VERSIFICATION. 3. Native works are, for the most part, written in Verse, but the laws for the arrangement of which, being purely Sanscrit, the ingenious Student is referred to that language for information on the subject. To any one learning Malayalim and having a taste for such studies, the task will not prove difficult, as all the Sanscrit taught in this country is through the medium of the Malayalim character. PUNCTUATION. 4. The Natives have no points or divisions of any kind in their writ- ings; and, except their poetry the style of which is foreign to the Mala- yalim language, their works present a confused mass of matter huddled together without any mark to distinguish one subject from another. The method of marking sentences, that may be found in some few modern native writings, has been introduced by, or borrowed from, Europeans. 37 See para 13 on the letters <o aud ®. %i 38 Accent respects the pronunciation of words. of the sentence. Emphasis the meaning Tone or Cadence refers to the feelings of the Speaker. In ail these subjects, the Malayalim is susceptible of great improvement; and the name of that Native Gentleman who may, in these respects, strive to advance aund enrich bis own language, will be remembered wiih respect and honor by generations yet unboru, 2D 202 A GRAMMAR OF THE FIGURES OF SPEECH. 5. TFigurative language is used by all classes of the people. The Fi- gures in most common use are, 1st Personification. This figure is well known by the natives; as, @D Alarled) 6\.9_!%@00_\900 #6260 BosaRY. allen BEYYR, When that Dewan goes, (to court) the whole Cutcherry trembles. BOALBOLO CVEhSe BIeMemIle QON®IBo HOS & QYD Oa_)B30. The very trees will weep, when they see his griqf. 0g)a)? o A®E3@o (BAIOWY HOOM al92{lom atde @ ANEE36® QYo BIMMUIBH68Qo ~HFTD. AUl the mountains milked the Earth and drew from it preqious stones and medicine, instead of milk. @e’)@)mb ®Obo All0eyHeS ERO0: ©&INE LINIST 6O @IQYRIOD BTVATIHOS ma_\sea(&?___poeszm. The sun, with the tips of his fingers, decorates the wives of Ravenen with pearls. 9nd. Simile or Camparison, Metaphor, and Allegory, are in constant use. Native writings are full of fables; thus, @Y GTM SO BL) 61 1I6al ‘s_p_(tflae&ma. That Elephant is like a mountain. GYOY3 S P TO go@lmNecza aflem eaigs ® %) 61168} BVEONM. Life is like a drop of water that falls upon red hot iron. A BAN®IOBIS ©ITRIS OB ©IZ)TTN B OBIg GVRON. The king of Travancere is a fort to the Cochin country. allfn CUBLL BLVBE3GHSYe (NIVIW HAIBIH:ON. Th Vishnoo is the tap root of all worlds. ERONM BOEMAIBOM Bsailanbo msallad Hsom ad £1Q)OM ERNEEIVodn B 0 10QAINt MIleno &@mem SO 601683 S GV, Thy mercy is o floating timber, by which the people who lie tossing in the midst of the sea of life and death, may reach the land. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 203 BB VAWAD B NIlade BM HISTH i Goad) Fi- 6S 999 QUIEEOY agiile BHNo DS @06 a0 @Y HISEIBH ZNEE0s ageyle @Sl el S6MI ) BlAIMUo BHIOM MIMEe BHENEMEHIMINIG ol 100 MRO98% IO B (NSlonQO@MIS §SMIS) B1.210Qy. @ (e)®I0e MSOM AImemMIde 8@ galendo go o 65 oM @0m 600 emIND adlaIh QoWes Mol SO ag)thlele BHNBMIVY MILeDOOH @M & BB IM 0o @Va @R IoMm adlalirnd &HYyeacm S6EMIBo (YBEOBNE M6 ag)oM aflo 1902 &G 9atd Wo MUV 2| Alg BB MIATV) 2] ) DO alD6)En o N0 BMONO BVSHHT 62107 ®@06a40e ©Om o @ ®IBNIa |10 agi® ag)OM 612194 ag) tones OMIBO BWED NNeaDOTIS HORERIVNS al106TWy $ CV10) (e BI0e HBEIOY PN B eMIds G J§m SMrlg MleM@Enide 11188 B (M eale o (M M @S Ao H2IYMMN HIVEMNIBITH BV QI TN enen Qb @IV lm NSlcalo @o® BB geHI0 oAl O HIEMIa] I ag)M A l06TT aglOMIND @) X stant @ \Nen0O@D @S 0HINE 6 IW] ag)e0 EVLLH 8B HemMoA@d 2yedl &Iemilal O&:ISTD MlenOo S0 195 OMIBEIWER |90 EVTION Oalleel OO B (Galo HEMNOOITD H,6M5 @620 HOOEN o f‘} t M ONBONCTR. APES3) O1BHINE T %2 BUOI] OBG ag(MIAO HEMOAIT £$6ME (Galdvd) edo MO0 Bad: BEE Vo V(e IV OO 6o | 310 ag)MITd EO YS! (IO BICTLIIB® BHOOI @ HIGIALY ag)(M 10T (Nloabo EHEMOGIEE S RIS 2198 @00i6S HSOM &Sla] 219H:BYo 210y, The following is nearly a literal translation :— Once upon a time a Lion entered a Forest and began to devour the Beasts; upon which they all met together and made an agree- n o ment with the Lion that one should come to him every day to B6M be eaten; while they were thus doing, it happened one day to fall to the lot of a hare to come, upon which the hare reflected g within itself, that as this is the day in which I am to die I must ud 202 | 204 A GRAMMAR OF THE strive, as much as possible, to destroy the devouring Lion and rescue myself from danger. Having contrived a plan, he walk- glV ed very slowly towards the Lion and delayed going to him for a long time. Then the Lion asked him the cause of his delay: upon which he replied, Swamy, while you are thus protecting us a wicked Lion stronger than yourself came and did much injury, which is the cause of my delay. When the Lion heard it he said, point him out to me; upon which the hare took the Lion and pointed him to a deep well: when the Lion looked down he saw in the well a figure like himself; then he roared loudly, and having heard the echo of the roar issuing from the well, he stretched out his paw towards the shadow in the well; when that did the same he said that henceforth nothing can be done without killing you, and jumping into the well was drowned. MoraL. Wisdom is better than strength. 3rd. Hyperbole. This figure is in common use; as, oo AINTEIZS AIF:) BT S IBNHNITDT EMEN3I6eW #9900 iefla 1A% ®o aeMINVIVE WdEnI0o XV, g_D,"’ () ‘ZJ, a0, lang The mangoes on this tree are larger than a cocoa-nut, before the husk is removed, and sweeter than sugar. @2IOMDO &6 ©.21MIEEE ay2lerN@nde 2 jalo) QBB VY2, the His eyes are redder than a shoe-flower. taug 8pec 4th. Irony. This figure is well known by the natives; as, o) @euatho AN a9 EA) 2 GO ag)DOY!I Souy Ity @ (Ve We @VAIND g OIS G2 Q) 588 @9 Wo o @ ojiGd emIh B BIem EOGBILEE )2 age ill you go to his Sfeast? What doubt is there about it. When you st reflect upon the injury he halh done me; do you think I shall fOllm Jail to go? o th 3 600 @2.7)a 13l Ml (Galt? OISV AIIEE3) With 2@ 6159978 S1BTNee |6l 2RI @OTA L], Because you paid 20 Rupees. Sfor this barren cow, there is no one so wise as you. MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 205 and Sth. Antithesis or Contrast, is much in use. -Many examples have been alks given of it in the Syntax; as, for onNea Alo 190 )EeWQo (LD B QYo 621Q)"Malom i lay: TOMND B8n QYo WEMRINV IS Ao @02 GVWISAL) X Xo A, g us Uy, Every thing will turn out well to him, who thinks and acts well; but t he evil to him that thinks and acts evil. Lion 6th. Climax or Amylification is used, but not to a great extent; thus, lown @009 98890 MIFANe ®H L2 190b 9 om0 2y udly, I, he QWeOM MIZIa QDA ETSe @0 IEd ag)mi] rhen M SPYe MOMO AH986S HERANBLO6B09 @ OO BIYI YOS @050 BN E.Cohdn) MO 614 1ee3) jone @RIBGOS MVA0IVAAOC™MI & Al el es & ed, 6@} WIHMIYIOMN agishlee &P Qead? Who, or what can keep in the country him whom the Rajah has resolved to banish : can the tears of his children, the supplica- tions of his wife, the assistance of his friends, the compassion of [\ the Dewan, can any thing ¢ Examples of the other figures of speech that are sometimes used in this b language, have been already exhibited in the Syntax. e the DIVISION OF TIME. 6. The Natives of Malayala have adopted the astronomical system of o the Brahmins with regard to the measurement of time; but as this is taught in their Sanscrit Books, and written in the Malayalim character, Ot e At specimens of which will be given here, the Student is referred to that source for full information on this interesting but complicated subject. ety It will be sufficient for ordinary purposes to confine these observations to ) a general explanation of the native method of dividing time, and of their ! astronomical and astrological terms; an acquaintance with which, will be ) o found of great assistance to any one wishing to make himself acceptable s/zfl[l to the people, or who may be desirous of becoming thoroughly acquainted with their language and customs. 1309 @ISTUMNCNY)I262090I(@ 8OO IO@IAIESHIMNOE B aIms B B1660y)Q1ah NCaNHEUB BB EIHOE LM oYU e. S6BOAILYUNNANOHNY 6B (622 A28E:6/5.ID OBV e, | 206 A GRAMMAR OF THE The following is a translation of these Sanscrit lines - B Ao 616 a{1DBedohs B aldheie I B Q—quo. One month makes a day and night of the spirits of departed men. SO o OHINNE HIBAUBCode BT aldheie MIUe. A year makes a doy and night of the gods. OB AIBGB6S VBRI Do (MUOIBVD. HBITE BM H6HB QIQUNo 12,000 years of the gods, make an age of the gods. 6630IYUIe PFNEIV 0o OHINE (62IARAIBOMN aldhAlo RIJe @Dl MO ARy e RENE BLIEE3GIEM. 2,000 ages of the gods, make a day and night of Bramum, these are two Culpas of men. 1 OF THE YUGAS. . 7. A space of time equal to one Divine Age, is divided into four ages, supposed to be in constant revolution like the Seasons of the year. These periods probably refer to imaginary dates of some remote conjunctions of the heavenly bodies, assumed by ancient Astronomers merely to assist their computations; but which has given rise to the absurd, indecent, and monstrous fables with which the Puranas abound, and which are received These QUNEE30o are named among the people as solemn realities. BDQY e, OIS, BIIaiOQYUo, &HeilQ)Uo; answering to the Golden, Silver, Brazen and Iron ages of European Mythology. The fourth, & 2110, in which we live, embraces a period of 432,000 years, of which, to the current year A. D. 1840-1, 4941 have elapsed. OF SOLAR TIME. 8. The Solar year, which commences on the Sun’s entrance into Aries, is divided into 12 parts or months, whose names are derived from the signs of the Indian Zodiac. Th When these names are used, the word @20 month must be added; sometimes instead of @00, EOIVM, one of the names of the Sun, is Ea{‘h ] added; as Q&E6IWD, January month; but this latter form is nearly % the obsolete, flletho MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 207 9. Corresponding Signs of the Zodiac. B ©QASo, QU S 19602, The Ram. @SQ.JQ, @98 6 lI6A, 2? Bull. QLMo lleM e a 19641, 2 Twins. & 65 Bsc, MO TE G1alIBA, 2 Crab. Q_?}GBWBO, Vo0 Ncbra 1968 9 2 Lion. 63 &OM), &HON) BB i06al, 2 Vz'rgz' n, @E_Xflo, @IV ISR, 2 Balance. Qo B, MY alIOA, N Scorpion. L0, il QMBI 9 » Archer, QL. 0o, Q@I6)a126)al, » Goat. RclBo, 03¢ S lIfAl, 99 Water bearer. dfl(Y)o., Alobera1961al, Fishes. 9 10. Corresponding Solar Months. Q2SI Vo, April. 693 QIR Vo, May g hese AlLgon@IrV., June. s of & FNS B AIo, July. ssist 2 1320, August. SHOIQIN,, and September. D192, October. ived oa;om.flca,mmo, November. med LMBAINe, December. ering Q& O AICo, January. gy dRoBAIMN Vo, 000 February. Aarero., Mazrch. A Month is sometimes called @@s30o; thus, o®e @ewade L@m- agenbo GroaYes dlms A’ oy 0 19H Qo 6.2 1Q). igs’ i On the Y5th of this month, my mother died. signt: The months are not adjusted by intercalary days, according to the European method; and. therefore do mnot entirely correspond to them. lded‘; Each month properly contains as many days and fractional parts of a day, ln, 15 as the Sun remains in each sign. To adjust the fractional parts, the eatlf method adopted is taught in the following lines, the especial object of 208 A GRAMMAR OF THE which is to teach the exact time of C"\(EHQ0; ¢. e. the exact time when the Sun enters a new sign. MB0I21E&00 8;E30e 61N BN OAIIBIBD CNOEDH AU, @ Q60, eaS., ) UL &S BI6eMSMe madlny EHs BVP BIV®) GRS, 602115 INVT UG o al@I O™ Jomn grmhEad 8omMie R (Yflm(mtq @SO.JO, ETENo el HNG & P6TDIL B fl 0 B0Me BIRV@) adleoMmIdo. 2 1060, ,—Q(-Y)Oo the Eh IS dho O, day.‘ D2y ‘@33& Qo Is, S aplem 3, B, @219 De WSSH, (b‘(fm_pc&wo 0 L0, Ao, @ B)(bQo ouele, 2> @M, d&RoBa. 2 1D, A (oY The purport of the two last lines is, that if the Sun should enter a new as P sign within 18 Narikas, after sun rise; that is before 1 12 P. M. English If the Sun enter a 12 time; that day will be the first day of the month. new sign after that time, the first day of the month will commence on the e, next day. Th The Solar jear is also divided into two parts, each consisting of six e solar months; the first of which is called a day of the gods; thus, €ncg ¢ a1 BT 6BLB Cods QUIANMVRIBIRINVIQR @3$6rE all oL SQTMOIVEM: §alY 16 21MVHPaIC (@)WY Qe 6 M3y A QUOMROQLeNME_IE 1005 Ul NOWHE) VI8 Senge ; In Malayalim thus, The RHDBINe LMB— QDT GDQABINo HTDR IV Mo @ M@ @ OBAISHENS a BT @M Ha1NVMo 62,730 Othe O30l o @) MUINY VDG Y d:0o & 5idnYe 6.0l mOm OQISNZM B2 le. % MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 209 hen In Englich thus, Siz months from the first of January is Uterayanum, (the Northern way, ) this is a day cof 12 hours) of the gods. In this time the ceremonies of pulting on the sacred thread, the Jirst shaving of ;\; the head, the consecration of Idols and other rites, must be per= Sformed. M) y) Six months from the first of July is called 2 £ 6™ IWNo Decha- nayanum, (the southern way,) This is a night of the gods. 11. The @& ¢\ So or week, is divided into seven days, named after the Sun, Moon. Mars Mercury, Jupiter, Venus, and Saturn with @Q @, day, affixed to each of them; as, HIVA, Sun. MIN'0IPy, Sunday. T oon. @300, )88y, Monday. Mars. 62190, &Q_r.;% LS Tuesday. e Juund, M. ercury. Y. NPy, W’ednesday, Jupiter. Thursday. Q) o80es, 1188, Venus. 6 1 88l 09P, Friday. o), Saturn. UVaMI Qo @y, Saturday, @T @\ is sometimes used to signify week; or @ day when considered e as part of a week. 1ghsh ter & 12. The 3aicmVe day, of 24 English hours, is divided into 60 c9&) n the Hhe.Oo Narikas, each of which is equivalent to 24 English minutes. The day or date of the months is called @), 900 is a day of the Moon’s periodical revolution, and is used in refer- )f S ence to the 27 Natchatras. @'L0) or a_ido: refers to the different phases of the Moon; but both ol ) ™50 and a_ e, are commonly, though erroneously, used in the same 0 sense as A1 Vo. Thg day distinguished from the night is termed adh@d, and the night (D) o Other divisions of time of this description are as follows, 130 mo allon @ &, O MIF B, , 02 Equal to24 Minutes. Q. ML, 0 Q@Mo, 3 » 48 Minutes. 2k 210 A GRAMMAR OF THE @6 MIvH, L QM OMM®o, Equal to 1 Hour. 3 Hours, or o6 Ml S, L WI:, 4 ”I_ one watck. mo (NI, O AN, 7 b2l 1 Day. b2 1 Week. 9 Bl o, D m@_&’lfi-go, 35 m 03l auone, L AI(NVo b3 o) 1 Month. Q. AI0NVc, < BO, kb 9 1 Season. SN P & a A D L. B3I, L VIV QAIBVD 0, 33 2 1 Solar Year. 3 2 OF LUNAR TIME. 8 ( 13. The natives adapt the Zodiac to Lunar, as well as to Solar time, o Besides the twelve divisions already named, it is further divided into 27 M AN (@ &30, or Constellations, each containing 13" 20”. The names and figures of the 27 Natchatras, as taught in this country, are as follows, @I, @ RIGOIcEa IO, Like a horse's head. aPp BO6M), @0Ga|OatIGLl, » a fire place. One IO B>, OO BHAISH, a1I6Al, s a small vessel used in agal : l sacrifice. OMI06MM), 2. 10160MI00, Red one. that D&, QIO LI a_196)A ) like a deer’s head. days day BRI, @) dh SO 16, » burning coal. a6 @o, 6BHIMIMDa9Qa68), L, a large sea boat. a looking glass with a %ng Q@D £, 6 B YD 151610 1961£Y, ,,{ handle. 5y a sloping stone,on which Rory Q) e @0 2d) o |G) A jmeetIBRY, the natives grind cur- ry stuff. Q&’Q, Moo, » @ yoke. O-.Amo, 3S)@H 21610196188, b2 legs of a bedstead. 6 o, @V@ B0, VMY, s point of an arrow. 2 Novolo, The scattered. Th a@’?@%m, 62 @) 0 16ME8a P60 106, Like a small brinjal. W ay 3 These vary from 29 to 32. i MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 211 U260, QISHleMcealInal, Like a round well, or @MY, a bow. 96 zailaiea 196y, 29 @'?] mg’ o®23161a196Al, » @ sort of spear, %l.‘.o, BI20 a2 3 a tmmpet. o._dfooSo, SSITHBHI2I6a106], kH legs of a bedstead. 2@95" j DT R6M, QPIBEITA IO, 9 a measuring rod. g @oaig:, 2 @oDa el 2 a wheel, o @QQ}C, @@l (N AN (Do, Five stars. J(BG@FI@), ) ©a16mMd HGabe Like the legs of Ravenen's bedstead. g@_@;'mfl, § 2 aa9eal, { ne) (O (L (Zfl, QIPIIB 16, sy @ small sort of Tabor. These constellations are sometimes represented by different figures ; thus, 2 HY®o, OmER3IH e NatIGA), Like the eyes of a cocoa-nut. try (%O_ngc, QSIS _I6Al, Like a small ship, &c. The lunar ecliptic is used to show the constellation in which the moon appears every day. It requires more than 27 days for the moon to make i one complete revolution from any point of the Zodiac, to the same point again; but the natives intercalate the fractional parts in a way similar to that of their other calculations. In common however, they reckon 27 days as the period of the moon’s revolution round her orbit, giving to each day one of the names of the above constellations, beginning with @0Ce_ ®1; as ®0Uo1m N300, tho Besides the above named constellations. they have another termed @ 3 28)@, which is formed from part of the stars in &(@)9So0 and @@ &6, as described in the following lines, yh‘bdl ] our @ISR BH (M1 BN @218 N (rral MIP & £,56m1 0o @ BRIV (Hogm. When four Narikas (i.e. two from each constellation ) from the Jourth part of Utteradem and the beginning of Tiruohnum meet together, they form Abighit day. This @2 E)2Rlom M23 is merely used in some calculations to make up an equal number of 28 days. 14. Their lunar year consists of 12 lunar months, reckoned from new 2E2 212 A GRAMMAR OF THE moon to new moon, contrary to the practice of the Brahmins residing in North India, who reckon from full moon to full moon There are but 354 days in their 213 Mo i@V Luner year, more than 11 days less than in the Solar year TO deut tae jx id o solar computation intercalary months called @oLll@ICUESEVe are ius serted 15. The lunar months derive their names from the particular N chatra near which the moon is observed to be generally at the full The names of the lunar months, are taught in the following Slogum, 21503 AININH U@ A AL Us 1 LIV 6 Eda D6 £, I a9 QL8 UBOILIEMS Ha) ' dXya I B8 B INY))I6L )8 & )@¥T ] 61») @3 Vo M8 Aa W) QI8 al ;@w 3 a QYY) 08 The new moon in the lunar month &6 2. @0, corresponding to the latter part of March or the beginning of April, is the commencement of the lunar year: thus for the year 1841 March 23rd, or March 12th, Mala- yalim time, will be L.Q@® 0972 and the next day the first day of the lunar year 16. The lunar month is divided into two parts termed adhr¥ o, each consisting of 15 - L' dB6r0, Or days. I The first or bright half of the month is called (o &~ 1M, agdOlal The second or dark fortnight is termed &) Mo, or HAIPOD 1 S aiSMNe, L 1@a X<, OF BHQIDal SN The 15th day or full moon is termed ad @ QIIQ, or more common- ly sugemoy a0l the 30th or day of her conjunction is termed @ @70197n5), more commonly &Q I 17. A a_ &6 - or lunar day is, for astrological purposes, divided into Of these, there are eleven tour two parts called & 6N G833 Karanas which, viz. o 8 0 (MNIGh," el B@o oMo a P ic, are always 1n D D N p D iy connexion with the new moon the others succeed each other in regular order; thus, = (@)oo eocd gAlgma11) cnflealo n._,)a_fl alor) & 3 e SC0N0AE ol SO GI®0o £, ! DU O Q)P 2icoQIIDD O..v@_o o %')L_J 1B o adJo G..Dg’ Ly Qe GO ailerT) L 6NN MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 213 ¢ Malayalim explanation of the above. ag Qe ) AN @TED (@)@l IBEN T o N\Nenbo; BN Iy QN ayell aiomd); @AlwRic epo com; aim W0 @A @ o 1¢d ;o emdiNmh cSleado ayeil; A &1 I@d 10 £P@ 5 0Vay ARG G U3 ; @ A0N@ e (\Sende; (NAIBRNG ayaii au o); BURANQNM & LB GVO; ag)dI B SR @b a3 af S\ 898U B NSleads ayal); @ I8 s ab O] BED; AI@OMIWEBIT UM ald; alad) o Q..J'\O%r] 0’\5’00.()0. Wy @DaI0at HNORD (@ j@altBaREd ayel) atcnd; .1 ol TR/ BP®m GDM; @0 N igd alle; 2. ©@E)QNG cNeabe ayol); elemid e o o) the SP@ ;. dadilolod egm U (MO di) @b i) of NSleOo; @oaY @R ayall ain; onaidiolich ola LP® GOM; LAV el ald); ag@Iece) of @@ MSleado ayal; BB o) £ Pm: @ OQIBULBINVIT GYM iy ; al@lomIVesilah dla) ay8® ; alrailom M98 I @0 atimyo. ach 18. mMai(anesdo. Nine planets are, Sun. Moon. 4 2 (O30, 62190, Mars; son of the Earth. J01 e juun, Mercury ; son of the Moon by Rokhini. TRl Jupiter ; preceptor to the gods. o @0, Venus ; preceptor to the @o0r\Q@ 0290 Assuranmar. nto oM, Saturn ; offspring of the Sun by Chiya. fouk ©90, Moon’s ascending Node. 6.0, Moon’s descending Node. 1 guifll‘ An Eclipse is called ((\)an6me. A Planet 2 2 L(D0.00. A Star, bk kb M X (D)o Lucky time ,, ,, Q(@Q®@ 0. i e. favorable time for the performance ool of religious and other ceremonies. A GRAMMAR OF THE 214 Copies of original letters with nearly literal translations, intended to ex- hibit the style of writing in common use both in North and South Malabar. w9 ! 2 .00 012203 VIR @IS Sods —_— D3O e ©0:8320d G20 o HONIEIYe 0g)e (YO I@D , @RS OlOM 61 I e M0 CIQ) BOIRBEG H 678 g‘; @QJ S n@(‘d‘fm 63 @&)9%6\(6@9%@4@1 a\c am,flmja YD (0] S &S @D, MR GVAIDLE6S CBlio GO o 6 ANV RN Bldh 0o 6% aa:\obo M7 FOONDIE, WIT .5 HOS B0 warmmfi@gonb VL@ AURICQ)e B 60 QQflo HEOM. 0211605 98B 28l MILYHH &))@"@C‘&omfl 6" on - AW B Iladadl el IS PEB@INIT ol (oL fl\fl_gzfl(olq D NN ®) DN TDIBEO. o_flowoerfiau,o o — Q6628 o lle) HIYEIP O de MEIORA) 60RO — 62 @D 5.6 OBITE LLIMIYSS WEMNE36S Qfl_,@qgj)fib HPY YD IEHOEHINE (VIR SOLDBCe Mages eovd AW ailandle) 6034 (MVIY @oIDEITH (rYLe 6o QI & el FYHMSHTTISABH CVaNIN'@3Ve 6211 ®DAIINNIVS] = [ ple | B O agfol .0 6B IUde ag)FN 2| MO LMo BREMELD 6L HE NN QITEYD) @O)H I EIN I0)H6 and 3 (F‘ O ag) ™ O LJe L0LBBMm HOVIDIONe 1 0M—ng PV ® with o) 0I& ;0] Caus To Saib The Rajah residing at,— (in the Kuj North,)— with his salam writes as follows. After having seen you at the) the time of my leaving, I reached hither and have continued to reside here, each with bodily health for the space of one year On account of my living Th at such a distance, I have now but few opportunities to know and rejoice As nothing, among 1 th respecting your bodily health and other enjoyments the many Talook affairs, has yet been effected, I shall be obliged to remain ilm' fees, 1 here sometime longer. Moreover as residing at Tellichery is able Th, to render me great assistance in some of my affairs, you showing me favor ang ] Sum must be pleased to write a letter and send it by me to that Gentleman, fivey that he may assist me as much as possible 0 g Written on the 30th of Cunne in the year 1015, Malabar date* corres- 8 RO ponding to Oct. 14th 1839-40 Shri Rajah Privi 0 al| 4 The natives compute their present era from the building of @#oge Quilon. A. D. 825 MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 215 eX: Mg Jals ——Q {2 |9 @YD @éo@&@@o@&(‘m @D S O e ®SQo 21682210 1g e OB ST LB Qo — 65 ) Bl 032,15 ag™MaiMe @)D ag) Yaimee e ol Ji) @®32Go O I OBEW ai)l2 PETIQo HIVINVA OIS g BEOM AlOBERe HOS B5EeT goad gloayes coglailong oY) ©ee #ellond @osiwoge? wigyla Wan e@Ins Goe) Y 026N msmfl%@@r@@mc ai168ed 0612 ea B @ S aflo alezeige oo 0dilge MoIvIn Ay arecieensn O] OBIFa 00D BSIY OBICAE GAID 6 BB ) OO @RS EOTD AICMITD P62 e Bhe 10 2 i3 Qe H1n 9 Mo oo a7 Qo MIBIVAJe OEBISTR OLIHNQJo L 6o, o o®o BIGjo 62198]) (M WAINE B21IBIOV6 A B (ro— £, 00 oo 9L 1mIBIdM g agf @) ANS agorm @ ®ailp ;9 s, )M Rajah’s Letter or Order. ) Whereas because 40,000 Kulleyans, (about 570 pounds English money) ) & including all expences, have been paid for the privilege of giving the peo- o) ple under the authority of: Mo —an Umbrella® and Lamp with a Chain; and for permitting Coche-Itty and Matten, servants to the | —, to wear () a (particular kind of,) Bracelet, a Knife, and Style (i. e Iron pen,) inlaid with Gold; you must put this order into execution. And whereas be- cause there was no opportunity at Mavelicara of presenting the Bracelet, ) the Knife and Style to the two servants (lit: Children.) of the 0 If ou at they come to you, you must present the Bracelet, Knife, and Style, to 1616y each; (lit: both of them.) Respecting this ying The Rajah's order is written and sent to Krishnen Chembaker-Ramen, ,joice iithe year 964, Oct. 25th A.D. 1788. nong i angeeqoab, or epgeecum. Used in the above seuse @RS & mail @mmh signifies fees, or perquisites given to officers employed as a gents in such matters, ; able This word is also used in reference to R &k » OF persons possessing land in their own right. Whenever such lands are let, or re-let a certain favor sum, besides the amount given for the land, called AFLU® must be maly given to the &cdl. € ens'@o, The money gi\;en for the purchase of privileges, 4 In former days it was the custom of the Travancore G overnment, to y11es extort vast sums of mone y from the people under the denomination of privilege. By the giving the Umbrella and La mp is meant permission to allow privileged persons, when walking, to h re them, ave servants to carry 410 cl0 an Umbrella and a particuiar kind of Lamp befo 216 A GRAMMAR OF THE @200 ©I882IM) ©IRWD) CVAYSILLIN @YD) 86> @D 2iE@3MIOUBEIGD A 19RO A le {186 eeemD QIO SV at £1% 6210 agP®) 661w la{1eGomM®m @S] aileiQ,es ol the 6Mo ANEEFEOMN@IN 6HID @DEYLINGY, AIDOT BN o 01 V2 @VAIR B0 B SL:RAIMVe ULNM— ag)P X &HSLIINU Al A oM ©210M GoAeS AIEDDENIET s aila1d) 2.]Eles emld Oo MBI BT HIGRIV ]G OBHILIOD (NIF O He 6o dd 6B 6N8 AUITs AP GTLYLIIY, IO BHEMEe @I a 1Mo & QIIE3E QYo Q). MBLWHAINE 21.683QINe §;0o—. Werapilla Maytera* residing at Changanachery (in the South) with 3 many Salams, writes to inform Saib that the letter which Saib wrote on the 20th for me to go to Alway and receive the money for the 'fi timber, reached me. But while intending to go thither, I was obliged to ) go on some business to Koletenata. On my way back I will go to Alway, (U settle the account, and receive the money. mn 1017 August 7th. = Signed the 13 Common form of Malabar Brahmins letters written to Equals. fory Northern Style. 00t @IOMNEIS agPOD ag)epSo @OV OQINGo GOAIMNIA oo prey QI "o UC— Oé(f@.fl&:o ©)UA'B MNIDIVEMM AllalrIade (M) KO] I )2 10)Beed26ME (Ybae— oea@g:prvb ®HH Lo a0 3o @B I 08 @PV@BGo 601105 ag)TDHQYe OIS Me GO ® Mo EINE DEIIAICNs B)— g oD, The same written in the Southern Style. 0 L) ag)fgSo c@ro;flw@n_'@r@o GDANIN oo AINMVo AMR—= (NI 01 DIVermm allairnte SN io 16 e 6180608 tae— & 8) ey a{20d ®EEAIG0 0)OPSA @0 570 8p EVGLGe o) oy 6S ag@DH Qo HLIEMo ol GVAINNY), PPN @I D55 (MIDIWEMAD (Aeiderenb. S M-EMIENE DEIIAIM, B o— T tang o May terais a term of distinctionamong the Mahomedans of this country., to W MALAYALIM LANGUAGE. 217 hth The letter of Tanekata to inform Yeletum that on the 10th of this month at the time of the constellation Vrechecum, as it is appointed to celebrate the nuptials of Narayenen. Yeletum and all his family are requested to come on the 9th, to be ready for the bathing, (i. e. to the preparatory feast ;)::J: and ceremonies of which bathing is the commencement.) ) This is written in the year 1010, on the 5th of Oct Iy GV BONVS JMAIIG 66NIILI1aI0d QS ©0 6532 S1f@d Mo HerNOQEHHO QS afP DM@ om0t ALl ONIS el 88613(aIQYy ol6Mo Q0632 BRI @M Flesl @@ mth QIIRED OB (al]? WM HENEIQo 6d:ISAN W EOON HIE 0 aib P OBISOND 2] aPOD® UM— 601165 HEHITNFAION ™ the o o, &IMEBHQYe 6o HdbIa) Ad®Io OIS dto 660 2.1 D186 M Do HLUBEA e OIS AIGN Do EY ks OdHIENS o QUOR—Bodho OB () WM. BHONEIQYe @OAIINS OB®ITFAIM mm@&.;@%ffi)@o ®&0)o EOm MBLAITNE BRI Q0= George Kinattumkara of Muttata Street writes to inform Adam Sata the Mutelali (i-e rich tradesman) The letter desiring me to send the 13 Candies of white Kopra which 1is still owing, besides that which was forwarded, on account of the money I received from you, was brought here on the 10th and given, and I saw and read it As some of the Kopra is prepared, and the rest is being prepared, I will bring the 13 Candies of c(Oc Kopra within the 20th of this month M This is written in the year 1010, September 2nd Qo )@ From an Inferior to a Superior of high rank 500 NSOE GRAINNNWINTD oBe @INMIe WB)ae— QI OB A(®6elI0OQYSS Ao adlalitabe lumii).ajim) HOOBHIONE HOS OAIOS AIMIBOMN @VSIVONBe BFla ) m) B398 AI20IHMo e GDAICNN ag)aido ai189290 QI )ay Q160a | Pa16MEI0@DOHA) HBOoa {la| OOAENQY. OAIEM. &9 oo @RI, cfIP@IY OBMOa8pl@d MIBIWeNnh o) ol l AV Noartet O AIE HHOMIAINe B)ar- The affairs here are as follows As it is determined to marry the ) (10 daughter of Mitra Potty, (. e. one of the class of Malayalim Brahmins,) niry to Wasudeywan, you must also be pleased to come to conduct the neces- 2F 218 A GRAMMAR OF“ THE sary affairs. The writers must read and inform Wanyppura Pandarum of the whole of this affair. This is written by Kathappalil Narayanen Nelakunda. In the year 1012: on the 5th of September. From a Superior to an Inferior. @veiep S gonearm al@on ofly mom— @Ry dla W NS 0962 jMea b @GreRYes AlMe QIR IBeWYo 6.0 | R ailemMoe GVHEBINE @D IBQ), 062 6.2 19BN 610.i§61.2 M Yo ML aILHMIWYo OB IENE UM o— ®eomM M eoailes adl&:Qe ealeM. alSlde 2013 agf QY @Al OEYD ANIVOD NIVIVE MM HEeMBs 62lQ MIOAL ©IAMD ©IQAND. M2 e@26Me 21168320 M~ . The Chit that is coming to Alummutil Ummumen. At 10 in the evening of the 3rd my mother died”. The 14th being Pindem?*® you must come here on the 13th, and bring two Chodenas of cocoa-nut oil, and 2,000 ripe plantains, This Chit is written by Cherutala-Ramen Ramen the accountant of Alappurattam manyen Narayanen. In the year 1010, on the 4th of August, 45 The student will perceive that the words rendered my mother died, literally mean my mother’s sickness increased. From a superstitious mo- tive, the natives are afraid to use the word death in reference to their own families, instead of which the different classes use a variety of terms; as @ogls, Mismlad], Elmoeenleaedax)o R snf) 900 lsD), ;OO all¥ geaio®), &e. 4 Pindem is a ceremoney performed on behalf of the dead: the time for celebrating which, is determined by the Cast to which the deceased belonged. aaeglatlemwe, Among Rajahs. adlemwo, 29 Brahmins and other high classes. al@lmoo, 29 Soodras; lit: 16, because this ceremony is celebrated on the 16th day after the death of one of that Cast. adeimgl, 29 Roman Catholics, Syrians, and low class Hea- thens. odeimg)), Signifies washing away the uncleanness supposed to be con- tracted by the death of an individual: thus o3& Uncleanness, and g Bathing. THE END. i ; 4 Qo g 3= £ i J (o= ing S l)f t 0{ lied, mo- owi ms; jme ased 1}’ i8 [ [h' Hec- erl]: ®e ) 4 N e - oS ey i e mm. - * kk i OCE S ot 2ids SR i Sk n iz P R &t ¥ P D 2 .\\-\ e A e ettt i e — — 4 st . o e A = ams = s s e — 2 i W et R RR i 42 i 2R i 2 R 3 P 8 e et iamin ..“-t..flA.(.‘u.‘ ey o, R ™ g 5 o o e 5 D o i =5 o P % W.,.Qflf.» e % - P gk - s R aoys o = o e L A e RS g 1 i % g S P S - A o b % P e RIS i g s - b Lenchs s 3] s L sy osned il A oo i A o i st o i ;o S S 23 Sl SRR T e ot o) ¥e o8, 5 e g = 25 el B i v e IR 3! o m. F P s 2 ki AR i £ T R s b 8¢ o T P Tay 5 a o R g 7 Wi 8 R R o, ok o it P £ i vu el X % o<y g £y ot - A % ,”u e S W Sy il £ o Rz Sk iz P e i e % 3 i ! 2 24 =3 ¥ 3 2 ik s e i L W S w 245 .A i Bive, oy ca. fa i Nk 4 SETaL % & e 52 3 o s SRR = mw i i g C o b4 et & st ke i b T S LU B g7 s = ReR A b 4 i o & o i Sk e £ 2 ; TR G gl i N % B “df e TR, 5, S = i s i s X s £ * Dl e o v 2 = L s o8 Z 4id S o Ex 2 5 R LTy oot S e “.« e 1 i - b il = TEHE: P e g w i SR . s &2 35 % S R 2 3 pa T 20 o ¥ sl ¥ o i [ & ¥ T o i e s s ;.. = 1o e 0, e S e it it i 34 5 ol ¥ g £ - T et B A fit & b o i St ho! i e ah &4 «.,&” R = e sts s s S Dl s A I 34 2 g i o 08 il iy i 2y B 7 F %«,fifls/ i P, ey - e o s #w... 5 R e gid s A 3 b= B e S % it 7 o « i o5 B A e T 22 wa 2 o R o S & i ) 5 i S s b L% 7 G £é i ot ) et . ,r o i < i & 8. i = 3 b M, # 5 ; v i i i g o EAAK 5 S 5 o = i st o e o e e R0 - R 3 A s - e A = st Y i P ST . T, Iy % s ki e % S Lo gve ek i it T g s & s M 2 5 0% e & 3 e 55 3 G e R i 2 S e R 3z S = 62 Lot SO e rSA 08 5 o et e e 53 55 2 b 20 Y S ou b 2 it ek o s e . e o ¥ - e 2 = pe S s S S v 7 . ¢ T cm I 20 A Euroskala Offset AMMAR OF THE > o [M LANGUAGE, VierFarbSelector Standard * w0 o] % SPOKEN IN THE E ' TRAVANCORE AND COCHIN, :ug’ 15 AND THE 14 TH AND SOUTH MALABAR. a 13 12 D BY PERMISSION E TO HI é LAJAH OF TRAVANCORE. 9 v. JOSEPH PEET, OF THE d ISSIONARY SOCIETY, CARA, NEAR QUILON., 6 =2 i 5 DTTAYAM E 4 iE CHURcH MissioN PRrEess. — 3 i(fl*! 2 \‘/ Copyright 4/1999 YxyMaster GmbH www.yxymaster.com 1